WO2019225460A1 - Photosensitive transfer material, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method - Google Patents

Photosensitive transfer material, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2019225460A1
WO2019225460A1 PCT/JP2019/019460 JP2019019460W WO2019225460A1 WO 2019225460 A1 WO2019225460 A1 WO 2019225460A1 JP 2019019460 W JP2019019460 W JP 2019019460W WO 2019225460 A1 WO2019225460 A1 WO 2019225460A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
group
transfer material
carbon atoms
pattern
acid
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2019/019460
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
一真 両角
克己 篠田
漢那 慎一
知樹 松田
壮二 石坂
Original Assignee
富士フイルム株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 富士フイルム株式会社 filed Critical 富士フイルム株式会社
Priority to JP2020521190A priority Critical patent/JPWO2019225460A1/en
Priority to CN201980033557.6A priority patent/CN112136081A/en
Publication of WO2019225460A1 publication Critical patent/WO2019225460A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08FMACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
    • C08F20/00Homopolymers and copolymers of compounds having one or more unsaturated aliphatic radicals, each having only one carbon-to-carbon double bond, and only one being terminated by only one carboxyl radical or a salt, anhydride, ester, amide, imide or nitrile thereof
    • C08F20/02Monocarboxylic acids having less than ten carbon atoms, Derivatives thereof
    • C08F20/10Esters
    • C08F20/26Esters containing oxygen in addition to the carboxy oxygen
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/039Macromolecular compounds which are photodegradable, e.g. positive electron resists
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/20Exposure; Apparatus therefor
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/03Arrangements for converting the position or the displacement of a member into a coded form
    • G06F3/041Digitisers, e.g. for touch screens or touch pads, characterised by the transducing means
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H05ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05KPRINTED CIRCUITS; CASINGS OR CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS OF ELECTRIC APPARATUS; MANUFACTURE OF ASSEMBLAGES OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
    • H05K3/00Apparatus or processes for manufacturing printed circuits
    • H05K3/02Apparatus or processes for manufacturing printed circuits in which the conductive material is applied to the surface of the insulating support and is thereafter removed from such areas of the surface which are not intended for current conducting or shielding
    • H05K3/06Apparatus or processes for manufacturing printed circuits in which the conductive material is applied to the surface of the insulating support and is thereafter removed from such areas of the surface which are not intended for current conducting or shielding the conductive material being removed chemically or electrolytically, e.g. by photo-etch process

Definitions

  • the present disclosure relates to a photosensitive transfer material, a circuit wiring manufacturing method, and a touch panel manufacturing method.
  • a photolithography technique using a photosensitive resin composition is used for forming wirings and electrodes on a semiconductor element, a printed circuit board, and the like.
  • a pattern is formed by forming a layer of a photosensitive resin composition on a substrate, then exposing and developing.
  • a photosensitive resin composition for example, a chemically amplified photoresist composition containing a resin whose alkali solubility is changed by an acid, a compound which generates an acid upon irradiation with radiation, and a rust inhibitor is known (for example, special No. 2004-347951).
  • a chemically amplified positive resist composition containing a polymer compound, photoacid generator, carboxylic acid compound, and benzotriazole and / or imidazole compound that is soluble in an alkaline aqueous solution by the action of an acid is known (for example, see JP-A-2017-32983).
  • An object of one embodiment of the present disclosure is to provide a photosensitive transfer material that is excellent in resin pattern shape reproducibility and improves the linearity of conductive wiring when applied to the formation of a conductive pattern.
  • Another embodiment of the present disclosure aims to provide a method of manufacturing a circuit wiring that is excellent in linearity of a conductive wiring in a conductive pattern.
  • Still another embodiment of the present disclosure aims to provide a method for manufacturing a touch panel having circuit wiring excellent in linearity of conductive wiring in a conductive pattern.
  • Means for solving the above problems include the following aspects.
  • a polymer, a photoacid generator, and a benzotriazole compound each including a temporary support and a structural unit having a group in which an acid group is protected by an acid-decomposable group and having a glass transition temperature of 90 ° C. or less And a photosensitive resin layer containing a photosensitive transfer material.
  • P represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent
  • Q represents a substituent
  • n represents an integer of 0 to 4
  • a benzotriazole compound having at least one functional group selected from the group consisting of a sulfonic acid group, a thiol group, and a thioether group is excluded.
  • P is a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an acyl group, an amino group, a carboxy group, an alkylamino group, a dialkylamino group, or
  • Z represents an alkylene group
  • Z represents an alkylene group
  • Y represents a hydroxy group, a carboxy group, an alkylamino group, or a dialkylamino group.
  • Q is a halogen atom, hydroxy group, alkyl group, aryl group, heterocyclic group, acyl group, amino group, —ZY group, alkoxy group, carboxy group, or alkoxyacyl.
  • Z represents an alkylene group
  • Y represents a hydroxy group, a carboxy group, an alkylamino group, or a dialkylamino group.
  • P is a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, an acyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, an amino group, or a —ZY group.
  • Z represents an alkylene group having 1 or 2 carbon atoms which may be substituted with a carboxy group
  • Y represents a hydroxy group, a carboxy group, or a dialkylamino group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms in each alkyl group
  • Q is a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, an acyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, an amino group, an alkoxy group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, a carboxy group, or carbon
  • P represents a hydrogen atom or a -ZY group
  • Z represents an alkylene group having 1 or 2 carbon atoms which may be substituted with a carboxy group
  • Y represents a dialkylamino group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms in each alkyl group
  • Q is an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, or an alkoxy group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms
  • n is 0
  • R 31 and R 32 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group, and at least one of R 31 and R 32 is an alkyl group or an aryl group.
  • R 33 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, R 31 or R 32 and R 33 may be linked to form a cyclic ether,
  • R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group,
  • X 0 represents a single bond or a linking group.
  • ⁇ 12> The photosensitive transfer material according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 11>, wherein the photosensitive resin layer further contains an amine compound other than the benzotriazole compound.
  • ⁇ 15> A step of bonding the outermost layer on the photosensitive resin layer side of the temporary support of the photosensitive transfer material according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 14> to a substrate; The step of pattern exposure of the photosensitive resin layer of the photosensitive transfer material after the step of pasting, the step of developing the photosensitive resin layer after the step of pattern exposure to form a pattern, and the arrangement of the pattern And a step of etching a substrate in a region that has not been formed.
  • ⁇ 16> The method for producing circuit wiring according to ⁇ 15>, wherein the substrate is a substrate containing copper.
  • a step of bonding the outermost layer on the photosensitive resin layer side of the temporary support of the photosensitive transfer material according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 14> to the substrate, and the step of bonding A step of pattern exposing the photosensitive resin layer of the photosensitive transfer material later, a step of developing the photosensitive resin layer after the pattern exposing step to form a pattern, and an area where the pattern is not disposed And a step of etching the substrate in the method.
  • a photosensitive transfer material that has excellent resin pattern shape reproducibility and improves the linearity of conductive wiring when applied to the formation of a conductive pattern.
  • a circuit wiring manufacturing method that is excellent in linearity of conductive wiring in a conductive pattern.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a layer configuration of the photosensitive transfer material of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a method for manufacturing circuit wiring using the photosensitive transfer material of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern A.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern B.
  • a numerical range expressed using “to” means a range including numerical values described before and after “to” as a lower limit value and an upper limit value.
  • an upper limit value or a lower limit value described in a numerical range may be replaced with an upper limit value or a lower limit value in another numerical range.
  • the upper limit value or the lower limit value described in a certain numerical range may be replaced with the values shown in the examples.
  • “(meth) acryl” represents both and / or acryl and methacryl
  • “(meth) acrylate” means both and / or acrylate and methacrylate. .
  • the amount of each component in the composition means the total amount of the plurality of substances present in the composition unless there is a specific notice when there are a plurality of substances corresponding to each component in the composition.
  • the term “process” is not limited to an independent process, and is included in this term if the intended purpose of the process is achieved even when it cannot be clearly distinguished from other processes.
  • the notation that does not indicate substitution and non-substitution includes those having no substituent and those having a substituent.
  • the “alkyl group” includes not only an alkyl group having no substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
  • “mass%” and “weight%” are synonymous, and “part by mass” and “part by weight” are synonymous.
  • a combination of two or more preferred embodiments is a more preferred embodiment.
  • the chemical structural formula may be described as a simplified structural formula in which a hydrogen atom is omitted.
  • the photosensitive transfer material of the present disclosure includes a temporary support, a polymer including a structural unit having a group in which an acid group is protected by an acid-decomposable group, and a glass transition temperature of 90 ° C. or less, photoacid generation And a photosensitive resin layer containing a benzotriazole compound.
  • FIG. 1 schematically shows an example of the layer structure of the photosensitive transfer material of the present disclosure.
  • a temporary support 10 a photosensitive resin layer 12, and a cover film 16 are laminated in this order.
  • the “acid group” refers to a proton dissociable group having a pKa of 12 or less.
  • the “group in which an acid group is protected with an acid-decomposable group” refers to a group having a structure in which an acid group is protected with an acid-decomposable group.
  • the group in which the acid group is protected with an acid-decomposable group is a structure in which the carboxy group is protected with an acid-decomposable group, that is, the hydrogen atom of the carboxy group is acid-decomposable.
  • a group having a structure substituted with a group is
  • the resin pattern has excellent shape reproducibility (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “shape reproducibility”), and when applied to the formation of a conductive pattern, the linearity of the conductive wiring. (Hereinafter simply referred to as “linearity”) is improved.
  • shape reproducibility shape reproducibility
  • linearity linearity of the conductive wiring.
  • the reason why the photosensitive transfer material of the present disclosure exhibits such an effect is not clear, but is presumed as follows.
  • the photoacid generator contained in the photosensitive resin layer can generate an acid upon exposure.
  • the acid generated by the exposure can act with a group in which the acid group is protected by an acid-decomposable group, which is contained in the structural unit of the polymer.
  • the acid-decomposable group can be removed from the group in which the acid group is protected by the acid-decomposable group by the action of the acid. For this reason, in the exposed photosensitive resin layer, the acid decomposition reaction of the photosensitive resin occurs, and the solubility in the developer increases. It is considered that the same principle as described above is also used for the photolithography technique using the photosensitive resin composition disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-347951 or 2017-32983. However, as described above, when a resin pattern is formed using a conventional photosensitive resin composition, the shape of the resin pattern may not match the designed pattern shape due to, for example, a residue generated by development.
  • inhibition of the acid decomposition reaction of the photosensitive resin caused by a metal component such as copper oxide present on a transfer target can be considered. That is, it is considered that a metal component such as copper oxide present in the transferred material acts on the acid generated by exposure and inhibits the acid decomposition reaction of the photosensitive resin, so that a residue is generated during development.
  • a metal component such as copper oxide present in the transferred material acts on the acid generated by exposure and inhibits the acid decomposition reaction of the photosensitive resin, so that a residue is generated during development.
  • a metal component such as copper oxide present in the transferred material acts on the acid generated by exposure and inhibits the acid decomposition reaction of the photosensitive resin, so that a residue is generated during development.
  • a metal component such as copper oxide present in the transferred material acts on the acid generated by exposure and inhibits the acid decomposition reaction of the photosensitive resin, so that a residue is generated during development.
  • Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-347951 although a rust inhibitor is added to a
  • the photosensitive transfer material of the present disclosure contains the above components, so that the benzotriazole compound in the photosensitive resin layer contains a polymer having a low glass transition temperature. It is considered that it easily moves in the conductive resin layer and coordinates to the surface of the transfer material. It is considered that the action of the metal component of the transferred body on the acid is reduced by the coordination of the benzotriazole compound on the surface of the transferred body. For this reason, according to the photosensitive transfer material of the present disclosure, the shape reproducibility of the resin pattern is excellent, and it is considered that the linearity of the conductive wiring is improved when applied to the formation of the conductive pattern.
  • the photosensitive transfer material of the present disclosure has a temporary support.
  • the temporary support is a support that supports the photosensitive resin layer and can be peeled off from an adherend such as the photosensitive resin layer.
  • Examples of the temporary support include a glass substrate, a resin film, and paper, and a resin film is preferable from the viewpoint of strength and flexibility.
  • Examples of the resin film include a polyethylene terephthalate film, a cellulose triacetate film, a polystyrene film, and a polycarbonate film. Among these, a biaxially stretched polyethylene terephthalate film is preferable.
  • the thickness of the temporary support is not limited, and is preferably 5 ⁇ m to 200 ⁇ m, more preferably 10 ⁇ m to 150 ⁇ m, from the viewpoints of ease of handling and versatility.
  • the temporary support preferably has light transmittance.
  • “having light transmittance” means that the transmittance of the main wavelength of light used for pattern exposure is 50% or more.
  • the transmittance of the main wavelength of light used for pattern exposure is preferably 60% or more, more preferably 70% or more, from the viewpoint of improving exposure sensitivity.
  • a measuring method of the transmittance a method of measuring using MCPD Series manufactured by Otsuka Electronics Co., Ltd. can be mentioned.
  • the photosensitive transfer material of the present disclosure includes a polymer having a structural unit having an acid group protected with an acid-decomposable group, and a glass transition temperature of 90 ° C. or less, a photoacid generator, and a benzotriazole It has the photosensitive resin layer containing a compound.
  • the photosensitive resin layer in the present disclosure contains a benzotriazole compound.
  • the benzotriazole skeleton in the benzotriazole compound is effective in reducing the action of the metal component of the transferred material on the acid described above.
  • the benzotriazole compound is not limited as long as it is a compound having a benzotriazole skeleton, and a known benzotriazole compound can be used.
  • examples of the benzotriazole compound include 1,2,3-benzotriazole, 1- [N, N-bis (2-ethylhexyl) aminomethyl] benzotriazole, 5-carboxybenzotriazole, 1- (hydroxymethyl) -1H.
  • -Benzotriazole 1-acetyl-1H-benzotriazole, 1-aminobenzotriazole, 9- (1H-benzotriazol-1-ylmethyl) -9H-carbazole, 1-chloro-1H-benzotriazole, 1- (2- Pyridinyl) benzotriazole, 1-hydroxybenzotriazole, 1-methylbenzotriazole, 1-ethylbenzotriazole, 1- (1′-hydroxyethyl) benzotriazole, 1- (2′-hydroxyethyl) benzotriazole, 1-propyl Benzoto Azole, 1- (1′-hydroxypropyl) benzotriazole, 1- (2′-hydroxypropyl) benzotriazole, 1- (3′-hydroxypropyl) benzotriazole, 4-hydroxy-1H-benzotriazole, 5-methyl -1H-benzotriazole, methylbenzotriazole-5-carboxylate, ethylbenzotriazole-5-carboxylate,
  • the benzotriazole compound is preferably a compound represented by the following formula (1) from the viewpoint of shape reproducibility and linearity.
  • P represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent
  • Q represents a substituent
  • n represents an integer of 0 to 4
  • a benzotriazole compound having at least one functional group selected from the group consisting of a sulfonic acid group, a thiol group, and a thioether group is excluded.
  • examples of the substituent represented by P include a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an acyl group, an amino group, a carboxy group, an alkylamino group, and a dialkylamino group.
  • substituent represented by P include a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an acyl group, an amino group, a carboxy group, an alkylamino group, and a dialkylamino group.
  • And -ZY groups are examples of the substituent represented by P.
  • examples of the halogen atom represented by P include a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom.
  • the alkyl group represented by P may be a linear alkyl group, a branched alkyl group, or a cyclic alkyl group.
  • the alkyl group is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
  • Examples of the alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms include methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, iso-propyl group, butyl group, tert-butyl group, hexyl group, cyclohexyl group, octyl group, decyl group, and dodecyl. Groups.
  • the aryl group represented by P may be a monocyclic aryl group or a condensed ring aryl group.
  • the aryl group is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 18 carbon atoms, and more preferably an aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • Examples of the aryl group having 6 to 18 carbon atoms include a phenyl group, a biphenyl group, a naphthyl group, a phenanthryl group, a terphenyl group, and a fluorenyl group.
  • the heterocyclic group represented by P may be an aliphatic heterocyclic group or an aromatic heterocyclic group.
  • the heterocyclic group represented by P may be a monocyclic heterocyclic group or a condensed heterocyclic group.
  • the heterocyclic group is preferably a heterocyclic group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, and more preferably a heterocyclic group having 3 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • heterocyclic group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms examples include a furyl group, pyrrolyl group, imidazolyl group, pyrazolyl group, pyridinyl group, pyrazinyl group, pyrimidinyl group, indolyl group, isoquinolyl group, carbazolyl group, phenanthridinyl group And phenanthrolinyl group.
  • the acyl group represented by P is preferably an acyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, more preferably an acyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and still more preferably a carbon number.
  • Examples of the acyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms include acetyl group, propionyl group, butanoyl group, and benzoyl group.
  • the alkyl group in the alkylamino group represented by P may be a linear alkyl group, a branched alkyl group, or a cyclic alkyl group.
  • the alkylamino group is preferably an alkylamino group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkylamino group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably an alkylamino group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms. It is an amino group.
  • Examples of the alkyl group in the alkylamino group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an iso-propyl group, a butyl group, a tert-butyl group, a hexyl group, a 2-ethylhexyl group, and a cyclohexyl group. , An octyl group, and a decyl group.
  • each alkyl group in the dialkylamino group represented by P may be a linear alkyl group, a branched alkyl group, or a cyclic alkyl group.
  • each alkyl group in the dialkylamino group may be the same or different.
  • the dialkylamino group is preferably a dialkylamino group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms in each alkyl group, more preferably a dialkylamino group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms in each alkyl group, particularly preferably
  • Each alkyl group is a dialkylamino group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • alkyl group in the dialkylamino group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms of each alkyl group examples include, for example, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, iso-propyl group, butyl group, tert-butyl group, hexyl group, 2-ethylhexyl Group, cyclohexyl group, octyl group, and decyl group.
  • Z represents an alkylene group
  • Y represents a hydroxy group, a carboxy group, an alkylamino group, or a dialkylamino group.
  • the alkylene group represented by Z is preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkylene group having 1 or 2 carbon atoms, and even more preferably an alkylene group substituted with a carboxy group.
  • Preferred is an alkylene group having 1 or 2 carbon atoms, particularly preferably an unsubstituted alkylene group having 1 or 2 carbon atoms, and most preferably an unsubstituted methylene group.
  • alkylene group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms examples include a methylene group, an ethylene group, a propylene group, a butylene group, and a hexylene group.
  • Y is preferably a hydroxy group or a dialkylamino group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms in each alkyl group, more preferably a dialkylamino group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group in the alkylamino group and dialkylamino group represented by Y may be a linear alkyl group, a branched alkyl group, or a cyclic alkyl group.
  • each alkyl group in the dialkylamino group may be the same or different.
  • the alkylamino group is preferably an alkylamino group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkylamino group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably an alkylamino group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • the dialkylamino group is preferably a dialkylamino group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms in each alkyl group, more preferably a dialkylamino group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms in each alkyl group, particularly preferably Each alkyl group is a dialkylamino group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • alkyl group in the alkylamino group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms and the dialkylamino group in which each alkyl group has 1 to 10 carbon atoms include, for example, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, iso-propyl group, butyl group Tert-butyl group, hexyl group, 2-ethylhexyl group, cyclohexyl group, octyl group, and decyl group.
  • P is preferably a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an acyl group, an amino group, a carboxy group, an alkylamino group, a dialkylamino group, or —
  • a ZY group more preferably a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group, an acyl group, an amino group, or a -ZY group, still more preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or -ZY group.
  • examples of the substituent represented by Q include a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an acyl group, an amino group, a —ZY group, an alkoxy group, a carboxy group, and the like.
  • groups and alkoxyacyl groups include a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an acyl group, an amino group, a —ZY group, an alkoxy group, a carboxy group, and the like.
  • a halogen atom represented by Q an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an acyl group, and a —ZY group are each a halogen atom represented by P in the above formula (1).
  • the alkoxy group represented by Q may be a linear alkoxy group or a branched alkoxy group.
  • the alkoxy group represented by Q is preferably an alkoxy group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkoxy group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • Examples of the alkoxy group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms include a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, a butoxy group, a tert-butoxy group, a pentyloxy group, a hexyloxy group, an octyloxy group, and a dodecyloxy group.
  • the alkoxy group in the alkoxyacyl group represented by Q may be a linear alkoxy group or a branched alkoxy group.
  • the alkoxyacyl group represented by Q is preferably an alkoxyacyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, and more preferably an alkoxyacyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • alkoxyacyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms examples include a methoxyacyl group (namely, methoxycarbonyl group), ethoxyacyl group (namely, ethoxycarbonyl group), butoxyacyl group (namely, butoxycarbonyl group), tert- Butoxyacyl group (ie butoxycarbonyl group), pentyloxyacyl group (ie pentyloxycarbonyl group), hexyloxyacyl group (ie hexyloxycarbonyl group), octyloxyacyl group (ie octyloxycarbonyl group), and A dodecyloxyacyl group (that is, a dodecyloxycarbonyl group) may be mentioned.
  • Q is preferably a halogen atom, hydroxy group, alkyl group, aryl group, heterocyclic group, acyl group, amino group, —ZY group, alkoxy group, carboxy group, or alkoxyacyl group. And more preferably a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an acyl group, an amino group, a carboxy group, or an alkoxyacyl group, and particularly preferably an alkyl group or an alkoxy group.
  • Preferable combinations of P and Q in the formula (1) include an embodiment in which a group group arbitrarily selected from the following (a) and a group group arbitrarily selected from the following (b) are combined.
  • (A) P is preferably a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group, an acyl group, an amino group, or a —ZY group, and more preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or a —ZY group. And particularly preferably a hydrogen atom or a —ZY group.
  • (B) Q is preferably a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an acyl group, an amino group, a carboxy group, or an alkoxyacyl group, and more preferably an alkyl group or an alkoxy group.
  • P and Q in the formula (1) include an embodiment in which a group of groups arbitrarily selected from the following (a) and a group of groups arbitrarily selected from the following (b) are combined.
  • A) P is preferably a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, an acyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, an amino group, or a -ZY group, and Z is An alkylene group having 1 or 2 carbon atoms, which may be substituted with a carboxy group, Y is a hydroxy group, a carboxy group, or a dialkylamino group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms in each alkyl group; Preferably, it is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, or a -ZY group, and Z is an alkylene group having 1 or 2 carbon atoms, which may be substituted with a carboxy group, Y is a dialkylamino group having
  • An alkylene group having a number of 1 or 2 and Y is A dialkylamino group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms in the alkyl group, particularly preferably a hydrogen atom or a -ZY group, and Z is an unsubstituted alkylene group having 1 or 2 carbon atoms.
  • Y is a dialkylamino group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms in each alkyl group.
  • (B) Q is preferably a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, an acyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, an amino group, an alkoxy group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, a carboxy group Or an alkoxyacyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, or an alkoxy group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • n represents an integer of 0 to 4, preferably an integer of 0 to 2, more preferably 0 or 1, and particularly preferably 0.
  • the benzotriazole compound may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the benzotriazole compound is preferably 0.01% by mass to 10% by mass with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer, and more preferably from the viewpoint of transferability, shape reproducibility, and linearity. It is 0.05 mass% to 10 mass%, more preferably 0.05 mass% to 2 mass%, and particularly preferably 0.05 mass% to 1 mass%.
  • the mass ratio of the content of the benzotriazole compound to the content of the following polymer is preferably 0.001 to 0.1, more preferably 0.001 to 0, from the viewpoint of shape reproducibility and linearity. .05, particularly preferably 0.001 to 0.01.
  • the mass ratio of the content of the benzotriazole compound to the content of the structural unit having a group in which the acid group in the photosensitive resin layer is protected with an acid-decomposable group is preferable from the viewpoint of shape reproducibility and linearity. Is 0.003 to 0.3, more preferably 0.003 to 0.15, and particularly preferably 0.003 to 0.03.
  • the mass ratio of the content of the benzotriazole compound to the content of the photoacid generator is preferably 0.01 to 5, more preferably 0.01 to 0.8 from the viewpoint of shape reproducibility and linearity. Particularly preferred is 0.05 to 0.3.
  • the photosensitive resin layer in the present disclosure includes a polymer (hereinafter referred to as “polymer A”) having a structural unit having a group in which an acid group is protected by an acid-decomposable group and having a glass transition temperature of 90 ° C. or less. May be referred to)).
  • polymer A a polymer having a structural unit having a group in which an acid group is protected by an acid-decomposable group and having a glass transition temperature of 90 ° C. or less. May be referred to
  • the polymer A includes a structural unit having a group in which an acid group is protected with an acid-decomposable group.
  • Examples of the acid group in the group in which the acid group is protected with an acid-decomposable group include a carboxy group, a sulfonamide group, a phosphonic acid group, a sulfonic acid group, a phenolic hydroxy group, and a sulfonylimide group.
  • the acid group in the group in which the acid group is protected with an acid-decomposable group is preferably at least one acid group selected from the group consisting of a carboxy group and a phenolic hydroxy group.
  • the acid-decomposable group in the group in which the acid group is protected with an acid-decomposable group is not limited as long as it can be eliminated by the action of an acid, and a known acid-decomposable group can be used.
  • the acid-decomposable group examples include an acid-decomposable group that protects an acid group by forming a skeleton such as ester, acetal, or ether.
  • Specific examples of the acid-decomposable group include a tert-butyl group, a benzyl group, a methoxymethyl group, and a tetrahydropyranyl group.
  • the acid-decomposable group is preferably an acid-decomposable group that protects the acid group by forming an acetal structure.
  • the structural unit having an acid group protected by an acid-decomposable group is preferably a structural unit represented by the following formula (A1) from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution.
  • the structural unit represented by the formula (A1) is a structural unit having a group in which a carboxy group that is an acid group is protected by an acid-decomposable group.
  • R 31 and R 32 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group, and at least one of R 31 and R 32 is an alkyl group or an aryl group.
  • R 33 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, R 31 or R 32 and R 33 may be linked to form a cyclic ether,
  • R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group,
  • X 0 represents a single bond or a linking group.
  • the alkyl group represented by R 31 and R 32 is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group may be a linear alkyl group, a branched alkyl group, or a cyclic alkyl group.
  • Examples of the alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms include methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, iso-propyl group, butyl group, tert-butyl group, hexyl group, cyclohexyl group, octyl group, and decyl group. It is done.
  • the aryl group represented by R 31 and R 32 is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 18 carbon atoms, more preferably an aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms, particularly preferably Is a phenyl group.
  • the aryl group may be a monocyclic aryl group or a condensed ring aryl group. Examples of the aryl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms include a phenyl group, a biphenyl group, a naphthyl group, a phenanthryl group, and a terphenyl group.
  • R 31 and R 32 are each independently preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • R 33 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • examples of the alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms represented by R 33 include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an iso-propyl group, a butyl group, a tert-butyl group, a hexyl group, Examples include a cyclohexyl group, an octyl group, and a decyl group.
  • the aryl group represented by R 33 is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 18 carbon atoms, more preferably an aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • the aryl group may be a monocyclic aryl group or a condensed ring aryl group.
  • Examples of the aryl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms include a phenyl group, a biphenyl group, a naphthyl group, a phenanthryl group, and a terphenyl group.
  • R 31 or R 32 and R 33 may be linked to form a cyclic ether, and preferably linked to form a cyclic ether.
  • the number of ring members of the cyclic ether is not limited, and is preferably 5 or 6, more preferably 5.
  • R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and is preferably a hydrogen atom from the viewpoint that the glass transition temperature of the polymer A can be further lowered.
  • the content of the structural unit in which R 34 is a hydrogen atom is preferably 20% by mass or more based on the total mass of the structural unit having a group in which an acid group is protected by an acid-decomposable group.
  • the content of the structural unit in which R 34 is a hydrogen atom can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity calculated by a conventional method from 13 C-nuclear magnetic resonance spectrum (NMR) measurement. .
  • X 0 represents a single bond or a linking group, and preferably a single bond.
  • the linking group represented by X 0 is preferably an alkylene group, an arylene group, —C ( ⁇ O) O—, —C ( ⁇ O) NR N —, —O—, or a combination thereof.
  • An alkylene group or an arylene group is more preferable, and an arylene group is particularly preferable.
  • RN represents an alkyl group or a hydrogen atom, preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms or a hydrogen atom, more preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
  • the structural unit represented by the following formula (A2) is more preferable from the viewpoint of further increasing the sensitivity during pattern formation.
  • R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • R 35 to R 41 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • R 34 is preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • R 35 to R 41 are preferably hydrogen atoms.
  • the structural unit having an acid group protected by an acid-decomposable group is preferably a structural unit represented by the following formula (A3) from the viewpoint of suppressing deformation of the pattern shape.
  • the structural unit represented by the formula (A3) is a structural unit having a group in which a phenolic hydroxy group which is an acid group is protected with an acid-decomposable group.
  • R B1 and R B2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group, and at least one of R B1 and R B2 is an alkyl group or an aryl group , R B3 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R B1 or R B2 and R B3 may be linked to form a cyclic ether, R B4 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, X B represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, R B12 represents a substituent, and n represents an integer of 0 to 4.
  • the alkyl group in R B1 and R B2 has the same meaning as the alkyl group represented by R 31 and R 32 in formula (A1), and the preferred range is also the same.
  • the aryl group in R B1 and R B2 has the same meaning as the aryl group represented by R 31 and R 32 in formula (A1), and the preferred range is also the same.
  • R B1 and R B2 are preferably each independently a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • R B3 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • R B1 or R B2 and R B3 may be linked to form a cyclic ether, or R B1 or R B2 and R B3 may be linked to form a cyclic ether.
  • the number of ring members of the cyclic ether is not limited and is preferably 5 or 6, and more preferably 5.
  • R B4 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and is preferably a hydrogen atom from the viewpoint that the glass transition temperature of the polymer A can be further lowered.
  • the content of the structural unit in which R B4 is a hydrogen atom is preferably 20% by mass or more based on all structural units having a group in which an acid group is protected with an acid-decomposable group.
  • the content of the structural unit in which R B4 is a hydrogen atom can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity calculated by a conventional method from 13 C-nuclear magnetic resonance spectrum (NMR) measurement. .
  • X B represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and preferably a single bond, an alkylene group, —C ( ⁇ O) O—, —C ( ⁇ O) NR N —, —O— or a combination thereof, and more preferably a single bond.
  • the alkylene group may be linear, may have a branch or a cyclic structure, and may have a substituent.
  • the alkylene group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • RN represents an alkyl group or a hydrogen atom, preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms or a hydrogen atom, and more preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • X B contains —C ( ⁇ O) O—
  • an embodiment in which the carbon atom contained in —C ( ⁇ O) O— and the carbon atom bonded to R B4 are directly bonded is preferable.
  • the group containing R B1 to R B3 that is, —OCR B1 R B2 (OR B3 )
  • X B are preferably bonded to each other at the para position.
  • R B12 represents a substituent, preferably an alkyl group or a halogen atom.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group is preferably 1 to 10, and more preferably 1 to 4.
  • n represents an integer of 0 to 4, preferably 0 or 1, and more preferably 0.
  • the structural unit represented by the following formula (A4) is more preferable from the viewpoint of suppressing deformation of the pattern shape.
  • R B4 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • R B5 to R B11 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms
  • R B12 represents Represents a substituent
  • n represents an integer of 0 to 4.
  • R B4 is preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • R B5 to R B11 are preferably hydrogen atoms.
  • R B12 represents a substituent, preferably an alkyl group or a halogen atom. The number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group is preferably 1 to 10, and more preferably 1 to 4.
  • n represents an integer of 0 to 4, preferably 0 or 1, and more preferably 0.
  • R B4 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
  • the structural unit having a group in which an acid group is protected by an acid-decomposable group may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the structural unit having a group in which the acid group in the polymer A is protected with an acid-decomposable group is preferably 20% by mass or more, more preferably 20% by mass with respect to the total mass of the polymer A. % To 90% by mass, more preferably 20% to 70% by mass, and particularly preferably 20% to 50% by mass.
  • the content of the structural unit having a group in which the acid group in the polymer A is protected with an acid-decomposable group can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of peak intensity calculated by 13 C-NMR measurement by a conventional method. it can.
  • the polymer A can further include a structural unit having a pKaH group of 3 or more.
  • the polymer A further includes a structural unit having a pKaH group of 3 or more, thereby suppressing excessive diffusion of the acid generated from the photoacid generator, and resulting from the tailing of the resin pattern during development. The decline in sex can be suppressed.
  • the polymer A further includes a structural unit having a pKaH group of 3 or more, so that the resin obtained even when the photosensitive transfer material is developed after a certain amount of time has passed after exposure. Thinning of the line width of the pattern or the like can be suppressed (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “retention time dependency suppression”).
  • pKaH refers to the pKa of a conjugate acid.
  • group having a pKaH of 3 or more refers to a group having a pKa of a conjugate acid of the group of 3 or more.
  • the pKaH value of “—NH 2 ” is the pKa value of “—NH 3 + ”.
  • the value of “pKaH” is a calculated value obtained by ACD / ChemSketch (ACD / Labs 8.00 Release Product Version 8.08). Specifically, from the chemical structure of the structural unit having a specific functional group, the above-mentioned ACD / ChemSketch is used to calculate the pKaH value of the specific functional group.
  • the group having a pKaH of 3 or more is preferably a group having a pKaH of 4 or more, more preferably a group having a pKaH of 5 or more, and a pKaH of 5 or more from the viewpoint of resolution and retention time-dependent inhibition. More preferably, it is a group of 15 or less, and particularly preferably a group having a pKaH of 6 or more and 10 or less.
  • the polymer A preferably includes a structural unit having a pKaH of 4 or more, more preferably includes a structural unit having a pKaH of 5 or more, and a group having a pKaH of 5 or more and 15 or less. It is more preferable to include a structural unit, and it is particularly preferable to include a polymer A having at least a structural unit having a pKaH group of 6 to 10.
  • the group having pKaH of 3 or more is preferably a group having a nitrogen atom from the viewpoint of resolution and retention time-dependent suppression, and is an aliphatic amino group, aromatic amino group, or nitrogen-containing heteroaromatic ring. It is more preferably a group, more preferably an aliphatic amino group or a nitrogen-containing heteroaromatic group, and particularly preferably an aliphatic amino group.
  • the aliphatic amino group may be any of a primary amino group, a secondary amino group, and a tertiary amino group, but from the viewpoint of resolution and retention time-dependent suppression, A primary amino group or a tertiary amino group is preferred.
  • the aromatic amino group is preferably an anilino group, a monoalkylanilino group, or a dialkylanilino group, and more preferably a monoalkylanilino group or a dialkylanilino group.
  • the nitrogen-containing heteroaromatic ring in the nitrogen-containing heteroaromatic group is preferably a pyridine ring, an imidazole ring, or a triazole ring, more preferably a pyridine ring or an imidazole ring, and particularly preferably a pyridine ring. preferable.
  • the nitrogen-containing heteroaromatic group may further have a substituent on the nitrogen-containing heteroaromatic ring.
  • the substituent is not particularly limited, but is preferably an alkyl group, and more preferably a methyl group.
  • the group having a pKaH of 3 or more is particularly preferably a group having an alkylamine structure from the viewpoint of resolution and retention time-dependent suppression.
  • alkylamine structure include dialkylamine and trialkylamine. Specifically, dimethylamino group, diethylamino group, dipropylamino group, diisopropylamino group, 1,2,2,6,6- Examples thereof include a pentaalkyl-4-piperidyl group and a 2,2,6,6-tetraalkyl-4-piperidyl group.
  • Preferred examples of the monomer that forms the structural unit having the alkylamine structure include the following.
  • the structural unit having a pKaH group of 3 or more is preferably a structural unit represented by the following formula (B1) or formula (B2) from the viewpoints of resolution and retention time-dependent inhibition properties.
  • the structural unit represented by (B1) is more preferable.
  • R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • Z represents a single bond, a methylene group, an arylene group, —O—, —C ( ⁇ O) —NH—, or —C ( ⁇ O) —O—
  • R 2 is a single bond or at least one selected from the group consisting of an ether bond, a urethane bond, a urea bond, an amide bond, an ester bond, and a carbonate bond.
  • Yo represents a straight, branched or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and R 2 and R 3 , R 2 and R 4 , or R 3 and R 4 are bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • Q 1 represents an aromatic group having a nitrogen atom or a nitrogen-containing heteroaromatic group.
  • Z in the formula (B1) is a single bond, an arylene group, —C ( ⁇ O) —NH—, or —C ( ⁇ O) — from the viewpoints of resolution, retention time-dependent inhibition, and ease of synthesis. It is preferably O—, more preferably an arylene group, —C ( ⁇ O) —NH—, or —C ( ⁇ O) —O—, —C ( ⁇ O) —NH—, or — Particularly preferred is C ( ⁇ O) —O—.
  • Z in the formula (B2) is preferably a single bond, an arylene group, or —C ( ⁇ O) —O— from the viewpoints of resolution, retention time-dependent inhibition, and ease of synthesis. More preferably.
  • R 2 in Formula (B1) has at least one group selected from the group consisting of an ether bond, a urethane bond, and a urea bond from the viewpoints of resolution, retention time-dependent inhibition, and ease of synthesis. It is preferably a linear, branched or cyclic alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms which has at least one group selected from the group consisting of an ether bond, a urethane bond and a urea bond. It is more preferably a linear, branched or cyclic alkylene group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms, particularly a linear, branched or cyclic alkylene group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms. preferable.
  • R 2 in Formula (B2) is preferably a single bond from the viewpoints of resolution, retention time-dependent inhibition, and ease of synthesis.
  • R 3 and R 4 in the formula (B1) are each independently a hydrogen atom or carbon that may have an ether bond from the viewpoints of resolution, retention time-dependent inhibition, and ease of synthesis. It is preferably a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably a hydrogen atom or a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms. . Further, in the formula (B1), R 2 , R 3 and R 4 in the formula (B1) are bonded to form a nitrogen-containing aliphatic ring from the viewpoint of resolution and retention time-dependent suppression. An embodiment is preferred, and an embodiment in which a piperidine ring is formed is more preferred.
  • Q 1 in formula (B2) is preferably a nitrogen-containing heteroaromatic group from the viewpoints of resolution, retention time-dependent inhibition, and ease of synthesis, and includes a pyridyl group, a methylpyridyl group, an imidazolyl group, a methyl group. It is more preferably an imidazolyl group or a triazolyl group, further preferably a pyridyl group, and particularly preferably a 4-pyridyl group.
  • Examples of the structural unit in which pKaH has a group of 3 or more are derived from the structural unit described in paragraph 0140 of JP-A-2015-187634 and the monomers described in paragraphs 0068 to 0070 of JP-A-2011-039266. A structural unit is mentioned.
  • Examples of the monomer that forms a structural unit having a pKaH group of 3 or more include 1,2,2,6,6-pentamethyl-4-piperidyl methacrylate, 2- (dimethylamino) ethyl methacrylate, acrylic acid 2 , 2,6,6-Tetramethyl-4-piperidyl, 2,2,6,6-tetramethyl-4-piperidyl methacrylate, 2,2,6,6-tetramethyl-4-piperidyl acrylate, methacrylic acid 2- (diethylamino) ethyl, 2- (dimethylamino) ethyl acrylate, 2- (diethylamino) ethyl acrylate, N- (3-dimethylamino) propyl methacrylate, N- (3-dimethylamino) propyl acrylate, N- (3-diethylamino) propyl methacrylate, N- (3-diethylamino) propyl acrylate,
  • the content of the structural unit having a pKaH group of 3 or more in the polymer A is preferably 0.01 mass with respect to the total mass of the polymer A from the viewpoint of resolution and retention time-dependent suppression. % To 30% by mass, more preferably 0.05% to 20% by mass, still more preferably 0.1% to 10% by mass, and particularly preferably 0.4% to 4% by mass. Most preferably, it is 0.6 mass% to 2 mass%.
  • the polymer A can further include a structural unit having an acid group.
  • the photosensitive resin layer in the present disclosure has good sensitivity at the time of pattern formation, and is easily dissolved in an alkaline developer in the development step after pattern exposure. Development time can be shortened.
  • the acid group is incorporated into the polymer A as a structural unit having an acid group using, for example, a monomer capable of forming an acid group.
  • the introduction of the structural unit having an acid group into the polymer A is, for example, by copolymerizing a monomer having an acid group, copolymerizing a monomer having an acid anhydride structure, and hydrolyzing the acid anhydride. It can be carried out.
  • the upper limit of the pKa of the acid group is preferably 10 or less, more preferably 6 or less. Further, the lower limit of the pKa of the acid group is preferably ⁇ 5 or more.
  • the acid group examples include a carboxy group, a sulfonamide group, a phosphonic acid group, a sulfonic acid group, a phenolic hydroxy group, and a sulfonylimide group.
  • at least one acid group selected from the group consisting of a carboxy group and a phenolic hydroxy group is preferable.
  • the structural unit having an acid group is more preferably a structural unit derived from a styrene compound, a structural unit obtained by introducing an acid group into a structural unit derived from a vinyl compound, or a structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid. .
  • the structural unit having an acid group may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the structural unit having an acid group in the polymer A is preferably 0.1% by mass to 20% by mass, more preferably 0.5% by mass to 15% by mass with respect to the total mass of the polymer A. % By mass, particularly preferably 1% by mass to 10% by mass.
  • the pattern formability is further improved.
  • the content of the structural unit having an acid group can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity calculated by 13 C-NMR measurement by a conventional method.
  • the polymer A can further contain a constituent unit other than the constituent units described above (hereinafter, may be referred to as “constituent unit Z”) as long as the effects of the photosensitive transfer material of the present disclosure are not impaired. .
  • Various characteristics of the polymer A can be adjusted by adjusting at least one of the type and content of the structural unit Z.
  • the glass transition temperature of the polymer A can be easily adjusted by appropriately using the structural unit Z. By setting the glass transition temperature of the polymer A to 90 ° C. or lower, the photosensitive resin layer containing the polymer A can maintain the transferability and the peelability from the temporary support at a good level while forming a pattern. Better resolution and sensitivity.
  • Examples of the structural unit Z include styrenes, (meth) acrylic acid alkyl esters, (meth) acrylic acid cyclic alkyl esters, (meth) acrylic acid aryl esters, unsaturated dicarboxylic acid diesters, bicyclounsaturated compounds, maleimide compounds, Mention may be made of unsaturated aromatic compounds, conjugated diene compounds, unsaturated monocarboxylic acids, unsaturated dicarboxylic acids, and unsaturated dicarboxylic acid anhydrides.
  • the structural unit Z include styrene, tert-butoxystyrene, methylstyrene, ⁇ -methylstyrene, acetoxystyrene, methoxystyrene, ethoxystyrene, chlorostyrene, methyl vinylbenzoate, ethyl vinylbenzoate, (meta ) Methyl acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, n-propyl (meth) acrylate, isopropyl (meth) acrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, 2-hydroxypropyl (meth) acrylate, (meth And a structural unit formed by polymerizing benzyl acrylate, isobornyl (meth) acrylate, acrylonitrile, ethylene glycol monoacetoacetate mono (meth) acrylate, or cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate.
  • the structural unit Z
  • the structural unit Z a structural unit having an aromatic ring or a structural unit having an aliphatic cyclic skeleton is preferable from the viewpoint of improving the electrical characteristics of the obtained transfer material.
  • the monomer that forms the structural unit Z include styrene, tert-butoxystyrene, methylstyrene, ⁇ -methylstyrene, dicyclopentanyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, and isobornyl ( Examples include meth) acrylate and benzyl (meth) acrylate.
  • the structural unit Z a structural unit derived from cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate is preferable.
  • (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester is preferable from the viewpoint of adhesion.
  • (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester having an alkyl group having 4 to 12 carbon atoms is more preferable from the viewpoint of adhesion.
  • Specific examples include methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, propyl (meth) acrylate, n-butyl (meth) acrylate, and 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate.
  • the structural unit Z may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the upper limit of the content of the structural unit Z in the polymer A is preferably 70% by mass or less, more preferably 60% by mass or less, and particularly preferably 50% by mass with respect to the total mass of the polymer A. It is as follows.
  • the lower limit of the content of the structural unit Z may be 0% by mass or more with respect to the total mass of the polymer A, preferably 1% by mass or more, and more preferably 5% by mass or more.
  • the content of the structural unit Z is within the above range, the resolution and adhesion are further improved.
  • the content of the structural unit Z can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of peak intensity calculated by 13 C-NMR measurement by a conventional method.
  • the preferable example of the polymer A in this indication is given, this indication is not restrict
  • the ratio of the structural unit and the weight average molecular weight in the following exemplary compounds are appropriately selected in order to obtain preferable physical properties.
  • the polymer A may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the polymer A in the photosensitive resin layer is preferably 50% by mass to 99.9% with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer, from the viewpoint of developing good adhesion to the transfer target. % By mass, more preferably 70% by mass to 98% by mass.
  • Glass transition temperature (Tg) of the polymer A is 90 ° C. or less.
  • shape reproducibility, linearity, and adhesion of the photosensitive resin layer to the transfer target are improved.
  • the upper limit of the glass transition temperature (Tg) of the polymer A is preferably 60 ° C. or less, more preferably 40 ° C., from the viewpoints of shape reproducibility, linearity, and adhesion of the photosensitive resin layer to the transfer target. It is as follows.
  • the lower limit of the glass transition temperature of the polymer A is not limited, and is preferably ⁇ 20 ° C. or lower, more preferably ⁇ 10 ° C. or higher. When the temperature is ⁇ 20 ° C. or higher, good pattern formability is maintained, and, for example, when a cover film is used, a decrease in peelability when the cover film is peeled is suppressed.
  • the glass transition temperature of the polymer A can be measured using differential scanning calorimetry (DSC).
  • DSC differential scanning calorimetry
  • a specific measuring method can be performed in accordance with the method described in JIS K 7121 (1987).
  • the glass transition temperature in the present disclosure uses an extrapolated glass transition start temperature (hereinafter sometimes referred to as Tig).
  • Tig extrapolated glass transition start temperature
  • the measuring method of the glass transition temperature of the polymer A will be described more specifically.
  • the heating rate is about 20 ° C./minute, and is about the temperature at which the glass transition is completed. Heat to a temperature 30 ° C higher and draw a DTA or DSC curve.
  • the extrapolated glass transition start temperature that is, the glass transition temperature in the present disclosure, has a maximum slope of a straight line obtained by extending the base line on the low temperature side in the DTA curve or DSC curve to the high temperature side and the curve of the stepped change portion of the glass transition. Calculated as the temperature of the intersection with the tangent drawn at the point.
  • Examples of a method for adjusting the glass transition temperature of the polymer A to the above-described preferable range include a method using the FOX formula as a guide.
  • the glass transition temperature of the target polymer A can be estimated from the glass transition temperature of the homopolymer of each constituent unit of the target polymer A and the mass ratio of each constituent unit. It is.
  • the FOX formula will be described below using a polymer containing a first structural unit and a second structural unit as an example.
  • the glass transition temperature of the homopolymer of the first structural unit is Tg1
  • the mass fraction of the first structural unit in the polymer is W1
  • the glass transition temperature of the homopolymer of the second structural unit is Tg2
  • Tg0 is in accordance with the following FOX formula: It is possible to estimate.
  • the unit of glass transition temperature used in the FOX formula is Kelvin (K).
  • a polymer having a desired glass transition temperature can be obtained by adjusting the type and mass fraction of each structural unit contained in the polymer A using the FOX formula. It is also possible to adjust the glass transition temperature of the polymer A by adjusting the weight average molecular weight of the polymer A.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the polymer A is a polystyrene equivalent weight average molecular weight, preferably 60,000 or less, more preferably 2,000 to 60,000, and particularly preferably 3,000 to 50. , 000.
  • Mw Weight average molecular weight
  • the melt viscosity of the photosensitive resin layer is kept low, and bonding at a low temperature (for example, 130 ° C. or less) is realized when bonding to the transfer target. can do.
  • the weight average molecular weight and number average molecular weight (Mn) of the polymer A can be measured by gel permeation chromatography (GPC).
  • GPC gel permeation chromatography
  • Various commercially available apparatuses can be used as the measuring apparatus, and the contents of the apparatus and measuring techniques are known to those skilled in the art.
  • HLC registered trademark
  • -8220GPC manufactured by Tosoh Corp.
  • TSKgel registered trademark
  • Super HZM-M 4 .6 mmID ⁇ 15 cm, manufactured by Tosoh Corporation
  • Super HZ4000 4 mmID ⁇ 15 cm, manufactured by Tosoh Corporation
  • Super HZ3000 4 mmID ⁇ 15 cm, manufactured by Tosoh Corporation
  • Super HZ2000 4.
  • the measurement conditions are as follows: the sample concentration is 0.2% by mass, the flow rate is 0.35 ml / min, the sample injection amount is 10 ⁇ L, the measurement temperature is 40 ° C., and a differential refractive index (RI) detector is used. be able to.
  • the calibration curve is “Standard sample TSK standard, polystyrene” manufactured by Tosoh Corporation: “F-40”, “F-20”, “F-4”, “F-1”, “A-5000”, “ It can be created using any of the seven samples “A-2500” and “A-1000”.
  • the ratio (dispersity, Mw / Mn) of the number average molecular weight and the weight average molecular weight of the polymer A is preferably 1.0 to 5.0, more preferably 1.05 to 3.5.
  • the manufacturing method of the polymer A is not restrict
  • the polymer A can be synthesize
  • a polymerizable monomer for forming a structural unit having a group in which an acid group is protected with an acid-decomposable group and further, if necessary, a polymerizable monomer for forming the structural unit Z
  • the photosensitive resin layer in the present disclosure contains a photoacid generator.
  • the photoacid generator is not limited as long as it is a compound capable of generating an acid by irradiation with radiation such as ultraviolet rays, far ultraviolet rays, X-rays, and charged particle beams, and a known photoacid generator is used. Can do.
  • a compound that reacts with actinic rays having a wavelength of 300 nm or more, preferably 300 nm to 450 nm and generates an acid is preferable, but its chemical structure is not limited.
  • a photoacid generator that is not directly sensitive to an actinic ray having a wavelength of 300 nm or more can also be used as a sensitizer if it is a compound that reacts with an actinic ray having a wavelength of 300 nm or more and generates an acid when used in combination with a sensitizer. It can be preferably used in combination.
  • the photoacid generator is preferably a photoacid generator that generates an acid having a pKa of 4 or less, more preferably a photoacid generator that generates an acid having a pKa of 3 or less, and a light that generates an acid having a pKa of 2 or less. Acid generators are particularly preferred.
  • the lower limit value of pKa is not particularly defined, but is preferably ⁇ 10 or more, for example.
  • the photoacid generator examples include an ionic photoacid generator and a nonionic photoacid generator.
  • an onium salt compound described later it is preferable to include at least one compound selected from the group consisting of oxime sulfonate compounds described below, and more preferable to include oxime sulfonate compounds.
  • nonionic photoacid generator examples include trichloromethyl-s-triazines, diazomethane compounds, imide sulfonate compounds, and oxime sulfonate compounds.
  • an oxime sulfonate compound is preferable from the viewpoints of sensitivity, resolution, and adhesion.
  • Specific examples of trichloromethyl-s-triazines and diazomethane derivatives include the compounds described in paragraphs 0083 to 0088 of JP 2011-212494A.
  • oxime sulfonate compound a compound represented by the following formula (L1) is preferable.
  • R 21 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, and * represents a bonding site with another atom or another group.
  • any group may be substituted.
  • the alkyl group represented by R 21 may be a linear alkyl group, a branched alkyl group, or a cyclic alkyl group.
  • the alkyl group represented by R 21 is preferably a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group represented by R 21 may be substituted with an aryl group having 6 to 11 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, a cycloalkyl group, or a halogen atom.
  • the cycloalkyl group includes a bridged alicyclic group such as a 7,7-dimethyl-2-oxonorbornyl group.
  • the cycloalkyl group is preferably a bicycloalkyl group.
  • the aryl group represented by R 21 is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 18 carbon atoms, more preferably a phenyl group or a naphthyl group.
  • the aryl group represented by R 21 may be substituted with at least one group selected from the group consisting of an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and a halogen atom.
  • the compound represented by the formula (L1) is also preferably a compound represented by the following formula (L2).
  • R 42 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group
  • X 10 represents an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, or a halogen atom
  • m4 represents an integer of 0 to 3
  • m4 represents 2 or When X is 3, the plurality of X 10 may be the same or different.
  • the alkyl group represented by X 10 is preferably a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • the alkoxy group represented by X 10 is preferably a linear or branched alkoxy group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • the halogen atom represented by X 10 is preferably a chlorine atom or a fluorine atom.
  • m4 is preferably 0 or 1.
  • m4 is 1
  • X 10 is a methyl group
  • the substitution position of X 10 is an ortho position
  • R 42 is a linear alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms
  • 7,7- A compound that is a dimethyl-2-oxonorbornylmethyl group or a p-toluyl group is particularly preferred.
  • the compound represented by the formula (L1) is also preferably a compound represented by the following formula (L3).
  • R 43 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group
  • X 11 represents a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms
  • n4 represents an integer of 0 to 5.
  • R 43 is preferably a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl group, an n-butyl group, an n-octyl group, a trifluoromethyl group, a pentafluoroethyl group, or perfluoro-n-propyl. Group, perfluoro-n-butyl group, p-tolyl group, 4-chlorophenyl group, or pentafluorophenyl group, more preferably n-octyl group.
  • X 11 is preferably an alkoxy group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, more preferably a methoxy group.
  • n4 is preferably an integer of 0 to 2, more preferably 0 or 1.
  • Examples of the compound represented by the formula (L3) include ⁇ - (methylsulfonyloxyimino) benzyl cyanide, ⁇ - (ethylsulfonyloxyimino) benzyl cyanide, ⁇ - (n-propylsulfonyloxyimino) benzyl cyanide.
  • preferable oxime sulfonate compounds include the following compounds (i) to (viii), and the like may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • Compounds (i) to (viii) can be obtained as commercial products. It can also be used in combination with other types of photoacid generators.
  • the compound represented by the formula (L1) is also preferably a compound represented by the following formula (OS-1).
  • R 411 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an acyl group, a carbamoyl group, a sulfamoyl group, a sulfo group, a cyano group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group Represents.
  • R 412 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group.
  • X 401 represents —O—, —S—, —NH—, —NR 415 —, —CH 2 —, —CR 416 H—, or —CR 415 R 417 —.
  • R 415 to R 417 each independently represents an alkyl group or an aryl group.
  • R 421 to R 424 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkoxy group, an amino group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an alkylcarbonyl group, an arylcarbonyl group, An amide group, a sulfo group, a cyano group, or an aryl group is represented. Two of R 421 to R 424 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • R 421 to R 424 are preferably each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, or an alkyl group, and more preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • An embodiment in which at least two of R 421 to R 424 are bonded to each other to form an aryl group is also preferable.
  • Preferable specific examples of the compound represented by the formula (OS-1) include compounds described in paragraphs 0128 to 0132 of JP2011-212494A (exemplary compounds b-1 to b-34). However, it is not limited to these.
  • the compound represented by the formula (L1) the compound represented by the following formula (OS-3), the compound represented by the formula (OS-4), or the formula (OS-5) A compound is preferred.
  • R 22 , R 25 , and R 28 each independently represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group
  • R 23 , R 26 , And R 29 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a halogen atom
  • R 24 , R 27 , and R 30 each independently represent a halogen atom, an alkyl group, or an alkyloxy group.
  • X 1 to X 3 each independently represents an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom
  • n1 to n3 each independently represents 1 or 2 M1 to m3 each independently represents an integer of 0 to 6.
  • the alkyl group, aryl group, or heteroaryl group represented by R 22 , R 25 , and R 28 may have a substituent.
  • the alkyl group in R 22 , R 25 and R 28 is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • the aryl group represented by R 22 , R 25 , and R 28 is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • the heteroaryl group represented by R 22 , R 25 and R 28 is preferably a heteroaryl group having 4 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • the heteroaryl group represented by R 22 , R 25 , and R 28 suffices if at least one ring is a heteroaromatic ring. The ring and the benzene ring may be condensed.
  • R 23 , R 26 and R 29 are each independently preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, and a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group It is more preferable that
  • R 23 , R 26 and R 29 present in each compound are an alkyl group, an aryl group or a halogen atom. It is more preferable that one is an alkyl group, an aryl group or a halogen atom, and it is particularly preferable that one is an alkyl group and the rest is a hydrogen atom.
  • the alkyl group represented by R 23 , R 26 and R 29 is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • the aryl group represented by R 23 , R 26 and R 29 is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • X 1 to X 3 each independently represents O or S, preferably O.
  • the ring containing X 1 to X 3 as a ring member is a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring.
  • n 1 to n 3 each independently represents 1 or 2, and when X1 to X3 are O, n1 to n3 are each independently In addition, when X1 to X3 are S, it is preferable that n1 to n3 are each independently 2.
  • R 24 , R 27 , and R 30 each independently represent a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkyloxy group, a sulfonic acid group, an aminosulfonyl group, or Represents an alkoxysulfonyl group.
  • R 24 , R 27 , and R 30 are preferably each independently an alkyl group or an alkyloxy group.
  • the alkyl group, alkyloxy group, sulfonic acid group, aminosulfonyl group, and alkoxysulfonyl group represented by R 24 , R 27 , and R 30 may have a substituent.
  • the alkyl group represented by R 24 , R 27 , and R 30 is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyloxy groups represented by R 24 , R 27 and R 30 are preferably alkyloxy groups having 1 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • m1 to m3 each independently represents an integer of 0 to 6, preferably an integer of 0 to 2, more preferably 0 or 1, particularly preferably 0. Further, with respect to the substituents of the formulas (OS-3) to (OS-5), the formulas (OS-3) to (OS-5) described in paragraphs 0092 to 0109 of JP2011-221494A are disclosed. The preferred range of substituents of
  • the compound containing an oxime sulfonate structure represented by the formula (L1) is particularly preferably an oxime sulfonate compound represented by any of the following formulas (OS-6) to (OS-11).
  • R 301 to R 306 each independently represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group
  • R 307 represents a hydrogen atom or a bromine atom
  • R 308 to R 310 , R 313 , R 316 , and R 318 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, a halogen atom, a chloromethyl group, a bromomethyl group, or a bromoethyl group.
  • R 311 and R 314 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a methyl group, or a methoxy group
  • R 312 , R 315 , R 317 And R 319 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
  • Preferred ranges in the formulas (OS-6) to (OS-11) are the preferred ranges of (OS-6) to (OS-11) described in paragraphs 0110 to 0112 of JP2011-221494A. It is the same.
  • oxime sulfonate compounds represented by the formulas (OS-3) to (OS-5) include the compounds described in paragraphs 0114 to 0120 of JP2011-221494A. The form is not limited to these.
  • Examples of the ionic photoacid generator include onium salt compounds such as diaryliodonium salts and triarylsulfonium salts, and quaternary ammonium salts. Of these, onium salt compounds are preferable, and triarylsulfonium salts and diaryliodonium salts are more preferable.
  • ionic photoacid generators described in paragraphs 0114 to 0133 of JP-A-2014-85643 can also be preferably used.
  • the photoacid generator may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the photoacid generator in the photosensitive resin layer is preferably from 0.1% by mass to 10% by mass, more preferably from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution, based on the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer. 0.5 mass% to 5 mass%.
  • the photosensitive resin layer in the present disclosure is a polymer that does not contain a structural unit having a group in which an acid group is protected by an acid-decomposable group, as long as the effect of the photosensitive transfer material of the present disclosure is not impaired. It may be referred to as a “polymer of”).
  • the structural unit contained in the other polymer is not limited as long as the structural unit is a structural unit other than the structural unit having an acid group protected by an acid-decomposable group.
  • a structural unit having an acid group is not limited as long as the structural unit is a structural unit other than the structural unit having an acid group protected by an acid-decomposable group.
  • a structural unit having an acid group for example, the structural unit having a pKaH of 3 or more.
  • polyhydroxystyrene can be used as another polymer.
  • commercially available products include SMA 1000P, SMA 2000P, SMA 3000P, SMA 1440F, SMA 17352P, SMA 2625P, and SMA 3840F (above, manufactured by Sartomer), ARUFON UC-3000, ARUFON UC-3510, ARUFON UC-3900, ARUFON. UC-3910, ARUFON UC-3920, and ARUFON UC-3080 (above, manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.), Joncry 690, Joncry 678, Joncry 67, and Joncry 586 (above, BASF) can also be used. .
  • the content of the other polymer is preferably 50% by mass or less with respect to the total mass of the polymer A and the total mass of the other polymer. More preferably, it is 30 mass% or less, Most preferably, it is 20 mass% or less.
  • the photosensitive resin layer in the present disclosure may further contain an amine compound other than the benzotriazole compound (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “amine compound”).
  • the amine compound is not limited as long as it does not have a benzotriazole skeleton, and a known amine compound can be used.
  • amine compounds include trimethylamine, diethylamine, triethylamine, trioctylamine, di-n-propylamine, tri-n-propylamine, di-n-pentylamine, tri-n-pentylamine, diethanolamine, triethanolamine.
  • the amine compound is preferably at least one compound selected from an aliphatic amine and an aromatic amine, and more preferably an aliphatic amine.
  • the aliphatic amine is preferably an aliphatic amine having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably an aliphatic amine having 10 to 30 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably an aliphatic amine having 10 to 30 carbon atoms. It is at least one amine selected from secondary amines and tertiary aliphatic amines having 10 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • Aliphatic amines and aromatic amines may contain atoms other than carbon and nitrogen atoms, for example, oxygen atoms or sulfur atoms.
  • the aliphatic amine may be a chain amine compound or a cyclic amine compound.
  • amine compounds may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the amine compound is preferably 0.001% by mass to 5% by mass and more preferably 0.005% by mass to 3% by mass with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer.
  • the photosensitive resin layer in the present disclosure can further contain a surfactant from the viewpoint of film thickness uniformity.
  • any of an anionic surfactant, a cationic surfactant, a nonionic surfactant, and an amphoteric surfactant can be used, and a nonionic surfactant is preferable.
  • Nonionic surfactants include, for example, polyoxyethylene higher alkyl ethers, polyoxyethylene higher alkyl phenyl ethers, higher fatty acid diesters of polyoxyethylene glycol, silicone surfactants, and fluorine surfactants. Can be mentioned.
  • KP manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • Polyflow manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • F-Top manufactured by JEMCO
  • MegaFac manufactured by DIC Corporation
  • Florard Suditomo 3M Asahi Guard
  • Surflon manufactured by Asahi Glass Co., Ltd.
  • PolyFox manufactured by OMNOVA
  • SH-8400 manufactured by Toray Dow Corning Co., Ltd.
  • the surfactant preferably contains a structural unit X and a structural unit Y represented by the following formula (S1), and has a polystyrene equivalent weight measured by gel permeation chromatography using tetrahydrofuran (THF) as a solvent.
  • R 401 and R 403 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • R 402 represents a linear alkylene group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms
  • R 404 represents hydrogen.
  • L represents an alkylene group having 3 to 6 carbon atoms
  • p and q are mass percentages representing a polymerization ratio
  • p is 10% by mass
  • q represents a numerical value of 20% by mass to 90% by mass
  • r represents an integer of 1 to 18, s represents an integer of 1 to 10
  • * represents other Represents a binding site to the structure of
  • L is preferably a branched alkylene group represented by the following formula (S2).
  • R 405 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms in terms of compatibility and wettability with respect to the coated surface. Preferably, it is an alkyl group having 2 or 3 carbon atoms.
  • the sum of p and q is preferably 100, that is, 100% by mass.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the copolymer containing the structural unit X and the structural unit Y represented by the formula (S1) is preferably 1,500 to 5,000.
  • surfactants described in paragraph 0017 of Japanese Patent No. 4502784 and paragraphs 0060 to 0071 of JP-A-2009-237362 can also be used.
  • the surfactant may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the surfactant in the photosensitive resin layer is preferably 10% by mass or less, more preferably 0.001% by mass to 10% by mass with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer.
  • the content is particularly preferably 0.01% by mass to 3% by mass.
  • the photosensitive resin layer in the present disclosure may contain a solvent.
  • the solvent is not limited, and a known solvent can be used.
  • the solvent include ethylene glycol monoalkyl ethers, ethylene glycol dialkyl ethers, ethylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates, propylene glycol monoalkyl ethers, propylene glycol dialkyl ethers, propylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates, diethylene glycol dialkyl.
  • examples include ethers, diethylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates, dipropylene glycol monoalkyl ethers, dipropylene glycol dialkyl ethers, dipropylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates, esters, ketones, amides, and lactones.
  • Specific examples of the solvent include the solvents described in paragraphs 0174 to 0178 of JP2011-212494A, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • the solvent may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • two or more solvents for example, combined use of propylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates and dialkyl ethers, combined use of diacetates and diethylene glycol dialkyl ethers, or esters and butylene glycol alkyl ether acetates A combination with the above is preferred.
  • the solvent is preferably a solvent having a boiling point of 130 ° C. or higher and lower than 160 ° C., a solvent having a boiling point of 160 ° C. or higher, or a mixture thereof.
  • the solvent having a boiling point of 130 ° C. or higher and lower than 160 ° C. include propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (boiling point 146 ° C.), propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate (boiling point 158 ° C.), propylene glycol methyl-n-butyl ether (boiling point 155 ° C.). And propylene glycol methyl-n-propyl ether (boiling point 131 ° C.).
  • Examples of the solvent having a boiling point of 160 ° C. or higher include ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate (boiling point 170 ° C.), diethylene glycol methyl ethyl ether (boiling point 176 ° C.), propylene glycol monomethyl ether propionate (boiling point 160 ° C.), dipropylene glycol.
  • Methyl ether acetate (boiling point 213 ° C), 3-methoxybutyl ether acetate (boiling point 171 ° C), diethylene glycol diethyl ether (boiling point 189 ° C), diethylene glycol dimethyl ether (boiling point 162 ° C), propylene glycol diacetate (boiling point 190 ° C), diethylene glycol mono Ethyl ether acetate (boiling point 220 ° C), dipropylene glycol dimethyl ether (boiling point 175 ° C), and 1,3-butylene glycol diacetate (boiling point) 32 ° C.) and the like.
  • the content of the solvent in the photosensitive resin layer is preferably 2% by mass or less, more preferably 1% by mass or less, and 0.5% by mass or less with respect to the mass of the photosensitive resin layer. It is particularly preferred.
  • the photosensitive resin layer of the present disclosure can further contain a plasticizer for the purpose of improving plasticity.
  • the plasticizer preferably has a weight average molecular weight smaller than that of the polymer.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the plasticizer is preferably 500 or more and less than 10,000, more preferably 700 or more and less than 5,000, and particularly preferably 800 or more and less than 4,000 from the viewpoint of imparting plasticity.
  • the plasticizer is not particularly limited as long as it is a compound that is compatible with the above polymer and exhibits plasticity.
  • the plasticizer preferably has an alkyleneoxy group in the molecule.
  • the alkyleneoxy group contained in the plasticizer preferably has the following structure.
  • R represents an alkylene group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms
  • n represents an integer of 1 to 50
  • * represents a bonding site with another atom.
  • the photosensitive resin composition containing compound X does not contain compound X.
  • compound X an alkyleneoxy group having the above structure
  • an optionally added surfactant is not used as an amount of plasticizer in the present disclosure because it is generally not used in an amount that brings plasticity to the photosensitive resin composition.
  • plasticizer having an alkyleneoxy group having the above structure examples include compounds having the following structure, but are not limited thereto.
  • the plasticizer may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the plasticizer is preferably 1% by mass to 50% by mass and more preferably 2% by mass to 20% by mass with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer from the viewpoint of adhesion. .
  • the photosensitive resin layer in the present disclosure includes a sensitizer, an alkoxysilane compound, metal oxide particles, an antioxidant, a dispersant, an acid proliferator, a development accelerator, a conductive fiber, a colorant, It may further contain known additives such as a thermal radical polymerization initiator, a thermal acid generator, an ultraviolet absorber, a thickener, a crosslinking agent, and an organic or inorganic precipitation inhibitor. Preferred embodiments of these additives are described in JP-A No. 2014-85643, paragraphs 0148 to 156, paragraphs 0165 to 0184, and paragraphs 0139 to 0141 of WO2015 / 092731, respectively. Is incorporated herein by reference.
  • the lower limit of the average film thickness of the photosensitive resin layer is preferably 0.5 ⁇ m or more, more preferably 2.0 ⁇ m or more, and particularly preferably 5.0 ⁇ m or more from the viewpoint of transferability (laminability).
  • the upper limit of the average film thickness of the photosensitive resin layer is preferably 20 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 15 ⁇ m or less, and particularly preferably 5 ⁇ m or less from the viewpoint of production suitability.
  • the photosensitive transfer material of the present disclosure preferably further includes an intermediate layer between the temporary support and the photosensitive resin layer from the viewpoint of shape reproducibility, linearity, and adhesiveness of the photosensitive resin layer.
  • the intermediate layer preferably contains a binder.
  • the binder is preferably a water-soluble or alkali-soluble binder, more preferably a water-soluble or alkali-soluble polymer.
  • water-soluble means that the solubility in water at pH 7.0 at 25 ° C. is 0.1% by mass or more.
  • alkali-soluble means that the solubility in an aqueous alkali solution having a pH of 8.5 or higher at 25 ° C. is 0.1% by mass or higher.
  • the above “water-soluble or alkali-soluble” may be either water-soluble or alkali-soluble, or may be water-soluble and alkali-soluble.
  • binder examples include phenol formaldehyde resin, m-cresol formaldehyde resin, p-cresol formaldehyde resin, m- / p-mixed cresol formaldehyde resin, phenol / cresol (m-, p-, or m- / p-mixed).
  • novolak resin such as mixed formaldehyde resin, pyrogallol acetone resin, polyhydroxystyrene resin, modified cellulose resin, acrylic resin having a hydroxy group (for example, hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate homopolymer or copolymer), Starches, glycogens, chitins, agaroses, carrageenans, pullulans, gum arabic, soya gum, polyamide resin, epoxy resin, polyacetal resin, acrylic resin, polystyrene resin, polyester Urethane resins, polyvinyl alcohol, polyvinyl formal, polyamide resin, polyester resin, polyethyleneimine, polyallylamine, and polyalkylene glycols.
  • novolak resin such as mixed formaldehyde resin, pyrogallol acetone resin, polyhydroxystyrene resin, modified cellulose resin, acrylic resin having a hydroxy group (for example, hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate homopolymer or copolymer), Star
  • the binder is at least one selected from the group consisting of a novolak resin, a modified cellulose resin, and an acrylic resin having a hydroxy group, from the viewpoints of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer and pattern formability.
  • the resin is preferably at least one resin selected from the group consisting of a modified cellulose resin and an acrylic resin having a hydroxy group, and particularly preferably a modified cellulose resin.
  • the modified cellulose resin is preferably hydroxyalkylated cellulose from the viewpoints of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer and pattern formation.
  • the hydroxyalkylated cellulose include hydroxymethylcellulose, hydroxyethylcellulose, polyhydroxyethylated cellulose, hydroxypropylcellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, glyoxalized hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, and hydroxypropylmethylcellulose phthalate.
  • it is preferably at least one resin selected from the group consisting of hydroxypropylcellulose and hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, and is hydroxypropylmethylcellulose.
  • the binder is preferably at least one resin selected from the group consisting of polyvinyl alcohol and polyvinyl formal from the viewpoint of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer, and is polyvinyl alcohol. Is more preferable.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the binder is preferably 1,000 or more, more preferably from the viewpoint of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer, pattern formation, solubility in the developer after exposure, and transferability. Is from 2,000 to 100,000, particularly preferably from 10,000 to 50,000.
  • the binder contained in the intermediate layer may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the binder in the intermediate layer is based on the adhesiveness between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer, pattern formation, solubility in the developer after exposure, and transferability, with respect to the total mass of the intermediate layer, It is preferably 10% by mass to 100% by mass, more preferably 20% by mass to 100% by mass, still more preferably 40% by mass to 100% by mass, and particularly preferably 65% by mass to 85% by mass. .
  • the intermediate layer preferably contains particles from the viewpoint of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer.
  • the particles are preferably metal oxide particles or organic particles from the viewpoint of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer, and at least one selected from the group consisting of Si, Ti and Zr. More preferred are metal oxide particles containing elements or organic particles.
  • the metal of the metal oxide particles in the present disclosure includes semimetals such as B, Si, Ge, As, Sb, and Te.
  • the intermediate layer may have two or more layers.
  • each layer preferably contains a water-soluble or alkali-soluble binder.
  • the particles may be contained in a plurality of layers, but from the viewpoint of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer, the particles are contained in the layer in contact with the photosensitive layer. It is preferable.
  • the average film thickness of the intermediate layer is preferably 0.3 ⁇ m to 10 ⁇ m, more preferably 0.3 ⁇ m to 5 ⁇ m, from the viewpoints of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer and pattern formation. Particularly preferred is 0.3 ⁇ m to 2 ⁇ m.
  • middle layer is not restrict
  • the average film thickness of the intermediate layer is preferably calculated by measuring 10 points of the intermediate layer. Specific examples include surface shape measurement, cross-sectional optical microscope or electron microscope observation, and the like. In addition, Bruker's Dektak series can be suitably used for surface shape measurement. Moreover, a scanning electron microscope (SEM) can be used suitably for cross-sectional observation. Moreover, it is preferable that the thickness of the said intermediate
  • the method for forming the intermediate layer is not limited, and the intermediate layer can be easily formed on the temporary support by applying the intermediate layer-forming composition to the temporary support and drying it.
  • the coating method is not limited, and the coating can be performed by a known method such as slit coating, spin coating, curtain coating, and inkjet coating.
  • the method for preparing the intermediate layer forming composition is not limited, and for example, the above-mentioned resin and solvent can be mixed at a predetermined ratio by an arbitrary method, and can be prepared by stirring and dissolving.
  • an intermediate layer-forming composition can be prepared by preparing a solution in which each of the above resins is previously dissolved in a solvent, and then mixing the obtained solution at a predetermined ratio.
  • the intermediate layer-forming composition prepared as described above can be used after being filtered using a filter having a pore diameter of 5 ⁇ m.
  • an aqueous solvent is preferable. Examples of the aqueous solvent include water and alcohols.
  • the photosensitive transfer material of the present disclosure may have layers other than those described above (hereinafter, may be referred to as “other layers”).
  • Other layers include, for example, a cover film, a thermoplastic resin layer, and a contrast enhancement layer.
  • the photosensitive transfer material of the present disclosure should be produced according to the method for producing a photosensitive transfer material described in paragraphs 0094 to 0098 of JP-A-2006-259138.
  • a solution thermoplastic resin layer coating solution
  • a prepared liquid composition for intermediate layer
  • a photosensitive transfer material is suitably produced by applying a photosensitive resin composition prepared using a solvent that does not dissolve the intermediate layer on the formed intermediate layer, and drying and laminating the photosensitive resin layer. can do.
  • the photosensitive transfer material of the present disclosure can have a cover film from the viewpoint of protecting the photosensitive resin layer.
  • the cover film include a resin film and paper, and a resin film is particularly preferable from the viewpoints of strength and flexibility.
  • the resin film include a polyethylene terephthalate film, a cellulose triacetate film, a polystyrene film, and a polycarbonate film.
  • the resin film is preferably a polyethylene terephthalate film, more preferably a biaxially stretched polyethylene terephthalate film.
  • the thickness of the cover film is not limited and is preferably 1 ⁇ m to 2,000 ⁇ m.
  • thermoplastic resin layer The photosensitive transfer material of the present disclosure can have a thermoplastic resin layer between the temporary support and the intermediate layer from the viewpoint of transferability.
  • Preferred embodiments of the thermoplastic resin layer are described in JP-A-2014-85643, paragraphs 0189 to 0193, and the contents of this publication are incorporated herein.
  • the thermoplastic resin layer contains at least one thermoplastic resin selected from the group consisting of acrylic resins and styrene / acrylic copolymers.
  • the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure can have a contrast enhancement layer.
  • the contrast enhancement layer (Contrast Enhancement Layer: CEL) has a large absorption with respect to the exposure wavelength before the exposure, but the absorption gradually decreases with the exposure, that is, a material (hereinafter referred to as “light transmittance”).
  • This layer is sometimes referred to as a “photo-decolorable dye component”.
  • the photodecolorable dye component include diazonium salts, stilbazolium salts, and arylnitroso salts.
  • a phenolic resin is used as the film forming component.
  • the first embodiment of the method for producing circuit wiring includes a step of bonding the outermost layer on the photosensitive resin layer side of the temporary support of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure to the substrate (bonding step), A step of exposing the photosensitive resin layer of the photosensitive transfer material after the bonding step (exposure step), and a step of developing an exposed portion after the pattern exposure step to form a pattern (development step) And a step of etching the substrate in a region where the pattern is not disposed (etching step).
  • the substrate in the first embodiment of the method for producing circuit wiring may be a substrate itself such as glass, silicon, or film, and may be a conductive layer or the like on the substrate such as glass, silicon, or film, if necessary.
  • substrate with which arbitrary layers of were provided may be sufficient.
  • a fine pattern can be formed on the substrate surface.
  • the second embodiment of the circuit wiring manufacturing method includes a base material and a plurality of conductive layers including a first conductive layer and a second conductive layer having different constituent materials from each other, on the surface of the base material.
  • the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure is exposed to a temporary support on a substrate on which the first conductive layer and the second conductive layer, which are the outermost surface layers, are laminated in order from the surface of the base material.
  • International Publication No. 2006/190405 can be referred to, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure can be used as a circuit wiring manufacturing method for a touch panel or a touch panel display device.
  • a touch panel or a touch panel display device can be used as a circuit wiring manufacturing method for a touch panel or a touch panel display device.
  • FIG. 2A An example of the bonding process is schematically shown in FIG.
  • the substrate 22 and a plurality of conductive layers including the first conductive layer 24 and the second conductive layer 26 having different constituent materials are included.
  • the substrate (circuit wiring forming substrate) 20 in which the first conductive layer 24 and the second conductive layer 26 which are the outermost surface layers are laminated in order from the surface of the base material 22 In the photosensitive transfer material 100 according to the present disclosure described above, the photosensitive resin layer 12 that is the outermost layer on the photosensitive resin layer side of the temporary support is brought into contact with the first conductive layer 24 and bonded thereto.
  • the outermost layer of the photosensitive transfer material 100 on the photosensitive resin layer side of the temporary support is a photosensitive resin layer, but other layers are formed on the photosensitive resin layer, and the outermost layer is formed. May be other layers.
  • the cover film 16 is provided on the photosensitive resin layer 12 of the photosensitive transfer material 100A, the cover film 16 is removed from the photosensitive transfer material 100A (photosensitive resin layer 12), and then the photosensitive film is formed.
  • the photosensitive resin layer 12 of the conductive transfer material 100A is brought into contact with the first conductive layer 24 and bonded.
  • the bonding (transfer) of the photosensitive transfer material onto the first conductive layer is performed by stacking the photosensitive resin layer side of the photosensitive transfer material on the first conductive layer, and applying pressure and heating with a roll or the like.
  • a known laminator such as a laminator, a vacuum laminator, and an auto-cut laminator capable of improving productivity can be used.
  • the base material of the circuit wiring forming substrate is a resin film
  • roll-to-roll bonding can also be performed.
  • a base material is a glass base material or a film base material, and it is more preferable that it is a film base material.
  • the substrate is particularly preferably a sheet-shaped resin composition.
  • a base material is transparent.
  • the refractive index of the substrate is preferably 1.50 to 1.52.
  • the base material may be composed of a light-transmitting base material such as a glass base material, and tempered glass represented by gorilla glass manufactured by Corning Inc. can be used.
  • materials used in JP 2010-86684 A, JP 2010-152809 A, and JP 2010-257492 A can be preferably used.
  • a film substrate is used as the substrate, it is more preferable to use a substrate that is not optically distorted and a substrate having high transparency.
  • Specific examples of the material include polyethylene terephthalate (PET). ), Polyethylene naphthalate, polycarbonate, triacetylcellulose, and cycloolefin polymers.
  • Examples of the plurality of conductive layers formed on the substrate include arbitrary conductive layers used for general circuit wiring or touch panel wiring.
  • Examples of the material for the conductive layer include metals and metal oxides.
  • Examples of the metal oxide include ITO (Indium Tin Oxide), IZO (Indium Zinc Oxide), and SiO 2 .
  • Examples of the metal include Al, Zn, Cu, Fe, Ni, Cr, and Mo.
  • At least one of the plurality of conductive layers includes a metal oxide.
  • the conductive layer is preferably an electrode pattern corresponding to a sensor of a visual recognition part used in a capacitive touch panel or a wiring of a peripheral extraction part.
  • Circuit wiring formation board It is a board
  • a film substrate such as PET is provided with a plurality of conductive layers such as metal oxide and metal.
  • the exposure process is performed in the first embodiment, and the first exposure process is performed in the second embodiment.
  • An example of the exposure process (first exposure process) is schematically shown in FIG.
  • the photosensitive resin layer 12 is subjected to pattern exposure via the temporary support 10 and the intermediate layer 14 of the photosensitive transfer material after the bonding step. .
  • the exposure step As examples of the exposure step, the development step, and other steps in the present embodiment, the method described in paragraphs 0035 to 0051 of JP-A-2006-23696 can be suitably used in the present embodiment.
  • a mask 30 having a predetermined pattern is disposed above the photosensitive transfer material 100 disposed on the first conductive layer 24 (on the side opposite to the side in contact with the first conductive layer 24), and then the mask 30 And a method of exposing with ultraviolet rays from above the mask.
  • the detailed arrangement and specific size of the pattern are not particularly limited.
  • the electrode pattern and the part of the lead-out wiring are preferably fine wires of 100 ⁇ m or less, and more preferably 70 ⁇ m or less.
  • the light source used for exposure can be appropriately selected and used as long as it can irradiate light (for example, 365 nm, 405 nm, etc.) in a wavelength region where the exposed portion of the photosensitive transfer material can be dissolved in the developer. .
  • the exposure dose is preferably 5 mJ / cm 2 to 200 mJ / cm 2 , and more preferably 10 mJ / cm 2 to 100 mJ / cm 2 . It is also preferable to perform heat treatment before development for the purpose of improving the rectangularity and linearity of the pattern after exposure.
  • PEB Post Exposure Bake
  • pattern exposure performs after peeling a temporary support body from the photosensitive resin layer, before peeling a temporary support body, it exposes through a temporary support body, and peels a temporary support body after that. Also good.
  • the pattern exposure may be exposure through a mask or digital exposure using a laser or the like.
  • the developing step is performed, and in the second embodiment, the first developing step is performed.
  • An example of the development process (first development process) is schematically shown in FIG.
  • the temporary support 10 in the development step (first development step), the temporary support 10 (and the intermediate layer 14) is peeled from the photosensitive resin layer 12 after the exposure step (first exposure step).
  • the photosensitive resin layer 12 after the exposure step (first exposure step) is developed to form the first pattern 12A.
  • the development step is a step of forming a pattern (first pattern) by developing the pattern-exposed photosensitive resin layer.
  • Development of the pattern-exposed photosensitive resin layer can be performed using a developer.
  • the developer is not particularly limited as long as the exposed portion of the photosensitive resin layer can be removed.
  • a known developer such as the developer described in JP-A-5-72724 can be used.
  • the developer is preferably a developer in which the exposed portion of the photosensitive resin layer exhibits a dissolution type development behavior.
  • an alkaline aqueous developer containing a compound having a pKa of 7 to 13 at a concentration of 0.05 mol / L (liter) to 5 mol / L is preferable.
  • the developer may further contain an organic solvent miscible with water and a surfactant. Examples of the developer suitably used in the present embodiment include the developer described in paragraph 0194 of International Publication No. 2015/092731.
  • the development method is not particularly limited and may be any of paddle development, shower development, shower and spin development, dip development, and the like.
  • the shower development will be described.
  • the exposed portion can be removed by spraying the developer onto the exposed photosensitive resin layer by shower. Further, after the development, it is preferable to remove the development residue while spraying a cleaning agent or the like with a shower and rubbing with a brush or the like.
  • the liquid temperature of the developer is preferably 20 ° C. to 40 ° C.
  • the post-baking process which heat-processes the pattern containing the photosensitive resin layer obtained by image development.
  • the post-baking is preferably performed in an environment of 8.1 kPa to 121.6 kPa, and more preferably in an environment of 50.66 kPa or more.
  • the post-bake heating is more preferably performed under an environment of 114.6 kPa or less, and particularly preferably performed under an environment of 101.3 kPa or less.
  • the post-baking temperature is preferably 80 ° C. to 250 ° C., more preferably 110 ° C. to 170 ° C., and particularly preferably 130 ° C. to 150 ° C.
  • the post-baking time is preferably 1 to 30 minutes, more preferably 2 to 10 minutes, and particularly preferably 2 to 4 minutes.
  • the post-bake may be performed in an air environment or a nitrogen substitution environment.
  • the etching process is performed in the first embodiment, and the first etching process is performed in the second embodiment.
  • An example of the etching process (first etching process) is schematically shown in FIG.
  • the etching step (first etching step) at least the first conductive layer 24 and the second conductive layer 26 among the plurality of conductive layers in the region where the first pattern 12A is not disposed are formed.
  • Etching process By etching, a first conductive layer 24A and a second conductive layer 26A having the same pattern as the first pattern 12A are formed.
  • Etching of the conductive layer can be performed by a known method such as a method described in paragraphs 0048 to 0054 of JP 2010-152155 A or a dry etching method such as a known plasma etching.
  • etching method a commonly performed wet etching method in which the substrate is immersed in an etching solution can be used.
  • an etchant used for wet etching an acid type or alkaline type etchant may be appropriately selected in accordance with an object to be etched.
  • Acidic etching solutions include aqueous solutions of acidic components such as hydrochloric acid, sulfuric acid, hydrofluoric acid, and phosphoric acid, mixed aqueous solutions of acidic components and salts such as ferric chloride, ammonium fluoride, and potassium permanganate. Is exemplified.
  • the acidic component a component obtained by combining a plurality of acidic components may be used.
  • alkaline type etchants include aqueous solutions of alkali components such as sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, ammonia, organic amines, salts of organic amines such as tetramethylammonium hydroxide, alkaline components and potassium permanganate. Examples thereof include a mixed aqueous solution with a salt.
  • alkali component a component obtained by combining a plurality of alkali components may be used.
  • the temperature of the etching solution is not particularly limited, but is preferably 45 ° C. or lower.
  • the first pattern used as an etching mask (etching pattern) in the present embodiment preferably exhibits particularly excellent resistance to acidic and alkaline etching solutions in a temperature range of 45 ° C. or lower. Therefore, the photosensitive resin layer is prevented from being peeled off during the etching process, and a portion where the photosensitive resin layer does not exist is selectively etched.
  • a cleaning process and a drying process may be performed as necessary to prevent contamination of the process line.
  • the cleaning process is performed by cleaning the substrate with pure water for 10 seconds to 300 seconds at room temperature, for example, and the drying process is performed using an air blow, for example, with an air blow pressure (preferably 0.1 kg / cm 2 to 5 kg / cm 2).
  • the degree of drying may be appropriately adjusted.
  • the second exposure process is performed.
  • An example of the second exposure step is schematically shown in FIG.
  • the first pattern 12A after the first etching step is subjected to pattern exposure with a pattern different from the first pattern.
  • the first pattern remaining on the first conductive layer is exposed to at least a portion corresponding to a portion to be removed in the second development step described later.
  • the pattern exposure in the second exposure process is different from the mask used in the first exposure process (for example, the mask 30 as shown in FIG. 2B) (for example, as shown in FIG. 2E).
  • the same method as the pattern exposure in the first exposure step can be applied except that the mask 40) is used.
  • the second development step is performed.
  • An example of the second developing process is schematically shown in FIG.
  • the first pattern 12A after the second exposure step is developed to form the second pattern 12B.
  • the exposed portion of the first pattern in the second exposure step is removed.
  • the same method as the development in the first development step can be applied.
  • the second exposure process is performed.
  • An example of the second etching step is schematically shown in FIG.
  • the second etching step at least the first conductive layer 24A is etched among the plurality of conductive layers in the region where the second pattern 12B is not disposed.
  • the same method as the etching in the first etching step can be applied except that an etching solution corresponding to the conductive layer to be removed by etching is selected.
  • the second etching step it is preferable to selectively etch fewer conductive layers than in the first etching step, depending on the desired pattern. For example, as shown in FIG. 2, the first conductive layer is removed by etching using an etchant that selectively etches only the first conductive layer 24 ⁇ / b> A in a region where the photosensitive resin layer is not disposed. The pattern can be different from the pattern of the conductive layer.
  • circuit wiring including conductive layers 24B and 26A having at least two types of patterns is formed.
  • Photosensitive resin layer removal step An example of the photosensitive resin layer removing step is schematically shown in FIG. After the second etching step, the second pattern 12B remains on a part of the first conductive layer 24B. If the photosensitive resin layer is unnecessary, the second pattern 12B of all remaining photosensitive resin layers may be removed.
  • the substrate having the photosensitive resin layer and the like is immersed in a stripping solution that is preferably stirred at 30 ° C. to 80 ° C., more preferably 50 ° C. to 80 ° C. for 1 minute to 30 minutes. The method of doing is mentioned.
  • the stripping solution examples include inorganic alkali components such as sodium hydroxide and potassium hydroxide, or organic alkali components such as primary amine, secondary amine, tertiary amine, and quaternary ammonium salt. , A stripping solution dissolved in dimethyl sulfoxide, N-methylpyrrolidone or a mixed solution thereof. A stripping solution may be used and stripped by a spray method, a shower method, a paddle method, or the like.
  • inorganic alkali components such as sodium hydroxide and potassium hydroxide
  • organic alkali components such as primary amine, secondary amine, tertiary amine, and quaternary ammonium salt.
  • a stripping solution may be used and stripped by a spray method, a shower method, a paddle method, or the like.
  • the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure may include other optional steps.
  • the following processes are mentioned, it is not limited to these processes.
  • the second embodiment may further include a step of attaching a light-transmitting protective film (not shown) on the first pattern after the first etching step and before the second exposure step. Good.
  • a light-transmitting protective film (not shown) on the first pattern after the first etching step and before the second exposure step.
  • the first pattern is subjected to pattern exposure via the protective film, and after the second exposure step, the protective film is peeled off from the first pattern, and then the second development step is performed.
  • the manufacturing method of the circuit wiring which concerns on this indication can include the process of reducing the visible light reflectance of some or all of the some conductive layers on a base material.
  • the treatment for reducing the visible light reflectance include an oxidation treatment.
  • the visible light reflectance can be reduced by blackening the copper by oxidizing copper.
  • paragraphs 0017 to 0025 of JP2014-150118A, and paragraphs 0041, 0042, 0048 and 0058 of JP2013-206315A are described. The contents of this publication are incorporated herein.
  • the method for manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure preferably includes a step of forming an insulating film on the formed circuit wiring and a step of forming a new conductive layer on the insulating film.
  • the above-described second electrode pattern can be formed while being insulated from the first electrode pattern.
  • an insulating film having a desired pattern may be formed by photolithography using a photosensitive material having insulating properties.
  • a new conductive layer having a desired pattern may be formed by photolithography using a photosensitive material having conductivity.
  • the case where the circuit wiring having two different patterns is formed on the circuit wiring forming substrate including the two conductive layers has been described.
  • the number of conductive layers of the substrate to which the manufacturing method is applied is not limited to two layers, and a circuit wiring forming substrate in which three or more conductive layers are stacked is used, and the combination of the exposure step, the development step, and the etching step described above is used. By performing it three times or more, three or more conductive layers can be formed in different circuit wiring patterns.
  • the manufacturing method of the circuit wiring which concerns on this indication WHEREIN The base material has a some conductive layer in both surfaces, respectively, and the conductive layer formed in both surfaces of the base material It is also preferable to form circuits sequentially or simultaneously. With such a configuration, it is possible to form a circuit wiring for a touch panel in which a first conductive pattern is formed on one surface of the substrate and a second conductive pattern is formed on the other surface. Moreover, it is also preferable to form the circuit wiring for touch panels of such a structure from both surfaces of a base material by roll-to-roll.
  • the circuit wiring according to the present disclosure is a circuit wiring manufactured by the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure.
  • the circuit board according to the present disclosure is a substrate having circuit wiring manufactured by the method for manufacturing circuit wiring according to the present disclosure.
  • the use of the circuit board concerning this indication is not limited, for example, it is preferred that it is a circuit board for touch panels.
  • An input device is mentioned as an apparatus provided with the circuit wiring manufactured by the manufacturing method of the circuit wiring concerning this indication.
  • the input device in the present embodiment is preferably a capacitive touch panel.
  • the display device in the present embodiment preferably includes the input device in the present embodiment.
  • the display device in the present embodiment is preferably an image display device such as an organic EL display device and a liquid crystal display device.
  • the touch panel according to the present disclosure is a touch panel having at least circuit wiring manufactured by the method for manufacturing circuit wiring according to the present disclosure.
  • the touch panel according to the present disclosure preferably includes at least a transparent substrate, an electrode, and an insulating layer or a protective layer.
  • the touch panel display device according to the present disclosure is a touch panel display device having at least circuit wiring manufactured by the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure, and is preferably a touch panel display device including the touch panel according to the present disclosure.
  • the method for manufacturing a touch panel or a touch panel display device according to the present disclosure preferably includes a method for manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure.
  • the method for manufacturing a touch panel or a touch panel display device includes a step of bonding the outermost layer on the photosensitive resin layer side of the temporary support of the photosensitive transfer material obtained by the method for manufacturing a photosensitive transfer material, and the above A pattern exposure step of the photosensitive layer of the photosensitive transfer material after the bonding step, a step of developing the photosensitive layer after the pattern exposure step to form a pattern, and the pattern is not disposed It is preferable to include a process of etching the substrate in the region in this order.
  • the details of each process are synonymous with the details of each process in the above-described circuit wiring manufacturing method, and the preferred embodiments are also the same.
  • any of known methods such as a resistive film method, a capacitance method, an ultrasonic method, an electromagnetic induction method, and an optical method may be used.
  • the electrostatic capacity method is preferable.
  • the touch panel type for example, a so-called in-cell type (for example, those described in FIGS. 5, 6, 7 and 8 of JP-T-2012-517051), a so-called on-cell type (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-517051). No. 168125 in FIG. 19, JP 2012-89102 A in FIGS.
  • OGS One Glass Solution
  • TOL Touch-on-Lens
  • GG G1, G2
  • GFF GFF
  • GF2 GF1, G1F
  • Kyoward 200 (aluminum hydroxide adsorbent, manufactured by Kyowa Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) and then Kyoward 1000 (hydrotalcite-based adsorbent, manufactured by Kyowa Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) were spread over Nutsche, and then the reaction solution was Filtered. Hydroquinone monomethyl ether (1.2 mg) was added to the obtained filtrate, followed by concentration under reduced pressure at 40 ° C. to obtain 2-tetrahydrofuranyl acrylate (140.8 g) as a colorless oil (yield: 99. 0%).
  • Polymer A-2 to Polymer A-11 were synthesized by the same procedure as for Polymer A-1, except that the monomer type and the like were changed as shown in Table 1.
  • the solid content concentration of each polymer is 40% by mass.
  • Photosensitive resin composition 1 was prepared according to the following formulation.
  • the photosensitive resin composition 1 was applied on a polyethylene terephthalate film (thickness 25 ⁇ m), which is a temporary support, using a slit nozzle so that the dry film thickness was 3.0 ⁇ m. After drying in a convection oven at 100 ° C. for 2 minutes, a polyethylene film (Tradegar, OSM-N) was pressure-bonded as a cover film to produce the photosensitive transfer material of Example 1.
  • a polyethylene film (Tradegar, OSM-N) was pressure-bonded as a cover film to produce the photosensitive transfer material of Example 1.
  • Photosensitive resin composition 2 was prepared according to the following formulation.
  • composition 1 for intermediate layer The intermediate layer composition 1 was prepared according to the following formulation. Distilled water: 13.4 parts Methanol: 75.6 parts Hydroxypropyl methylcellulose (trade name: TC-5, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.): 4.1 parts
  • the intermediate layer composition 1 is slit coated on a polyethylene terephthalate film (thickness 25 ⁇ m) as a temporary support so that the dry film thickness becomes 2.0 ⁇ m, and then dried in a convection oven at 100 ° C. for 2 minutes. did.
  • the photosensitive resin composition 2 was applied on the intermediate layer using a slit-like nozzle so that the dry film thickness was 3.0 ⁇ m.
  • a photosensitive transfer material of Example 2 was produced by pressure-bonding a polyethylene film (OSM-N, manufactured by Tredegar) as a cover film.
  • Examples 3 to 6 The photosensitive transfer compositions of Examples 3 to 6 were prepared in the same manner as in Example 2 except that the photosensitive resin compositions 3 to 6 were used in which the components of the photosensitive resin composition 2 were changed according to the description in Table 2. Each material was made.
  • Example 7 The same procedure as in Example 2 except that the photosensitive resin composition 2 was changed to the following photosensitive resin composition 7 and the intermediate layer composition 1 was changed to the following intermediate layer composition 2. Thus, a photosensitive transfer material of Example 7 was produced.
  • photosensitive resin composition 7 was prepared by preparing with the following prescription and filtering with a filter made of polytetrafluoroethylene having a pore diameter of 0.2 ⁇ m.
  • An intermediate layer composition 2 was prepared according to the following formulation. Distilled water: 13.4 parts Methanol: 75.6 parts Hydroxymethylcellulose (trade name: HPC-SSL, manufactured by Nippon Soda Co., Ltd.): 4.1 parts Snowtex O (manufactured by Nissan Chemical Industries, Ltd.): 68. 5 copies
  • Examples 8 to 15 and Comparative Examples 2 and 4 to 10 Each component of the photosensitive resin composition 7 was changed in accordance with the description in Table 2, except that the photosensitive resin compositions 8 to 15 and the photosensitive resin compositions 2a and 4a to 10a were used.
  • the photosensitive transfer materials of Examples 8 to 15 and Comparative Examples 2 and 4 to 10 were prepared by the above procedure.
  • Example 16 A photosensitive transfer material of Example 16 was produced in the same manner as in Example 7 except that the amount of the benzotriazole compound used was changed to 1.0 part.
  • Example 17 A photosensitive transfer material of Example 17 was produced in the same manner as in Example 7, except that the amount of the benzotriazole compound used was changed to 2.0 parts.
  • composition 3 for intermediate layer An intermediate layer composition 3 was prepared according to the following formulation. Distilled water: 13.4 parts Methanol: 75.6 parts Hydroxymethylcellulose (trade name: HPC-SSL, manufactured by Nippon Soda Co., Ltd.): 4.1 parts Snowtex XL (manufactured by Nissan Chemical Industries, Ltd.): 68. 5 copies
  • the intermediate layer composition 1 is slit coated on a polyethylene terephthalate film (thickness 25 ⁇ m) as a temporary support so that the dry film thickness becomes 2.0 ⁇ m, and then dried in a convection oven at 100 ° C. for 2 minutes. did.
  • the intermediate layer forming composition 3 was slit coated so as to have a dry film thickness of 2.0 ⁇ m, and then dried in a convection oven at 100 ° C. for 2 minutes.
  • the photosensitive resin composition 7 was applied onto the intermediate layer using a slit nozzle so that the dry film thickness was 3.0 ⁇ m.
  • a photosensitive transfer material of Example 18 was produced by pressure-bonding a polyethylene film (Tradegar, OSM-N) as a cover film.
  • PET substrate with a copper layer Using the photosensitive transfer materials of Examples 1 to 18 and Comparative Examples 1 to 10, transferability, shape reproducibility, wettability, and linearity were evaluated. Table 2 summarizes the results of the evaluation.
  • a PET substrate having a copper layer with a thickness of 500 nm formed by sputtering on a polyethylene terephthalate (PET) film having a thickness of 188 ⁇ m (hereinafter referred to as “PET substrate with a copper layer”). It was used.
  • the photosensitive transfer material was cut into a 50 cm square to obtain a sample piece. Next, after the cover film was peeled off, the roll temperature was 90 ° C., the linear pressure was 0.6 MPa, and the linear velocity (laminate velocity) was 3.6 m / min. Under the laminating conditions, the photosensitive transfer material was bonded to the surface of the copper layer of the PET substrate with a copper layer to obtain a laminate. The adhesion part of the photosensitive resin layer on the surface of the copper layer is visually discriminated, and the adhesion part of the photosensitive resin layer on the surface of the copper layer is marked with an oily magic on the temporary support, and the entire PET substrate is photographed. did.
  • the laminate was prepared by laminating the photosensitive transfer material on the surface of the copper layer of the PET substrate with the copper layer under the laminating conditions of a linear pressure of 0.6 MPa and a linear velocity (laminate velocity) of 3.6 m / min. did.
  • a linear pressure of 0.6 MPa
  • a linear velocity of 3.6 m / min.
  • the laminated body was exposed with an ultra-high pressure mercury lamp through a line and space pattern (duty ratio 1: 1) mask with a line width of 10 ⁇ m, and then left for 5 hours to peel off the temporary support.
  • a line and space pattern (duty ratio 1: 1) mask with a line width of 10 ⁇ m, and then left for 5 hours to peel off the temporary support.
  • an exposure amount at which the ratio of the line width to the space width was 1: 1 was determined, and the laminate was exposed with the exposure amount.
  • a 1.0% sodium carbonate aqueous solution at 28 ° C. was used, and shower development was performed for 40 seconds.
  • the form of the resin pattern of the obtained sample was observed by SEM (scanning electron microscope, magnification 20000 times), and shape reproducibility was evaluated using the following criteria as an index. Two or more are practical levels. 3: A resin pattern with a good hem was obtained. 2: A slightly skirted resin pattern was obtained. 1: A resin pattern with a long skirt was obtained, or the resin pattern was connected without resolution because the skirt was long.
  • ⁇ Photo acid generator> B-1 A compound having the structure shown below was synthesized according to the method described in paragraph 0204 of JP2013-047765A.
  • E-2 Compound having the structure shown below (1- [N, N-bis (2-ethylhexyl) aminomethyl] benzotriazole)
  • E-8 A compound having the structure shown below.
  • E-11 A compound having the structure shown below.
  • E-12 A compound having the structure shown below.
  • each photosensitive transfer material of Comparative Examples 1, 2, and 4 to 9 not using a benzotriazole compound as an additive, and a structural unit having a group in which an acid group is protected by an acid-decomposable group are included.
  • the photosensitive transfer materials of Examples 1 to 18 are excellent in shape reproducibility and linearity as compared with the photosensitive transfer materials of Comparative Examples 3 and 10 using a polymer having a glass transition temperature exceeding 90 ° C. all right.
  • Table 2 also shows that the photosensitive transfer materials of Examples 1 to 18 are excellent in transferability and wettability.
  • Example 101 On the 100 ⁇ m-thick PET substrate, ITO was deposited as a second conductive layer by sputtering to a thickness of 150 nm, and copper was deposited thereon as a first conductive layer at a thickness of 200 nm by vacuum evaporation. Thus, a substrate for forming a conductive pattern was obtained.
  • the photosensitive transfer material obtained in Example 1 was bonded to a substrate on a copper layer (roll temperature 120 ° C., linear pressure 0.8 MPa, linear velocity 1.0 m / min.) To obtain a laminate. The laminate is contacted using a photomask provided with a pattern shown in FIG.
  • pattern A having a configuration in which conductive layer pads are connected in one direction without peeling off the temporary support.
  • the pattern was exposed.
  • the solid line portion SL and the gray portion G are light shielding portions, and the dotted line portion DL virtually shows an alignment alignment frame.
  • the temporary support was peeled off, developed and washed with water to obtain a resin pattern drawn with pattern A.
  • pattern B a photomask provided with openings of the pattern shown in FIG. 4 (hereinafter also referred to as “pattern B”) in the aligned state, and development and washing were performed.
  • the gray portion G is a light shielding portion
  • the dotted line portion DL is a virtual alignment alignment frame.
  • the copper layer was etched using Cu-02, and the remaining photosensitive resin layer was peeled off using a peeling solution (KP-301 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.) to obtain a circuit wiring board.
  • a peeling solution KP-301 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.
  • Example 102 On the 100 ⁇ m-thick PET substrate, ITO was deposited as a second conductive layer by sputtering to a thickness of 150 nm, and copper was deposited thereon as a first conductive layer at a thickness of 200 nm by vacuum evaporation. Thus, a substrate for forming a conductive pattern was obtained.
  • the photosensitive transfer material obtained in Example 1 was bonded to a substrate on a copper layer (roll temperature 120 ° C., linear pressure 0.8 MPa, linear velocity 1.0 m / min.) To obtain a laminate. The laminate was subjected to pattern exposure using a photomask provided with a pattern A having a configuration in which conductive layer pads were connected in one direction without peeling off the temporary support.
  • the temporary support was peeled off, developed and washed with water to obtain a resin pattern drawn with pattern A.
  • the ITO layer is etched using an ITO etching solution (ITO-02 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.), A substrate on which both copper and ITO were drawn in pattern A was obtained.
  • PET (A) was bonded as a protective layer on the remaining resist. In this state, pattern exposure was performed using a photomask provided with an opening of pattern B in the aligned state, and after developing PET (A), development and washing were performed.
  • the copper wiring was etched using Cu-02, and the remaining photosensitive resin layer was stripped using a stripping solution (KP-301 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.) to obtain a circuit wiring board.
  • a stripping solution KP-301 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.
  • Example 103 On the 100 ⁇ m-thick cycloolefin polymer (COP) substrate, ITO was deposited as a second conductive layer by sputtering to a thickness of 150 nm, and copper was deposited thereon as a first conductive layer by a thickness of 200 nm by vacuum evaporation. To form a substrate for forming a conductive pattern.
  • the photosensitive transfer material obtained in Example 1 was bonded to a substrate on a copper layer (roll temperature 100 ° C., linear pressure 0.8 MPa, linear velocity 3.0 m / min.) To obtain a laminate.
  • the laminate was subjected to pattern exposure using a photomask provided with a pattern A having a configuration in which conductive layer pads were connected in one direction without peeling off the temporary support. Thereafter, the temporary support was peeled off, developed and washed with water to obtain a resin pattern drawn with pattern A.
  • the ITO layer is etched using an ITO etching solution (ITO-02 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.), and a peeling solution.
  • KP-301 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.
  • COP (A) was bonded as a protective layer on the remaining resist.
  • pattern exposure was performed using a photomask provided with an opening of pattern B in the aligned state, and after developing COP (A), development and washing were performed.
  • the copper wiring was etched using Cu-02, and the remaining photosensitive resin layer was stripped using a stripping solution (KP-301 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.) to obtain a circuit wiring board.
  • KP-301 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Polymers & Plastics (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Manufacturing & Machinery (AREA)
  • Microelectronics & Electronic Packaging (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Human Computer Interaction (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Spectroscopy & Molecular Physics (AREA)
  • Materials For Photolithography (AREA)

Abstract

Provided is a photosensitive transfer material comprising a temporary support and a photosensitive resin layer that includes a polymer having a glass transition temperature of 90°C or lower and including a structural unit having an acid group protected by an acid-decomposable group, a photoacid generator, and a benzotriazole compound. Provided also is the application of the photosensitive transfer material.

Description

感光性転写材料、回路配線の製造方法、及びタッチパネルの製造方法Photosensitive transfer material, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method
 本開示は、感光性転写材料、回路配線の製造方法、及びタッチパネルの製造方法に関する。 The present disclosure relates to a photosensitive transfer material, a circuit wiring manufacturing method, and a touch panel manufacturing method.
 一般的に、半導体素子、プリント基板などにおける配線、電極の形成には、感光性樹脂組成物を用いるフォトリソグラフィ技術が利用されている。フォトリソグラフィ技術では、基板上に感光性樹脂組成物の層を形成した後、露光し、現像することでパターンが形成される。 Generally, a photolithography technique using a photosensitive resin composition is used for forming wirings and electrodes on a semiconductor element, a printed circuit board, and the like. In the photolithography technique, a pattern is formed by forming a layer of a photosensitive resin composition on a substrate, then exposing and developing.
 感光性樹脂組成物として、例えば、酸によりアルカリ溶解性が変化する樹脂、放射線照射により酸を発生する化合物、及び防錆剤を含有する化学増幅型ホトレジスト組成物が知られている(例えば、特開2004-347951号公報参照)。 As a photosensitive resin composition, for example, a chemically amplified photoresist composition containing a resin whose alkali solubility is changed by an acid, a compound which generates an acid upon irradiation with radiation, and a rust inhibitor is known (for example, special No. 2004-347951).
 また、酸の作用によりアルカリ水溶液に可溶となる高分子化合物、光酸発生剤、カルボン酸化合物、並びにベンゾトリアゾール及び/又はイミダゾール化合物を含有する化学増幅ポジ型レジスト組成物が知られている(例えば、特開2017-32983号公報参照)。 Further, a chemically amplified positive resist composition containing a polymer compound, photoacid generator, carboxylic acid compound, and benzotriazole and / or imidazole compound that is soluble in an alkaline aqueous solution by the action of an acid is known ( For example, see JP-A-2017-32983).
 しかしながら、従来提案されている感光性樹脂組成物を用いて樹脂パターンを形成すると、例えば、現像で生じる残渣によって、設計されたパターン形状が再現されない、すなわち、樹脂パターンの形状が設計されたパターン形状と一致しないことがある。このため、形状再現性が劣る樹脂パターンを用いて導電パターンを形成すると、その樹脂パターンに沿って導電パターンが形成されるため、直線性に優れる導電配線が得られないという課題もある。 However, when a resin pattern is formed using a conventionally proposed photosensitive resin composition, the designed pattern shape is not reproduced due to, for example, a residue generated by development, that is, the resin pattern shape is designed. May not match. For this reason, when a conductive pattern is formed using a resin pattern with inferior shape reproducibility, a conductive pattern is formed along the resin pattern, and thus there is a problem that a conductive wiring excellent in linearity cannot be obtained.
 本開示は、上記の事情に鑑みてなされたものであり、以下に示す目的を解決することを課題とする。
 本開示の一実施形態は、樹脂パターンの形状再現性に優れ、導電パターンの形成に適用した場合に導電配線の直線性が向上する感光性転写材料を提供することを目的とする。
 本開示の他の一実施形態は、導電パターンにおける導電配線の直線性に優れる回路配線の製造方法を提供することを目的とする。
 本開示のさらに他の一実施形態は、導電パターンにおける導電配線の直線性に優れる回路配線を有するタッチパネルの製造方法を提供することを目的とする。
This indication is made in view of the above-mentioned situation, and makes it a subject to solve the object shown below.
An object of one embodiment of the present disclosure is to provide a photosensitive transfer material that is excellent in resin pattern shape reproducibility and improves the linearity of conductive wiring when applied to the formation of a conductive pattern.
Another embodiment of the present disclosure aims to provide a method of manufacturing a circuit wiring that is excellent in linearity of a conductive wiring in a conductive pattern.
Still another embodiment of the present disclosure aims to provide a method for manufacturing a touch panel having circuit wiring excellent in linearity of conductive wiring in a conductive pattern.
 上記課題を解決するための手段には、以下の態様が含まれる。
<1> 仮支持体と、酸基が酸分解性基で保護された基を有する構成単位を含み、かつ、ガラス転移温度が90℃以下である重合体、光酸発生剤、及びベンゾトリアゾール化合物を含有する感光性樹脂層と、を有する感光性転写材料。
<2> 上記ベンゾトリアゾール化合物が、下記式(1)で表される化合物である<1>に記載の感光性転写材料。
Means for solving the above problems include the following aspects.
<1> A polymer, a photoacid generator, and a benzotriazole compound, each including a temporary support and a structural unit having a group in which an acid group is protected by an acid-decomposable group and having a glass transition temperature of 90 ° C. or less And a photosensitive resin layer containing a photosensitive transfer material.
<2> The photosensitive transfer material according to <1>, wherein the benzotriazole compound is a compound represented by the following formula (1).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
 式(1)中、Pは、水素原子、又は置換基を表し、Qは、置換基を表し、nは、0~4の整数を表し、nが2以上の場合、複数のQは、同一でも異なっていてもよい。ただし、スルホン酸基、チオール基、及びチオエーテル基よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種の官能基を有するベンゾトリアゾール化合物を除く。 In formula (1), P represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent, Q represents a substituent, n represents an integer of 0 to 4, and when n is 2 or more, a plurality of Q are the same But it can be different. However, a benzotriazole compound having at least one functional group selected from the group consisting of a sulfonic acid group, a thiol group, and a thioether group is excluded.
<3> 上記式(1)において、Pが、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、ヒドロキシ基、アルキル基、アリール基、複素環基、アシル基、アミノ基、カルボキシ基、アルキルアミノ基、ジアルキルアミノ基、又は-Z-Y基であり、Zは、アルキレン基を表し、Yは、ヒドロキシ基、カルボキシ基、アルキルアミノ基、又はジアルキルアミノ基を表す<2>に記載の感光性転写材料。
<4> 上記式(1)において、Qが、ハロゲン原子、ヒドロキシ基、アルキル基、アリール基、複素環基、アシル基、アミノ基、-Z-Y基、アルコキシ基、カルボキシ基、又はアルコキシアシル基であり、Zは、アルキレン基を表し、Yは、ヒドロキシ基、カルボキシ基、アルキルアミノ基、又はジアルキルアミノ基を表す<2>又は<3>に記載の感光性転写材料。
<5> 上記式(1)において、Pが、水素原子、ヒドロキシ基、炭素数が1~6のアルキル基、炭素数が1~6のアシル基、アミノ基、又は-Z-Y基であり、Zは、カルボキシ基で置換されていてもよい、炭素数が1又は2のアルキレン基を表し、Yは、ヒドロキシ基、カルボキシ基、又は各アルキル基の炭素数が1~10のジアルキルアミノ基を表し、Qが、ハロゲン原子、ヒドロキシ基、炭素数が1~6のアルキル基、炭素数が1~6のアシル基、アミノ基、炭素数が1~6のアルコキシ基、カルボキシ基、又は炭素数が1~6のアルコキシアシル基であり、nが、0又は1である<2>に記載の感光性転写材料。
<6> 上記式(1)において、Pが、水素原子、又は-Z-Y基であり、Zは、カルボキシ基で置換されていてもよい、炭素数が1又は2のアルキレン基を表し、Yは、各アルキル基の炭素数が1~10のジアルキルアミノ基を表し、Qが、炭素数が1~6のアルキル基、又は炭素数が1~6のアルコキシ基であり、nが、0又は1である<5>に記載の感光性転写材料。
<7> 上記ベンゾトリアゾール化合物の含有量が、感光性樹脂層の全質量に対して、0.01質量%~10質量%である<1>~<6>のいずれか1つに記載の感光性転写材料。
<8> 上記重合体の含有量に対する、上記ベンゾトリアゾール化合物の含有量の質量比が、0.001~0.1である<1>~<7>のいずれか1つに記載の感光性転写材料。
<9> 上記光酸発生剤の含有量に対する、上記ベンゾトリアゾール化合物の含有量の質量比が、0.01~5である<1>~<8>のいずれか1つに記載の感光性転写材料。
<10> 上記重合体中の酸基が酸分解性基で保護された基を有する構成単位の含有量が、重合体の全質量に対して、20質量%~50質量%である<1>~<9>のいずれか1つに記載の感光性転写材料。
<11> 上記酸基が酸分解性基で保護された基を有する構成単位が、下記式(A1)で表される構成単位である<1>~<10>のいずれか1つに記載の感光性転写材料。
<3> In the above formula (1), P is a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an acyl group, an amino group, a carboxy group, an alkylamino group, a dialkylamino group, or The photosensitive transfer material according to <2>, wherein Z represents an alkylene group, Z represents an alkylene group, and Y represents a hydroxy group, a carboxy group, an alkylamino group, or a dialkylamino group.
<4> In the above formula (1), Q is a halogen atom, hydroxy group, alkyl group, aryl group, heterocyclic group, acyl group, amino group, —ZY group, alkoxy group, carboxy group, or alkoxyacyl. The photosensitive transfer material according to <2> or <3>, wherein Z represents an alkylene group, and Y represents a hydroxy group, a carboxy group, an alkylamino group, or a dialkylamino group.
<5> In the above formula (1), P is a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, an acyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, an amino group, or a —ZY group. , Z represents an alkylene group having 1 or 2 carbon atoms which may be substituted with a carboxy group, Y represents a hydroxy group, a carboxy group, or a dialkylamino group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms in each alkyl group Q is a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, an acyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, an amino group, an alkoxy group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, a carboxy group, or carbon <2> The photosensitive transfer material according to <2>, wherein the number is an alkoxyacyl group having 1 to 6 and n is 0 or 1.
<6> In the above formula (1), P represents a hydrogen atom or a -ZY group, Z represents an alkylene group having 1 or 2 carbon atoms which may be substituted with a carboxy group, Y represents a dialkylamino group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms in each alkyl group, Q is an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, or an alkoxy group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and n is 0 Or the photosensitive transfer material as described in <5> which is 1.
<7> The photosensitive composition according to any one of <1> to <6>, wherein the content of the benzotriazole compound is 0.01% by mass to 10% by mass with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer. Transfer material.
<8> The photosensitive transfer according to any one of <1> to <7>, wherein a mass ratio of the content of the benzotriazole compound to the content of the polymer is 0.001 to 0.1. material.
<9> The photosensitive transfer according to any one of <1> to <8>, wherein the mass ratio of the content of the benzotriazole compound to the content of the photoacid generator is 0.01 to 5. material.
<10> The content of the structural unit having a group in which the acid group in the polymer is protected with an acid-decomposable group is 20% by mass to 50% by mass with respect to the total mass of the polymer. <1> The photosensitive transfer material according to any one of <9>.
<11> The structural unit according to any one of <1> to <10>, wherein the structural unit having a group in which the acid group is protected with an acid-decomposable group is a structural unit represented by the following formula (A1): Photosensitive transfer material.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
 式(A1)中、R31、及びR32は、それぞれ独立して、水素原子、アルキル基、又はアリール基を表し、R31、及びR32の少なくとも一方が、アルキル基、又はアリール基であり、R33は、アルキル基、又はアリール基を表し、R31又はR32と、R33とが連結して環状エーテルを形成してもよく、R34は、水素原子、又はメチル基を表し、Xは、単結合、又は連結基を表す。 In formula (A1), R 31 and R 32 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group, and at least one of R 31 and R 32 is an alkyl group or an aryl group. , R 33 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, R 31 or R 32 and R 33 may be linked to form a cyclic ether, R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, X 0 represents a single bond or a linking group.
<12> 上記感光性樹脂層が、上記ベンゾトリアゾール化合物以外のアミン化合物をさらに含有する<1>~<11>のいずれか1つに記載の感光性転写材料。
<13> 上記重合体が、pKaHが3以上の基を有する構成単位をさらに含む<1>~<12>のいずれか1つに記載の感光性転写材料。
<14> 上記仮支持体と上記感光性樹脂層との間に、中間層をさらに有する<1>~<13>のいずれか1つに記載の感光性転写材料。
<15> 基板に対し、<1>~<14>のいずれか1つに記載の感光性転写材料の、仮支持体の感光性樹脂層側の最外層を貼り合わせる工程と、
 上記貼り合わせる工程後の上記感光性転写材料の上記感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する工程と、上記パターン露光する工程後の感光性樹脂層を現像してパターンを形成する工程と、上記パターンが配置されていない領域における基板をエッチング処理する工程と、を含む、回路配線の製造方法。
<16> 上記基板が、銅を含む基板である<15>に記載の回路配線の製造方法。
<17> 基板に対し、<1>~<14>のいずれか1つに記載の感光性転写材料の、仮支持体の感光性樹脂層側の最外層を貼り合わせる工程と、上記貼り合わせる工程後の上記感光性転写材料の上記感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する工程と、上記パターン露光する工程後の感光性樹脂層を現像してパターンを形成する工程と、上記パターンが配置されていない領域における基板をエッチング処理する工程と、を含む、タッチパネルの製造方法。
<12> The photosensitive transfer material according to any one of <1> to <11>, wherein the photosensitive resin layer further contains an amine compound other than the benzotriazole compound.
<13> The photosensitive transfer material according to any one of <1> to <12>, wherein the polymer further includes a structural unit having a pKaH of 3 or more.
<14> The photosensitive transfer material according to any one of <1> to <13>, further comprising an intermediate layer between the temporary support and the photosensitive resin layer.
<15> A step of bonding the outermost layer on the photosensitive resin layer side of the temporary support of the photosensitive transfer material according to any one of <1> to <14> to a substrate;
The step of pattern exposure of the photosensitive resin layer of the photosensitive transfer material after the step of pasting, the step of developing the photosensitive resin layer after the step of pattern exposure to form a pattern, and the arrangement of the pattern And a step of etching a substrate in a region that has not been formed.
<16> The method for producing circuit wiring according to <15>, wherein the substrate is a substrate containing copper.
<17> A step of bonding the outermost layer on the photosensitive resin layer side of the temporary support of the photosensitive transfer material according to any one of <1> to <14> to the substrate, and the step of bonding A step of pattern exposing the photosensitive resin layer of the photosensitive transfer material later, a step of developing the photosensitive resin layer after the pattern exposing step to form a pattern, and an area where the pattern is not disposed And a step of etching the substrate in the method.
 本開示の一実施形態によれば、樹脂パターンの形状再現性に優れ、導電パターンの形成に適用した場合に導電配線の直線性が向上する感光性転写材料を提供することができる。
 本開示の他の一実施形態によれば、導電パターンにおける導電配線の直線性に優れる回路配線の製造方法を提供することができる。
 本開示のさらに他の一実施形態によれば、導電パターンにおける導電配線の直線性に優れる回路配線を有するタッチパネルの製造方法を提供することができる。
According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, it is possible to provide a photosensitive transfer material that has excellent resin pattern shape reproducibility and improves the linearity of conductive wiring when applied to the formation of a conductive pattern.
According to another embodiment of the present disclosure, it is possible to provide a circuit wiring manufacturing method that is excellent in linearity of conductive wiring in a conductive pattern.
According to still another embodiment of the present disclosure, it is possible to provide a method for manufacturing a touch panel having circuit wiring excellent in linearity of conductive wiring in a conductive pattern.
図1は、本開示の感光性転写材料の層構成の一例を示す概略図である。FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a layer configuration of the photosensitive transfer material of the present disclosure. 図2は、本開示の感光性転写材料を用いた回路配線の製造方法の一例を示す概略図である。FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a method for manufacturing circuit wiring using the photosensitive transfer material of the present disclosure. 図3は、パターンAを示す概略図である。FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern A. 図4は、パターンBを示す概略図である。FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern B.
 以下、本開示の実施形態について詳細に説明する。なお、本開示は、以下の実施形態に何ら制限されず、本開示の目的の範囲内において、適宜変更を加えて実施することができる。 Hereinafter, embodiments of the present disclosure will be described in detail. In addition, this indication is not restrict | limited at all to the following embodiment, In the range of the objective of this indication, it can add and implement suitably.
 本開示において、「~」を用いて表される数値範囲は、「~」の前後に記載される数値を下限値及び上限値として含む範囲を意味する。本開示に段階的に記載されている数値範囲において、ある数値範囲で記載された上限値又は下限値は、他の段階的な記載の数値範囲の上限値又は下限値に置き換えてもよい。また、本開示に記載されている数値範囲において、ある数値範囲で記載された上限値又は下限値は、実施例に示されている値に置き換えてもよい。
 本開示において、「(メタ)アクリル」とは、アクリル及びメタクリルの双方、又は、いずれか一方を表し、「(メタ)アクリレート」とは、アクリレート及びメタクリレートの双方、又は、いずれか一方を意味する。
 本開示において、組成物中の各成分の量は、組成物中に各成分に該当する物質が複数存在する場合、特に断らない限り、組成物中に存在する複数の物質の合計量を意味する。
 本開示において、「工程」との用語には、独立した工程だけでなく、他の工程と明確に区別できない場合であっても工程の所期の目的が達成されれば、本用語に含まれる。
 本開示における基(原子団)の表記において、置換及び無置換を記していない表記は、置換基を有しないものと共に置換基を有するものをも包含するものである。例えば「アルキル基」とは、置換基を有さないアルキル基(無置換アルキル基)のみならず、置換基を有するアルキル基(置換アルキル基)をも包含するものである。
 本開示において、「質量%」と「重量%」とは同義であり、「質量部」と「重量部」とは同義である。
 本開示において、2以上の好ましい態様の組み合わせは、より好ましい態様である。
 本開示において、化学構造式は、水素原子を省略した簡略構造式で記載する場合もある。
In the present disclosure, a numerical range expressed using “to” means a range including numerical values described before and after “to” as a lower limit value and an upper limit value. In a numerical range described in stages in the present disclosure, an upper limit value or a lower limit value described in a numerical range may be replaced with an upper limit value or a lower limit value in another numerical range. Further, in the numerical ranges described in the present disclosure, the upper limit value or the lower limit value described in a certain numerical range may be replaced with the values shown in the examples.
In this disclosure, “(meth) acryl” represents both and / or acryl and methacryl, and “(meth) acrylate” means both and / or acrylate and methacrylate. .
In the present disclosure, the amount of each component in the composition means the total amount of the plurality of substances present in the composition unless there is a specific notice when there are a plurality of substances corresponding to each component in the composition. .
In the present disclosure, the term “process” is not limited to an independent process, and is included in this term if the intended purpose of the process is achieved even when it cannot be clearly distinguished from other processes. .
In the notation of a group (atomic group) in the present disclosure, the notation that does not indicate substitution and non-substitution includes those having no substituent and those having a substituent. For example, the “alkyl group” includes not only an alkyl group having no substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
In the present disclosure, “mass%” and “weight%” are synonymous, and “part by mass” and “part by weight” are synonymous.
In the present disclosure, a combination of two or more preferred embodiments is a more preferred embodiment.
In the present disclosure, the chemical structural formula may be described as a simplified structural formula in which a hydrogen atom is omitted.
<感光性転写材料>
 本開示の感光性転写材料は、仮支持体と、酸基が酸分解性基で保護された基を有する構成単位を含み、かつ、ガラス転移温度が90℃以下である重合体、光酸発生剤、及びベンゾトリアゾール化合物を含有する感光性樹脂層と、を有する。
 図1は、本開示の感光性転写材料の層構成の一例を概略的に示している。図1に示す感光性転写材料100Aは、仮支持体10と、感光性樹脂層12と、カバーフィルム16とがこの順に積層されている。
<Photosensitive transfer material>
The photosensitive transfer material of the present disclosure includes a temporary support, a polymer including a structural unit having a group in which an acid group is protected by an acid-decomposable group, and a glass transition temperature of 90 ° C. or less, photoacid generation And a photosensitive resin layer containing a benzotriazole compound.
FIG. 1 schematically shows an example of the layer structure of the photosensitive transfer material of the present disclosure. In the photosensitive transfer material 100A shown in FIG. 1, a temporary support 10, a photosensitive resin layer 12, and a cover film 16 are laminated in this order.
 本開示において、「酸基」とは、pKaが12以下のプロトン解離性基をいう。
 本開示において、「酸基が酸分解性基で保護された基」とは、酸基が酸分解性基で保護された構造を有する基をいう。例えば、酸基がカルボキシ基である場合、酸基が酸分解性基で保護された基とは、カルボキシ基が酸分解性基で保護された構造、すなわち、カルボキシ基の水素原子が酸分解性基で置換されてなる構造を有する基をいう。
In the present disclosure, the “acid group” refers to a proton dissociable group having a pKa of 12 or less.
In the present disclosure, the “group in which an acid group is protected with an acid-decomposable group” refers to a group having a structure in which an acid group is protected with an acid-decomposable group. For example, when the acid group is a carboxy group, the group in which the acid group is protected with an acid-decomposable group is a structure in which the carboxy group is protected with an acid-decomposable group, that is, the hydrogen atom of the carboxy group is acid-decomposable. A group having a structure substituted with a group.
 本開示の感光性転写材料によれば、樹脂パターンの形状再現性(以下、単に「形状再現性」と称することがある。)に優れ、導電パターンの形成に適用した場合に導電配線の直線性(以下、単に「直線性」と称することがある。)が向上する。本開示の感光性転写材料が、このような効果を奏する理由は明らかではないが、以下のように推察される。
 感光性樹脂層に含有される光酸発生剤は、露光によって酸を発生することができる。露光により発生した酸は、重合体の構成単位に含まれる、酸基が酸分解性基で保護された基と作用することができる。そして、酸の作用によって、酸基が酸分解性基で保護された基から、酸分解性基が脱離することができる。このため、露光された感光性樹脂層では、感光性樹脂の酸分解反応が起こり、現像液に対する溶解性が増大する。
 特開2004-347951号公報又は特開2017-32983号公報に開示されている感光性樹脂組成物を用いるフォトリソグラフィ技術についても、上記と同様の原理が利用されていると考えられる。しかしながら、上述のとおり、従来の感光性樹脂組成物を用いて樹脂パターンを形成すると、例えば、現像で生じる残渣によって、樹脂パターンの形状が設計されたパターン形状と一致しないことがある。現像で残渣が生じる要因の1つとして、被転写体(例えば、支持体)に存在する酸化銅などの金属成分に起因する、感光性樹脂の酸分解反応の阻害が考えられる。すなわち、被転写体に存在する酸化銅などの金属成分は、露光により発生した酸に作用し、感光性樹脂の酸分解反応を阻害するため、現像で残渣が生じると考えられる。例えば、特開2004-347951号公報では、化学増幅型ホトレジスト組成物に防錆剤を加えているものの、ガラス転移温度の高い重合体が用いられているため、感光性樹脂の酸分解反応は被転写体に存在する金属成分によって依然として阻害され得る。同様の理由により、特開2017-32983号公報では、カルボン酸化合物と、ベンゾトリアゾール及び/又はイミダゾール化合物とを併用しているものの、感光性樹脂の酸分解反応は被転写体に存在する金属成分によって依然として阻害され得る。
 従来技術に対して、本開示の感光性転写材料では、感光性樹脂層が上記各成分を含有することで、感光性樹脂層中のベンゾトリアゾール化合物が、ガラス転移温度の低い重合体を含む感光性樹脂層中を容易に移動し、被転写体表面に配位すると考えられる。被転写体表面にベンゾトリアゾール化合物が配位することにより、酸に対する、被転写体の金属成分の作用を低減すると考えられる。このため、本開示の感光性転写材料によれば、樹脂パターンの形状再現性に優れ、導電パターンの形成に適用した場合に導電配線の直線性が向上すると考えられる。
According to the photosensitive transfer material of the present disclosure, the resin pattern has excellent shape reproducibility (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “shape reproducibility”), and when applied to the formation of a conductive pattern, the linearity of the conductive wiring. (Hereinafter simply referred to as “linearity”) is improved. The reason why the photosensitive transfer material of the present disclosure exhibits such an effect is not clear, but is presumed as follows.
The photoacid generator contained in the photosensitive resin layer can generate an acid upon exposure. The acid generated by the exposure can act with a group in which the acid group is protected by an acid-decomposable group, which is contained in the structural unit of the polymer. The acid-decomposable group can be removed from the group in which the acid group is protected by the acid-decomposable group by the action of the acid. For this reason, in the exposed photosensitive resin layer, the acid decomposition reaction of the photosensitive resin occurs, and the solubility in the developer increases.
It is considered that the same principle as described above is also used for the photolithography technique using the photosensitive resin composition disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-347951 or 2017-32983. However, as described above, when a resin pattern is formed using a conventional photosensitive resin composition, the shape of the resin pattern may not match the designed pattern shape due to, for example, a residue generated by development. As one of the factors that cause a residue in development, inhibition of the acid decomposition reaction of the photosensitive resin caused by a metal component such as copper oxide present on a transfer target (for example, a support) can be considered. That is, it is considered that a metal component such as copper oxide present in the transferred material acts on the acid generated by exposure and inhibits the acid decomposition reaction of the photosensitive resin, so that a residue is generated during development. For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-347951, although a rust inhibitor is added to a chemically amplified photoresist composition, a polymer having a high glass transition temperature is used. It can still be inhibited by metal components present in the transcript. For the same reason, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-32983 uses a carboxylic acid compound in combination with a benzotriazole and / or imidazole compound, but the acid decomposition reaction of the photosensitive resin is a metal component present in the transferred object. Can still be inhibited.
In contrast to the prior art, in the photosensitive transfer material of the present disclosure, the photosensitive resin layer contains the above components, so that the benzotriazole compound in the photosensitive resin layer contains a polymer having a low glass transition temperature. It is considered that it easily moves in the conductive resin layer and coordinates to the surface of the transfer material. It is considered that the action of the metal component of the transferred body on the acid is reduced by the coordination of the benzotriazole compound on the surface of the transferred body. For this reason, according to the photosensitive transfer material of the present disclosure, the shape reproducibility of the resin pattern is excellent, and it is considered that the linearity of the conductive wiring is improved when applied to the formation of the conductive pattern.
[仮支持体]
 本開示の感光性転写材料は、仮支持体を有する。
 仮支持体は、感光性樹脂層を支持し、感光性樹脂層等の被着体から剥離可能な支持体である。
[Temporary support]
The photosensitive transfer material of the present disclosure has a temporary support.
The temporary support is a support that supports the photosensitive resin layer and can be peeled off from an adherend such as the photosensitive resin layer.
 仮支持体としては、例えば、ガラス基材、樹脂フィルム、及び紙が挙げられ、強度及び可撓性等の観点から、樹脂フィルムが好ましい。樹脂フィルムとしては、例えば、ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム、トリ酢酸セルロースフィルム、ポリスチレンフィルム、及びポリカーボネートフィルムが挙げられる。これらの中でも、2軸延伸ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルムが好ましい。 Examples of the temporary support include a glass substrate, a resin film, and paper, and a resin film is preferable from the viewpoint of strength and flexibility. Examples of the resin film include a polyethylene terephthalate film, a cellulose triacetate film, a polystyrene film, and a polycarbonate film. Among these, a biaxially stretched polyethylene terephthalate film is preferable.
 仮支持体の厚みは、制限されず、取り扱い易さ、汎用性などの観点から、5μm~200μmが好ましく、10μm~150μmがより好ましい。 The thickness of the temporary support is not limited, and is preferably 5 μm to 200 μm, more preferably 10 μm to 150 μm, from the viewpoints of ease of handling and versatility.
 感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する際に仮支持体を介して感光性樹脂層を露光し得る観点から、仮支持体は、光透過性を有することが好ましい。ここで、「光透過性を有する」とは、パターン露光に使用する光の主波長の透過率が50%以上であることを意味する。パターン露光に使用する光の主波長の透過率は、露光感度向上の観点から、60%以上が好ましく、70%以上がより好ましい。透過率の測定方法としては、大塚電子(株)製MCPD Seriesを用いて測定する方法が挙げられる。 From the viewpoint of exposing the photosensitive resin layer through the temporary support when the photosensitive resin layer is subjected to pattern exposure, the temporary support preferably has light transmittance. Here, “having light transmittance” means that the transmittance of the main wavelength of light used for pattern exposure is 50% or more. The transmittance of the main wavelength of light used for pattern exposure is preferably 60% or more, more preferably 70% or more, from the viewpoint of improving exposure sensitivity. As a measuring method of the transmittance, a method of measuring using MCPD Series manufactured by Otsuka Electronics Co., Ltd. can be mentioned.
 仮支持体の好ましい態様については、例えば、特開2014-85643号公報の段落0017~段落0018に記載があり、この公報の内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 A preferred embodiment of the temporary support is described, for example, in paragraphs 0017 to 0018 of JP-A-2014-85643, and the contents of this publication are incorporated in this specification.
[感光性樹脂層]
 本開示の感光性転写材料は、酸基が酸分解性基で保護された基を有する構成単位を含み、かつ、ガラス転移温度が90℃以下である重合体、光酸発生剤、及びベンゾトリアゾール化合物を含有する感光性樹脂層を有する。
[Photosensitive resin layer]
The photosensitive transfer material of the present disclosure includes a polymer having a structural unit having an acid group protected with an acid-decomposable group, and a glass transition temperature of 90 ° C. or less, a photoacid generator, and a benzotriazole It has the photosensitive resin layer containing a compound.
〔ベンゾトリアゾール化合物〕
 本開示における感光性樹脂層は、ベンゾトリアゾール化合物を含有する。ベンゾトリアゾール化合物におけるベンゾトリアゾール骨格が、上記した、酸に対する、被転写体の金属成分の作用の低減に有効である。
[Benzotriazole compound]
The photosensitive resin layer in the present disclosure contains a benzotriazole compound. The benzotriazole skeleton in the benzotriazole compound is effective in reducing the action of the metal component of the transferred material on the acid described above.
 ベンゾトリアゾール化合物としては、ベンゾトリアゾール骨格を有する化合物であれば制限されず、公知のベンゾトリアゾール化合物を用いることができる。
 ベンゾトリアゾール化合物としては、例えば、1,2,3-ベンゾトリアゾール、1-[N,N-ビス(2-エチルヘキシル)アミノメチル]ベンゾトリアゾール、5-カルボキシベンゾトリアゾール、1-(ヒドロキシメチル)-1H-ベンゾトリアゾール、1-アセチル-1H-ベンゾトリアゾール、1-アミノベンゾトリアゾール、9-(1H-ベンゾトリアゾール-1-イルメチル)-9H-カルバゾール、1-クロロ-1H-ベンゾトリアゾール、1-(2-ピリジニル)ベンゾトリアゾール、1-ヒドロキシベンゾトリアゾール、1-メチルベンゾトリアゾール、1-エチルベンゾトリアゾール、1-(1’-ヒドロキシエチル)ベンゾトリアゾール、1-(2’-ヒドロキシエチル)ベンゾトリアゾール、1-プロピルベンゾトリアゾール、1-(1’-ヒドロキシプロピル)ベンゾトリアゾール、1-(2’-ヒドロキシプロピル)ベンゾトリアゾール、1-(3’-ヒドロキシプロピル)ベンゾトリアゾール、4-ヒドロキシ-1H-ベンゾトリアゾール、5-メチル-1H-ベンゾトリアゾール、メチルベンゾトリアゾール-5-カルボキシレート、エチルベンゾトリアゾール-5-カルボキシレート、t-ブチル-ベンゾトリアゾール-5-カルボキシレート、シクロペンチルエチル-ベンゾトリアゾール-5-カルボキシレート、1H-ベンゾトリアゾール-4-スルホン酸、1H-ベンゾトリアゾール-1-アセトニトリル、1H-ベンゾトリアゾール-1-カルボキシアルデヒド、2-メチル-2H-ベンゾトリアゾール、及び2-エチル-2H-ベンゾトリアゾールが挙げられる。
The benzotriazole compound is not limited as long as it is a compound having a benzotriazole skeleton, and a known benzotriazole compound can be used.
Examples of the benzotriazole compound include 1,2,3-benzotriazole, 1- [N, N-bis (2-ethylhexyl) aminomethyl] benzotriazole, 5-carboxybenzotriazole, 1- (hydroxymethyl) -1H. -Benzotriazole, 1-acetyl-1H-benzotriazole, 1-aminobenzotriazole, 9- (1H-benzotriazol-1-ylmethyl) -9H-carbazole, 1-chloro-1H-benzotriazole, 1- (2- Pyridinyl) benzotriazole, 1-hydroxybenzotriazole, 1-methylbenzotriazole, 1-ethylbenzotriazole, 1- (1′-hydroxyethyl) benzotriazole, 1- (2′-hydroxyethyl) benzotriazole, 1-propyl Benzoto Azole, 1- (1′-hydroxypropyl) benzotriazole, 1- (2′-hydroxypropyl) benzotriazole, 1- (3′-hydroxypropyl) benzotriazole, 4-hydroxy-1H-benzotriazole, 5-methyl -1H-benzotriazole, methylbenzotriazole-5-carboxylate, ethylbenzotriazole-5-carboxylate, t-butyl-benzotriazole-5-carboxylate, cyclopentylethyl-benzotriazole-5-carboxylate, 1H-benzo Triazole-4-sulfonic acid, 1H-benzotriazole-1-acetonitrile, 1H-benzotriazole-1-carboxaldehyde, 2-methyl-2H-benzotriazole, and 2-ethyl-2H-benzotri An azole is mentioned.
 ベンゾトリアゾール化合物は、形状再現性、及び直線性の観点から、下記式(1)で表される化合物であることが好ましい。 The benzotriazole compound is preferably a compound represented by the following formula (1) from the viewpoint of shape reproducibility and linearity.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
 式(1)中、Pは、水素原子、又は置換基を表し、Qは、置換基を表し、nは、0~4の整数を表し、nが2以上の場合、複数のQは、同一でも異なっていてもよい。ただし、スルホン酸基、チオール基、及びチオエーテル基よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種の官能基を有するベンゾトリアゾール化合物を除く。 In formula (1), P represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent, Q represents a substituent, n represents an integer of 0 to 4, and when n is 2 or more, a plurality of Q are the same But it can be different. However, a benzotriazole compound having at least one functional group selected from the group consisting of a sulfonic acid group, a thiol group, and a thioether group is excluded.
 式(1)において、Pで表される置換基としては、例えば、ハロゲン原子、ヒドロキシ基、アルキル基、アリール基、複素環基、アシル基、アミノ基、カルボキシ基、アルキルアミノ基、ジアルキルアミノ基、及び-Z-Y基が挙げられる。 In the formula (1), examples of the substituent represented by P include a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an acyl group, an amino group, a carboxy group, an alkylamino group, and a dialkylamino group. , And -ZY groups.
 式(1)中、Pで表されるハロゲン原子としては、例えば、塩素原子、臭素原子、及びヨウ素原子が挙げられる。 In the formula (1), examples of the halogen atom represented by P include a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom.
 式(1)中、Pで表されるアルキル基は、直鎖状のアルキル基でもよく、分岐状のアルキル基でもよく、環状アルキル基でもよい。アルキル基は、好ましくは炭素数が1~12のアルキル基であり、より好ましくは炭素数が1~6のアルキル基であり、特に好ましくは炭素数が1~3のアルキル基である。炭素数が1~12のアルキル基としては、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、iso-プロピル基、ブチル基、tert-ブチル基、ヘキシル基、シクロヘキシル基、オクチル基、デシル基、及びドデシル基が挙げられる。 In formula (1), the alkyl group represented by P may be a linear alkyl group, a branched alkyl group, or a cyclic alkyl group. The alkyl group is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms. Examples of the alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms include methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, iso-propyl group, butyl group, tert-butyl group, hexyl group, cyclohexyl group, octyl group, decyl group, and dodecyl. Groups.
 式(1)中、Pで表されるアリール基は、単環のアリール基でもよく、縮合環のアリール基でもよい。アリール基は、好ましくは炭素数が6~18のアリール基であり、より好ましくは炭素数が6~12のアリール基である。炭素数が6~18のアリール基としては、例えば、フェニル基、ビフェニル基、ナフチル基、フェナントリル基、ターフェニル基、及びフルオレニル基が挙げられる。 In formula (1), the aryl group represented by P may be a monocyclic aryl group or a condensed ring aryl group. The aryl group is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 18 carbon atoms, and more preferably an aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms. Examples of the aryl group having 6 to 18 carbon atoms include a phenyl group, a biphenyl group, a naphthyl group, a phenanthryl group, a terphenyl group, and a fluorenyl group.
 式(1)中、Pで表される複素環基は、脂肪族の複素環基でもよく、芳香族の複素環基でもよい。また、Pで表される複素環基は、単環の複素環基でもよく、縮合環の複素環基でもよい。複素環基は、好ましくは炭素数が1~18の複素環基であり、より好ましくは炭素数が3~12の複素環基である。炭素数が1~18の複素環基としては、例えば、フリル基、ピロリル基、イミダゾリル基、ピラゾリル基、ピリジニル基、ピラジニル基、ピリミジニル基、インドリル基、イソキノリル基、カルバゾリル基、フェナントリジニル基、及びフェナントロリニル基が挙げられる。 In the formula (1), the heterocyclic group represented by P may be an aliphatic heterocyclic group or an aromatic heterocyclic group. The heterocyclic group represented by P may be a monocyclic heterocyclic group or a condensed heterocyclic group. The heterocyclic group is preferably a heterocyclic group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, and more preferably a heterocyclic group having 3 to 12 carbon atoms. Examples of the heterocyclic group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms include a furyl group, pyrrolyl group, imidazolyl group, pyrazolyl group, pyridinyl group, pyrazinyl group, pyrimidinyl group, indolyl group, isoquinolyl group, carbazolyl group, phenanthridinyl group And phenanthrolinyl group.
 式(1)中、Pで表されるアシル基は、好ましくは炭素数が1~12のアシル基であり、より好ましくは炭素数が1~8のアシル基であり、さらに好ましくは炭素数が1~6のアシル基であり、特に好ましくは炭素数が2~4のアシル基である。炭素数が1~12のアシル基としては、例えば、アセチル基、プロピオニル基、ブタノイル基、及びベンゾイル基が挙げられる。 In formula (1), the acyl group represented by P is preferably an acyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, more preferably an acyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and still more preferably a carbon number. An acyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, particularly preferably an acyl group having 2 to 4 carbon atoms. Examples of the acyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms include acetyl group, propionyl group, butanoyl group, and benzoyl group.
 式(1)中、Pで表されるアルキルアミノ基におけるアルキル基は、直鎖状のアルキル基でもよく、分岐状のアルキル基でもよく、環状のアルキル基でもよい。アルキルアミノ基は、好ましくは、炭素数が1~10のアルキルアミノ基であり、より好ましくは、炭素数が3~10のアルキルアミノ基であり、特に好ましくは、炭素数が6~10のアルキルアミノ基である。炭素数が1~10のアルキルアミノ基におけるアルキル基としては、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、iso-プロピル基、ブチル基、tert-ブチル基、ヘキシル基、2-エチルヘキシル基、シクロヘキシル基、オクチル基、及びデシル基が挙げられる。 In formula (1), the alkyl group in the alkylamino group represented by P may be a linear alkyl group, a branched alkyl group, or a cyclic alkyl group. The alkylamino group is preferably an alkylamino group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkylamino group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably an alkylamino group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms. It is an amino group. Examples of the alkyl group in the alkylamino group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an iso-propyl group, a butyl group, a tert-butyl group, a hexyl group, a 2-ethylhexyl group, and a cyclohexyl group. , An octyl group, and a decyl group.
 式(1)中、Pで表されるジアルキルアミノ基における各アルキル基は、直鎖状のアルキル基でもよく、分岐状のアルキル基でもよく、環状のアルキル基でもよい。また、ジアルキルアミノ基における各アルキル基は、同一でも異なっていてもよい。ジアルキルアミノ基は、好ましくは、各アルキル基の炭素数が1~10のジアルキルアミノ基であり、より好ましくは、各アルキル基の炭素数が3~10のジアルキルアミノ基であり、特に好ましくは、各アルキル基の炭素数が6~10のジアルキルアミノ基である。各アルキル基の炭素数が1~10のジアルキルアミノ基におけるアルキル基としては、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、iso-プロピル基、ブチル基、tert-ブチル基、ヘキシル基、2-エチルヘキシル基、シクロヘキシル基、オクチル基、及びデシル基が挙げられる。 In formula (1), each alkyl group in the dialkylamino group represented by P may be a linear alkyl group, a branched alkyl group, or a cyclic alkyl group. In addition, each alkyl group in the dialkylamino group may be the same or different. The dialkylamino group is preferably a dialkylamino group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms in each alkyl group, more preferably a dialkylamino group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms in each alkyl group, particularly preferably Each alkyl group is a dialkylamino group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms. Examples of the alkyl group in the dialkylamino group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms of each alkyl group include, for example, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, iso-propyl group, butyl group, tert-butyl group, hexyl group, 2-ethylhexyl Group, cyclohexyl group, octyl group, and decyl group.
 式(1)中、Pで表される-Z-Y基において、Zは、アルキレン基を表し、Yは、ヒドロキシ基、カルボキシ基、アルキルアミノ基、又はジアルキルアミノ基を表す。
 Zで表されるアルキレン基は、好ましくは炭素数が1~6のアルキレン基であり、より好ましくは炭素数が1又は2のアルキレン基であり、さらに好ましくは、カルボキシ基で置換されていてもよい、炭素数が1又は2のアルキレン基であり、特に好ましくは、炭素数が1又は2の無置換のアルキレン基であり、最も好ましくは、無置換のメチレン基である。炭素数が1~6のアルキレン基としては、例えば、メチレン基、エチレン基、プロピレン基、ブチレン基、及びヘキシレン基が挙げられる。
 Yは、好ましくは、ヒドロキシ基、又は各アルキル基の炭素数が1~10のジアルキルアミノ基であり、より好ましくは炭素数が1~10のジアルキルアミノ基である。
 Yで表されるアルキルアミノ基及びジアルキルアミノ基におけるアルキル基は、直鎖状のアルキル基でもよく、分岐状のアルキル基でもよく、環状のアルキル基でもよい。また、ジアルキルアミノ基における各アルキル基は、同一でも異なっていてもよい。アルキルアミノ基は、好ましくは、炭素数が1~10のアルキルアミノ基であり、より好ましくは、炭素数が3~10のアルキルアミノ基であり、特に好ましくは、炭素数が6~10のアルキルアミノ基である。ジアルキルアミノ基は、好ましくは、各アルキル基の炭素数が1~10のジアルキルアミノ基であり、より好ましくは、各アルキル基の炭素数が3~10のジアルキルアミノ基であり、特に好ましくは、各アルキル基の炭素数が6~10のジアルキルアミノ基である。炭素数が1~10のアルキルアミノ基、及び各アルキル基の炭素数が1~10のジアルキルアミノ基におけるアルキル基としては、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、iso-プロピル基、ブチル基、tert-ブチル基、ヘキシル基、2-エチルヘキシル基、シクロヘキシル基、オクチル基、及びデシル基が挙げられる。
In the formula (1), in the —ZY group represented by P, Z represents an alkylene group, and Y represents a hydroxy group, a carboxy group, an alkylamino group, or a dialkylamino group.
The alkylene group represented by Z is preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkylene group having 1 or 2 carbon atoms, and even more preferably an alkylene group substituted with a carboxy group. Preferred is an alkylene group having 1 or 2 carbon atoms, particularly preferably an unsubstituted alkylene group having 1 or 2 carbon atoms, and most preferably an unsubstituted methylene group. Examples of the alkylene group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms include a methylene group, an ethylene group, a propylene group, a butylene group, and a hexylene group.
Y is preferably a hydroxy group or a dialkylamino group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms in each alkyl group, more preferably a dialkylamino group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
The alkyl group in the alkylamino group and dialkylamino group represented by Y may be a linear alkyl group, a branched alkyl group, or a cyclic alkyl group. In addition, each alkyl group in the dialkylamino group may be the same or different. The alkylamino group is preferably an alkylamino group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkylamino group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably an alkylamino group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms. An amino group. The dialkylamino group is preferably a dialkylamino group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms in each alkyl group, more preferably a dialkylamino group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms in each alkyl group, particularly preferably Each alkyl group is a dialkylamino group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms. Examples of the alkyl group in the alkylamino group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms and the dialkylamino group in which each alkyl group has 1 to 10 carbon atoms include, for example, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, iso-propyl group, butyl group Tert-butyl group, hexyl group, 2-ethylhexyl group, cyclohexyl group, octyl group, and decyl group.
 式(1)中、Pは、好ましくは、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、ヒドロキシ基、アルキル基、アリール基、複素環基、アシル基、アミノ基、カルボキシ基、アルキルアミノ基、ジアルキルアミノ基、又は-Z-Y基であり、より好ましくは、水素原子、ヒドロキシ基、アルキル基、アシル基、アミノ基、又は-Z-Y基であり、さらに好ましくは、水素原子、アルキル基、又は-Z-Y基であり、特に好ましくは、水素原子、又は-Z-Y基である。 In formula (1), P is preferably a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an acyl group, an amino group, a carboxy group, an alkylamino group, a dialkylamino group, or — A ZY group, more preferably a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group, an acyl group, an amino group, or a -ZY group, still more preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or -ZY group. A group, particularly preferably a hydrogen atom or a -ZY group.
 式(1)中、Qで表される置換基としては、例えば、ハロゲン原子、ヒドロキシ基、アルキル基、アリール基、複素環基、アシル基、アミノ基、-Z-Y基、アルコキシ基、カルボキシ基、及びアルコキシアシル基が挙げられる。 In the formula (1), examples of the substituent represented by Q include a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an acyl group, an amino group, a —ZY group, an alkoxy group, a carboxy group, and the like. Groups and alkoxyacyl groups.
 式(1)中、Qで表されるハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アリール基、複素環基、アシル基、及び-Z-Y基は、それぞれ、上記式(1)においてPで表されるハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アリール基、複素環基、アシル基、及び-Z-Y基と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。 In the formula (1), a halogen atom represented by Q, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an acyl group, and a —ZY group are each a halogen atom represented by P in the above formula (1). , An alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an acyl group, and a -ZY group, and the preferred range is also the same.
 式(1)中、Qで表されるアルコキシ基は、直鎖状のアルコキシ基でもよく、分岐状のアルコキシ基でもよい。Qで表されるアルコキシ基は、好ましくは炭素数が1~12のアルコキシ基であり、より好ましくは炭素数が1~6のアルコキシ基である。炭素数が1~12のアルコキシ基としては、例えば、メトキシ基、エトキシ基、ブトキシ基、tert-ブトキシ基、ペンチルオキシ基、ヘキシルオキシ基、オクチルオキシ基、及びドデシルオキシ基が挙げられる。 In the formula (1), the alkoxy group represented by Q may be a linear alkoxy group or a branched alkoxy group. The alkoxy group represented by Q is preferably an alkoxy group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkoxy group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms. Examples of the alkoxy group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms include a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, a butoxy group, a tert-butoxy group, a pentyloxy group, a hexyloxy group, an octyloxy group, and a dodecyloxy group.
 式(1)中、Qで表されるアルコキシアシル基におけるアルコキシ基は、直鎖状のアルコキシ基でもよく、分岐状のアルコキシ基でもよい。Qで表されるアルコキシアシル基は、好ましくは炭素数が1~12のアルコキシアシル基であり、より好ましくは炭素数が1~6のアルコキシアシル基である。炭素数が1~12のアルコキシアシル基としては、例えば、メトキシアシル基(すなわち、メトキシカルボニル基)、エトキシアシル基(すなわち、エトキシカルボニル基)、ブトキシアシル基(すなわち、ブトキシカルボニル基)、tert-ブトキシアシル基(すなわち、ブトキシカルボニル基)、ペンチルオキシアシル基(すなわち、ペンチルオキシカルボニル基)、ヘキシルオキシアシル基(すなわち、ヘキシルオキシカルボニル基)、オクチルオキシアシル基(すなわちオクチルオキシカルボニル基)、及びドデシルオキシアシル基(すなわち、ドデシルオキシカルボニル基)が挙げられる。 In formula (1), the alkoxy group in the alkoxyacyl group represented by Q may be a linear alkoxy group or a branched alkoxy group. The alkoxyacyl group represented by Q is preferably an alkoxyacyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, and more preferably an alkoxyacyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms. Examples of the alkoxyacyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms include a methoxyacyl group (namely, methoxycarbonyl group), ethoxyacyl group (namely, ethoxycarbonyl group), butoxyacyl group (namely, butoxycarbonyl group), tert- Butoxyacyl group (ie butoxycarbonyl group), pentyloxyacyl group (ie pentyloxycarbonyl group), hexyloxyacyl group (ie hexyloxycarbonyl group), octyloxyacyl group (ie octyloxycarbonyl group), and A dodecyloxyacyl group (that is, a dodecyloxycarbonyl group) may be mentioned.
 式(1)中、Qは、好ましくは、ハロゲン原子、ヒドロキシ基、アルキル基、アリール基、複素環基、アシル基、アミノ基、-Z-Y基、アルコキシ基、カルボキシ基、又はアルコキシアシル基であり、より好ましくは、ハロゲン原子、ヒドロキシ基、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、アシル基、アミノ基、カルボキシ基、又はアルコキシアシル基であり、特に好ましくは、アルキル基、又はアルコキシ基である。 In the formula (1), Q is preferably a halogen atom, hydroxy group, alkyl group, aryl group, heterocyclic group, acyl group, amino group, —ZY group, alkoxy group, carboxy group, or alkoxyacyl group. And more preferably a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an acyl group, an amino group, a carboxy group, or an alkoxyacyl group, and particularly preferably an alkyl group or an alkoxy group.
 式(1)におけるP及びQの好ましい組み合わせは、下記(a)から任意に選ばれる基群と、下記(b)から任意に選ばれる基群と、を組み合わせた態様を包含する。
(a)Pは、好ましくは、水素原子、ヒドロキシ基、アルキル基、アシル基、アミノ基、又は-Z-Y基であり、より好ましくは、水素原子、アルキル基、又は-Z-Y基であり、特に好ましくは、水素原子、又は-Z-Y基である。
(b)Qは、好ましくは、ハロゲン原子、ヒドロキシ基、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、アシル基、アミノ基、カルボキシ基、又はアルコキシアシル基であり、より好ましくは、アルキル基、又はアルコキシ基である。
Preferable combinations of P and Q in the formula (1) include an embodiment in which a group group arbitrarily selected from the following (a) and a group group arbitrarily selected from the following (b) are combined.
(A) P is preferably a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group, an acyl group, an amino group, or a —ZY group, and more preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or a —ZY group. And particularly preferably a hydrogen atom or a —ZY group.
(B) Q is preferably a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an acyl group, an amino group, a carboxy group, or an alkoxyacyl group, and more preferably an alkyl group or an alkoxy group.
 式(1)におけるP及びQのより好ましい組み合わせは、下記(a)から任意に選ばれる基群と、下記(b)から任意に選ばれる基群と、を組み合わせた態様を包含する。
(a)Pは、好ましくは、水素原子、ヒドロキシ基、炭素数が1~6のアルキル基、炭素数が1~6のアシル基、アミノ基、又は-Z-Y基であり、Zが、カルボキシ基で置換されていてもよい、炭素数が1又は2のアルキレン基であり、Yが、ヒドロキシ基、カルボキシ基、又は各アルキル基の炭素数が1~10のジアルキルアミノ基であり、より好ましくは、水素原子、炭素数が1~6のアルキル基、又は-Z-Y基であり、Zが、カルボキシ基で置換されていてもよい、炭素数が1又は2のアルキレン基であり、Yが、各アルキル基の炭素数が1~10のジアルキルアミノ基であり、さらに好ましくは、水素原子、又は-Z-Y基であり、Zが、カルボキシ基で置換されていてもよい、炭素数が1又は2のアルキレン基であり、Yが、各アルキル基の炭素数が1以上10以下のジアルキルアミノ基であり、特に好ましくは、水素原子、又は-Z-Y基であり、Zが、炭素数が1又は2の無置換のアルキレン基であり、Yが、各アルキル基の炭素数が1以上10以下のジアルキルアミノ基である。
(b)Qは、好ましくは、ハロゲン原子、ヒドロキシ基、炭素数が1~6のアルキル基、炭素数が1~6のアシル基、アミノ基、炭素数が1~6のアルコキシ基、カルボキシ基、又は炭素数が1~6のアルコキシアシル基であり、より好ましくは、炭素数が1~6のアルキル基、又は炭素数が1~6のアルコキシ基である。
More preferable combinations of P and Q in the formula (1) include an embodiment in which a group of groups arbitrarily selected from the following (a) and a group of groups arbitrarily selected from the following (b) are combined.
(A) P is preferably a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, an acyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, an amino group, or a -ZY group, and Z is An alkylene group having 1 or 2 carbon atoms, which may be substituted with a carboxy group, Y is a hydroxy group, a carboxy group, or a dialkylamino group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms in each alkyl group; Preferably, it is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, or a -ZY group, and Z is an alkylene group having 1 or 2 carbon atoms, which may be substituted with a carboxy group, Y is a dialkylamino group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms in each alkyl group, more preferably a hydrogen atom or a -ZY group, and Z is a carbon that may be substituted with a carboxy group. An alkylene group having a number of 1 or 2, and Y is A dialkylamino group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms in the alkyl group, particularly preferably a hydrogen atom or a -ZY group, and Z is an unsubstituted alkylene group having 1 or 2 carbon atoms. , Y is a dialkylamino group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms in each alkyl group.
(B) Q is preferably a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, an acyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, an amino group, an alkoxy group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, a carboxy group Or an alkoxyacyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, or an alkoxy group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
 式(1)中、nは、0~4の整数を表し、好ましくは0~2の整数であり、より好ましくは0又は1であり、特に好ましくは0である。 In the formula (1), n represents an integer of 0 to 4, preferably an integer of 0 to 2, more preferably 0 or 1, and particularly preferably 0.
 本開示において、ベンゾトリアゾール化合物は、1種単独で用いられてもよく、2種以上を組み合わせて用いられてもよい。 In the present disclosure, the benzotriazole compound may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 ベンゾトリアゾール化合物の含有量は、転写性、形状再現性、及び直線性の観点から、感光性樹脂層の全質量に対して、好ましくは0.01質量%~10質量%であり、より好ましくは0.05質量%~10質量%であり、さらに好ましくは0.05質量%~2質量%であり、特に好ましくは0.05質量%~1質量%である。 The content of the benzotriazole compound is preferably 0.01% by mass to 10% by mass with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer, and more preferably from the viewpoint of transferability, shape reproducibility, and linearity. It is 0.05 mass% to 10 mass%, more preferably 0.05 mass% to 2 mass%, and particularly preferably 0.05 mass% to 1 mass%.
 下記重合体の含有量に対する、ベンゾトリアゾール化合物の含有量の質量比は、形状再現性、及び直線性の観点から、好ましくは0.001~0.1であり、より好ましくは0.001~0.05であり、特に好ましくは0.001~0.01である。 The mass ratio of the content of the benzotriazole compound to the content of the following polymer is preferably 0.001 to 0.1, more preferably 0.001 to 0, from the viewpoint of shape reproducibility and linearity. .05, particularly preferably 0.001 to 0.01.
 感光性樹脂層中の酸基が酸分解性基で保護された基を有する構成単位の含有量に対する、ベンゾトリアゾール化合物の含有量の質量比は、形状再現性、及び直線性の観点から、好ましくは0.003~0.3であり、より好ましくは0.003~0.15であり、特に好ましくは0.003~0.03である。 The mass ratio of the content of the benzotriazole compound to the content of the structural unit having a group in which the acid group in the photosensitive resin layer is protected with an acid-decomposable group is preferable from the viewpoint of shape reproducibility and linearity. Is 0.003 to 0.3, more preferably 0.003 to 0.15, and particularly preferably 0.003 to 0.03.
 光酸発生剤の含有量に対する、ベンゾトリアゾール化合物の含有量の質量比は、形状再現性、直線性の観点から、好ましくは0.01~5であり、より好ましくは0.01~0.8であり、特に好ましくは、0.05~0.3である。 The mass ratio of the content of the benzotriazole compound to the content of the photoacid generator is preferably 0.01 to 5, more preferably 0.01 to 0.8 from the viewpoint of shape reproducibility and linearity. Particularly preferred is 0.05 to 0.3.
〔重合体〕
 本開示における感光性樹脂層は、酸基が酸分解性基で保護された基を有する構成単位を含み、かつ、ガラス転移温度が90℃以下である重合体(以下、「重合体A」と称することがある。)を含有する。
(Polymer)
The photosensitive resin layer in the present disclosure includes a polymer (hereinafter referred to as “polymer A”) having a structural unit having a group in which an acid group is protected by an acid-decomposable group and having a glass transition temperature of 90 ° C. or less. May be referred to)).
(酸基が酸分解性基で保護された基を有する構成単位)
 重合体Aは、酸基が酸分解性基で保護された基を有する構成単位を含む。
(Structural unit having an acid group protected with an acid-decomposable group)
The polymer A includes a structural unit having a group in which an acid group is protected with an acid-decomposable group.
 酸基が酸分解性基で保護された基における酸基としては、例えば、カルボキシ基、スルホンアミド基、ホスホン酸基、スルホン酸基、フェノール性ヒドロキシ基、及びスルホニルイミド基が挙げられる。酸基が酸分解性基で保護された基における酸基は、カルボキシ基、及びフェノール性ヒドロキシ基よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種の酸基が好ましい。
 酸基が酸分解性基で保護された基における酸分解性基は、酸の作用によって脱離し得る基であれば制限されず、公知の酸分解性基を用いることができる。酸分解性基としては、例えば、エステル、アセタール、エーテルなどの骨格を形成することで酸基を保護する酸分解性基が挙げられる。酸分解性基の具体例としては、tert-ブチル基、ベンジル基、メトキシメチル基、及びテトラヒドロピラニル基が挙げられる。酸分解性基としては、アセタール構造を形成することで酸基を保護する酸分解性基が好ましい。
Examples of the acid group in the group in which the acid group is protected with an acid-decomposable group include a carboxy group, a sulfonamide group, a phosphonic acid group, a sulfonic acid group, a phenolic hydroxy group, and a sulfonylimide group. The acid group in the group in which the acid group is protected with an acid-decomposable group is preferably at least one acid group selected from the group consisting of a carboxy group and a phenolic hydroxy group.
The acid-decomposable group in the group in which the acid group is protected with an acid-decomposable group is not limited as long as it can be eliminated by the action of an acid, and a known acid-decomposable group can be used. Examples of the acid-decomposable group include an acid-decomposable group that protects an acid group by forming a skeleton such as ester, acetal, or ether. Specific examples of the acid-decomposable group include a tert-butyl group, a benzyl group, a methoxymethyl group, and a tetrahydropyranyl group. The acid-decomposable group is preferably an acid-decomposable group that protects the acid group by forming an acetal structure.
 酸基が酸分解性基で保護された基を有する構成単位は、感度及び解像度の観点から、下記式(A1)で表される構成単位であることが好ましい。式(A1)で表される構成単位は、酸基であるカルボキシ基が酸分解性基で保護された基を有する構成単位である。 The structural unit having an acid group protected by an acid-decomposable group is preferably a structural unit represented by the following formula (A1) from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution. The structural unit represented by the formula (A1) is a structural unit having a group in which a carboxy group that is an acid group is protected by an acid-decomposable group.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
 式(A1)中、R31、及びR32は、それぞれ独立して、水素原子、アルキル基、又はアリール基を表し、R31、及びR32の少なくとも一方が、アルキル基、又はアリール基であり、R33は、アルキル基、又はアリール基を表し、R31又はR32と、R33とが連結して環状エーテルを形成してもよく、R34は、水素原子、又はメチル基を表し、Xは、単結合、又は連結基を表す。 In formula (A1), R 31 and R 32 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group, and at least one of R 31 and R 32 is an alkyl group or an aryl group. , R 33 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, R 31 or R 32 and R 33 may be linked to form a cyclic ether, R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, X 0 represents a single bond or a linking group.
 式(A1)中、R31及びR32で表されるアルキル基は、好ましくは炭素数が1~10のアルキル基であり、より好ましくは炭素数が1~4のアルキル基である。アルキル基は、直鎖状のアルキル基でもよく、分岐状のアルキル基でもよく、環状のアルキル基でもよい。炭素数が1~10のアルキル基としては、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、iso-プロピル基、ブチル基、tert-ブチル基、ヘキシル基、シクロヘキシル基、オクチル基、及びデシル基が挙げられる。 In the formula (A1), the alkyl group represented by R 31 and R 32 is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms. The alkyl group may be a linear alkyl group, a branched alkyl group, or a cyclic alkyl group. Examples of the alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms include methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, iso-propyl group, butyl group, tert-butyl group, hexyl group, cyclohexyl group, octyl group, and decyl group. It is done.
 式(A1)中、R31及びR32で表されるアリール基は、好ましくは炭素数が6~18のアリール基であり、より好ましくは炭素数が6~12のアリール基であり、特に好ましくはフェニル基である。アリール基は、単環のアリール基でもよく、縮合環のアリール基でもよい。炭素数が1~18のアリール基としては、例えば、フェニル基、ビフェニル基、ナフチル基、フェナントリル基、及びターフェニル基が挙げられる。 In the formula (A1), the aryl group represented by R 31 and R 32 is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 18 carbon atoms, more preferably an aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms, particularly preferably Is a phenyl group. The aryl group may be a monocyclic aryl group or a condensed ring aryl group. Examples of the aryl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms include a phenyl group, a biphenyl group, a naphthyl group, a phenanthryl group, and a terphenyl group.
 式(A1)中、R31、及びR32は、それぞれ独立して、水素原子、又は炭素数が1~4のアルキル基であることが好ましい。 In formula (A1), R 31 and R 32 are each independently preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
 式(A1)中、R33は、アルキル基、又はアリール基であり、好ましくは炭素数1~10のアルキル基であり、より好ましくは炭素数1~6のアルキル基である。
 式(A1)中、R33で表される炭素数1~10のアルキル基としては、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、iso-プロピル基、ブチル基、tert-ブチル基、ヘキシル基、シクロヘキシル基、オクチル基、及びデシル基が挙げられる。
 式(A1)中、R33で表されるアリール基は、好ましくは炭素数が6~18のアリール基であり、より好ましくは炭素数が6~12のアリール基である。アリール基は、単環のアリール基でもよく、縮合環のアリール基でもよい。炭素数が1~18のアリール基としては、例えば、フェニル基、ビフェニル基、ナフチル基、フェナントリル基、及びターフェニル基が挙げられる。
In formula (A1), R 33 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
In the formula (A1), examples of the alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms represented by R 33 include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an iso-propyl group, a butyl group, a tert-butyl group, a hexyl group, Examples include a cyclohexyl group, an octyl group, and a decyl group.
In the formula (A1), the aryl group represented by R 33 is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 18 carbon atoms, more preferably an aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms. The aryl group may be a monocyclic aryl group or a condensed ring aryl group. Examples of the aryl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms include a phenyl group, a biphenyl group, a naphthyl group, a phenanthryl group, and a terphenyl group.
 式(A1)中、R31又はR32と、R33とは、連結して環状エーテルを形成してもよく、連結して環状エーテルを形成することが好ましい。環状エーテルの環員数は、制限されず、好ましくは5又は6であり、より好ましくは5である。 In formula (A1), R 31 or R 32 and R 33 may be linked to form a cyclic ether, and preferably linked to form a cyclic ether. The number of ring members of the cyclic ether is not limited, and is preferably 5 or 6, more preferably 5.
 式(A1)中、R34は、水素原子、又はメチル基を表し、重合体Aのガラス転移温度をより低くし得るという観点から、好ましくは水素原子である。 In the formula (A1), R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and is preferably a hydrogen atom from the viewpoint that the glass transition temperature of the polymer A can be further lowered.
 式(A1)においてR34が水素原子である構成単位の含有量は、酸基が酸分解性基で保護された基を有する構成単位の全質量に対し、20質量%以上であることが好ましい。
 なお、式(A1)においてR34が水素原子である構成単位の含有量は、13C-核磁気共鳴スペクトル(NMR)測定から常法により算出されるピーク強度の強度比により確認することができる。
In the formula (A1), the content of the structural unit in which R 34 is a hydrogen atom is preferably 20% by mass or more based on the total mass of the structural unit having a group in which an acid group is protected by an acid-decomposable group. .
In the formula (A1), the content of the structural unit in which R 34 is a hydrogen atom can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity calculated by a conventional method from 13 C-nuclear magnetic resonance spectrum (NMR) measurement. .
 式(A1)中、Xは、単結合、又は連結基を表し、好ましくは単結合である。Xで表される連結基は、好ましくは、アルキレン基、アリーレン基、-C(=O)O-、-C(=O)NR-、-O-、又は、これらの組み合わせであり、より好ましくは、アルキレン基、又はアリーレン基であり、特に好ましくは、アリーレン基である。Rは、アルキル基、又は水素原子を表し、好ましくは炭素数1~4のアルキル基、又は水素原子であり、より好ましくは水素原子である。 In Formula (A1), X 0 represents a single bond or a linking group, and preferably a single bond. The linking group represented by X 0 is preferably an alkylene group, an arylene group, —C (═O) O—, —C (═O) NR N —, —O—, or a combination thereof. An alkylene group or an arylene group is more preferable, and an arylene group is particularly preferable. RN represents an alkyl group or a hydrogen atom, preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms or a hydrogen atom, more preferably a hydrogen atom.
 式(A1)で表される構成単位の具体例としては、下記の構成単位が挙げられる。なお、R34は、水素原子、又はメチル基を表す。 Specific examples of the structural unit represented by the formula (A1) include the following structural units. R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
 式(A1)で表される構成単位の中でも、パターン形成時の感度をさらに高める観点から、下記式(A2)で表される構成単位がより好ましい。 Among the structural units represented by the formula (A1), the structural unit represented by the following formula (A2) is more preferable from the viewpoint of further increasing the sensitivity during pattern formation.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
 式(A2)中、R34は、水素原子、又はメチル基を表し、R35~R41は、それぞれ独立して、水素原子、又は炭素数1~4のアルキル基を表す。 In the formula (A2), R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and R 35 to R 41 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
 式(A2)中、R34は、水素原子であることが好ましい。式(A2)中、R35~R41は、水素原子であることが好ましい。 In the formula (A2), R 34 is preferably a hydrogen atom. In the formula (A2), R 35 to R 41 are preferably hydrogen atoms.
 酸基が酸分解性基で保護された基を有する構成単位は、パターン形状の変形抑制の観点から、下記式(A3)で表される構成単位であることが好ましい。式(A3)で表される構成単位は、酸基であるフェノール性ヒドロキシ基が酸分解性基で保護された基を有する構成単位である。 The structural unit having an acid group protected by an acid-decomposable group is preferably a structural unit represented by the following formula (A3) from the viewpoint of suppressing deformation of the pattern shape. The structural unit represented by the formula (A3) is a structural unit having a group in which a phenolic hydroxy group which is an acid group is protected with an acid-decomposable group.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
 式(A3)中、RB1、及びRB2は、それぞれ独立して、水素原子、アルキル基、又はアリール基を表し、少なくともRB1及びRB2のいずれか一方がアルキル基、又はアリール基であり、RB3は、アルキル基、又はアリール基を表し、RB1又はRB2と、RB3とが連結して環状エーテルを形成してもよく、RB4は、水素原子、又はメチル基を表し、Xは、単結合、又は二価の連結基を表し、RB12は、置換基を表し、nは、0~4の整数を表す。 In formula (A3), R B1 and R B2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group, and at least one of R B1 and R B2 is an alkyl group or an aryl group , R B3 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R B1 or R B2 and R B3 may be linked to form a cyclic ether, R B4 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, X B represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, R B12 represents a substituent, and n represents an integer of 0 to 4.
 式(A3)中、RB1及びRB2におけるアルキル基は、式(A1)中のR31及びR32で表されるアルキル基と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。
 
In formula (A3), the alkyl group in R B1 and R B2 has the same meaning as the alkyl group represented by R 31 and R 32 in formula (A1), and the preferred range is also the same.
 式(A3)中、RB1及びRB2におけるアリール基は、式(A1)中のR31及びR32で表されるアリール基と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。 In formula (A3), the aryl group in R B1 and R B2 has the same meaning as the aryl group represented by R 31 and R 32 in formula (A1), and the preferred range is also the same.
 式(A3)中、RB1及びRB2は、それぞれ独立して、水素原子、又は炭素数1~4のアルキル基であることが好ましい。 In formula (A3), R B1 and R B2 are preferably each independently a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
 式(A3)中、RB3は、アルキル基、又はアリール基を表し、好ましくは炭素数が1~10のアルキル基であり、より好ましくは炭素数が1~6のアルキル基である。 In formula (A3), R B3 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
 式(A3)中、RB1又はRB2と、RB3とは連結して環状エーテルを形成してもよく、RB1又はRB2と、RB3とが連結して環状エーテルを形成することが好ましい。環状エーテルの環員数は、制限されず、5又は6であることが好ましく、5であることがより好ましい。 In formula (A3), R B1 or R B2 and R B3 may be linked to form a cyclic ether, or R B1 or R B2 and R B3 may be linked to form a cyclic ether. preferable. The number of ring members of the cyclic ether is not limited and is preferably 5 or 6, and more preferably 5.
 式(A3)中、RB4は、水素原子、又はメチル基を表し、重合体Aのガラス転移温度をより低くし得るという観点から、好ましくは水素原子である。 In formula (A3), R B4 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and is preferably a hydrogen atom from the viewpoint that the glass transition temperature of the polymer A can be further lowered.
 式(A3)においてRB4が水素原子である構成単位の含有量は、酸基が酸分解性基で保護された基を有する全構成単位に対して、20質量%以上であることが好ましい。
 なお、式(A3)においてRB4が水素原子である構成単位の含有量は、13C-核磁気共鳴スペクトル(NMR)測定から常法により算出されるピーク強度の強度比により確認することができる。
In the formula (A3), the content of the structural unit in which R B4 is a hydrogen atom is preferably 20% by mass or more based on all structural units having a group in which an acid group is protected with an acid-decomposable group.
In the formula (A3), the content of the structural unit in which R B4 is a hydrogen atom can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity calculated by a conventional method from 13 C-nuclear magnetic resonance spectrum (NMR) measurement. .
 式(A3)中、Xは、単結合、又は二価の連結基を表し、好ましくは、単結合、アルキレン基、-C(=O)O-、-C(=O)NR-、-O-、又はこれらの組み合わせであり、より好ましくは、単結合である。アルキレン基は、直鎖状でもよく、分岐を有していても環状構造を有していてもよく、置換基を有していてもよい。アルキレン基の炭素数は、好ましくは1~10であり、より好ましくは1~4である。Rは、アルキル基、又は水素原子を表し、好ましくは、炭素数1~4のアルキル基、又は水素原子であり、より好ましくは、水素原子である。Xが-C(=O)O-を含む場合、-C(=O)O-に含まれる炭素原子と、RB4が結合した炭素原子とが直接結合する態様が好ましい。Xが-C(=O)NR-を含む場合、-C(=O)NR-に含まれる炭素原子と、RB4が結合した炭素原子とが直接結合する態様が好ましい。 In the formula (A3), X B represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and preferably a single bond, an alkylene group, —C (═O) O—, —C (═O) NR N —, —O— or a combination thereof, and more preferably a single bond. The alkylene group may be linear, may have a branch or a cyclic structure, and may have a substituent. The alkylene group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms. RN represents an alkyl group or a hydrogen atom, preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms or a hydrogen atom, and more preferably a hydrogen atom. When X B contains —C (═O) O—, an embodiment in which the carbon atom contained in —C (═O) O— and the carbon atom bonded to R B4 are directly bonded is preferable. When containing, -C (= O) NR N - - is X B -C (= O) NR N and carbon atoms contained in a mode in which the carbon atom to which R B4 is bonded is directly bonded is preferable.
 式(A3)中、RB1~RB3を含む基(すなわち、-OCRB1B2(ORB3))と、Xとは、互いにパラ位で結合することが好ましい。 In the formula (A3), the group containing R B1 to R B3 (that is, —OCR B1 R B2 (OR B3 )) and X B are preferably bonded to each other at the para position.
 式(A3)中、RB12は、置換基を表し、好ましくはアルキル基、又はハロゲン原子である。アルキル基の炭素数は、好ましくは1~10であり、より好ましくは1~4である。 In formula (A3), R B12 represents a substituent, preferably an alkyl group or a halogen atom. The number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group is preferably 1 to 10, and more preferably 1 to 4.
 式(A3)中、nは、0~4の整数を表し、好ましくは0又は1であり、より好ましくは0である。 In the formula (A3), n represents an integer of 0 to 4, preferably 0 or 1, and more preferably 0.
 式(A3)で表される構成単位の中でも、パターン形状の変形抑制の観点から、下記式(A4)で表される構成単位がより好ましい。 Among the structural units represented by the formula (A3), the structural unit represented by the following formula (A4) is more preferable from the viewpoint of suppressing deformation of the pattern shape.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
 式(A4)中、RB4は、水素原子、又はメチル基を表し、RB5~RB11は、それぞれ独立して、水素原子、又は炭素数1~4のアルキル基を表し、RB12は、置換基を表し、nは、0~4の整数を表す。 In formula (A4), R B4 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, R B5 to R B11 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and R B12 represents Represents a substituent, and n represents an integer of 0 to 4.
 式(A4)中、RB4は、好ましくは水素原子である。
 式(A4)中、RB5~RB11は、好ましくは水素原子である。
 式(A4)中、RB12は、置換基を表し、好ましくは、アルキル基、又はハロゲン原子である。アルキル基の炭素数は、好ましくは1~10であり、より好ましくは1~4である。
 式(A4)中、nは、0~4の整数を表し、好ましくは0又は1であり、より好ましくは0である。
In formula (A4), R B4 is preferably a hydrogen atom.
In formula (A4), R B5 to R B11 are preferably hydrogen atoms.
In formula (A4), R B12 represents a substituent, preferably an alkyl group or a halogen atom. The number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group is preferably 1 to 10, and more preferably 1 to 4.
In formula (A4), n represents an integer of 0 to 4, preferably 0 or 1, and more preferably 0.
 式(A4)で表される構成単位の好ましい具体例としては、下記の構成単位が例示できる。なお、RB4は、水素原子、又はメチル基を表す。 Preferable specific examples of the structural unit represented by the formula (A4) include the following structural units. R B4 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
 本開示において、酸基が酸分解性基で保護された基を有する構成単位は、1種単独で用いられてもよく、2種以上を組み合わせて用いてもよい。 In the present disclosure, the structural unit having a group in which an acid group is protected by an acid-decomposable group may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 重合体A中の酸基が酸分解性基で保護された基を有する構成単位の含有量は、重合体Aの全質量に対して、好ましくは20質量%以上であり、より好ましくは20質量%~90質量%であり、さらに好ましくは20質量%~70質量%であり、特に好ましくは20質量%~50質量%である。なお、重合体A中の酸基が酸分解性基で保護された基を有する構成単位の含有量は、13C-NMR測定から常法により算出されるピーク強度の強度比により確認することができる。 The content of the structural unit having a group in which the acid group in the polymer A is protected with an acid-decomposable group is preferably 20% by mass or more, more preferably 20% by mass with respect to the total mass of the polymer A. % To 90% by mass, more preferably 20% to 70% by mass, and particularly preferably 20% to 50% by mass. The content of the structural unit having a group in which the acid group in the polymer A is protected with an acid-decomposable group can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of peak intensity calculated by 13 C-NMR measurement by a conventional method. it can.
(その他の構成単位)
-pKaHが3以上の基を有する構成単位-
 重合体Aは、pKaHが3以上の基を有する構成単位をさらに含むことができる。重合体Aは、pKaHが3以上の基を有する構成単位をさらに含むことで、光酸発生剤より発生する酸の余分な拡散を抑制し、現像時の樹脂パターンの裾引きに由来する解像性の低下を抑えることができる。また、重合体Aは、pKaHが3以上の基を有する構成単位をさらに含むことで、感光性転写材料を露光後、ある程度時間が経過した後に現像を行った場合であっても、得られる樹脂パターンの線幅の細り等を抑制できる(以下、「引き置き時間依存抑制性」と称することがある。)。
(Other structural units)
-Constitutional unit in which pKaH has 3 or more groups-
The polymer A can further include a structural unit having a pKaH group of 3 or more. The polymer A further includes a structural unit having a pKaH group of 3 or more, thereby suppressing excessive diffusion of the acid generated from the photoacid generator, and resulting from the tailing of the resin pattern during development. The decline in sex can be suppressed. Further, the polymer A further includes a structural unit having a pKaH group of 3 or more, so that the resin obtained even when the photosensitive transfer material is developed after a certain amount of time has passed after exposure. Thinning of the line width of the pattern or the like can be suppressed (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “retention time dependency suppression”).
 本開示において、「pKaH」とは、共役酸のpKaをいう。
 本開示において、「pKaHが3以上の基」とは、その基の共役酸のpKaが3以上である基をいう。例えば、「-NH」のpKaHの値は、「-NH 」のpKaの値である。ここで、「pKaH」の値は、ACD/ChemSketch(ACD/Labs 8.00 Release Product Version 8.08)により求めた計算値である。具体的には、特定の官能基を有する構成単位の化学構造から、上記ACD/ChemSketchを用いて計算し、特定の官能基のpKaHの値を算出する。
In the present disclosure, “pKaH” refers to the pKa of a conjugate acid.
In the present disclosure, the “group having a pKaH of 3 or more” refers to a group having a pKa of a conjugate acid of the group of 3 or more. For example, the pKaH value of “—NH 2 ” is the pKa value of “—NH 3 + ”. Here, the value of “pKaH” is a calculated value obtained by ACD / ChemSketch (ACD / Labs 8.00 Release Product Version 8.08). Specifically, from the chemical structure of the structural unit having a specific functional group, the above-mentioned ACD / ChemSketch is used to calculate the pKaH value of the specific functional group.
 pKaHが3以上の基は、解像性及び引き置き時間依存抑制性の観点から、pKaHが4以上の基であることが好ましく、pKaHが5以上の基であることがより好ましく、pKaHが5以上15以下の基であることがさらに好ましく、pKaHが6以上10以下の基であることが特に好ましい。言い換えると、重合体Aは、pKaHが4以上の基を有する構成単位を含むことが好ましく、pKaHが5以上の基を有する構成単位を含むことがより好ましく、pKaHが5以上15以下の基を有する構成単位を含むことがさらに好ましく、pKaHが6以上10以下の基を有する構成単位を少なくとも有する重合体Aを含むことが特に好ましい。 The group having a pKaH of 3 or more is preferably a group having a pKaH of 4 or more, more preferably a group having a pKaH of 5 or more, and a pKaH of 5 or more from the viewpoint of resolution and retention time-dependent inhibition. More preferably, it is a group of 15 or less, and particularly preferably a group having a pKaH of 6 or more and 10 or less. In other words, the polymer A preferably includes a structural unit having a pKaH of 4 or more, more preferably includes a structural unit having a pKaH of 5 or more, and a group having a pKaH of 5 or more and 15 or less. It is more preferable to include a structural unit, and it is particularly preferable to include a polymer A having at least a structural unit having a pKaH group of 6 to 10.
 pKaHが3以上の基としては、解像性及び引き置き時間依存抑制性の観点から、窒素原子を有する基であることが好ましく、脂肪族アミノ基、芳香族アミノ基、又は含窒素複素芳香環基であることがより好ましく、脂肪族アミノ基、又は含窒素複素芳香環基であることがさらに好ましく、脂肪族アミノ基が特に好ましい。
 脂肪族アミノ基としては、第一級アミノ基、第二級アミノ基、及び第三級アミノ基のいずれであってもよいが、解像性及び引き置き時間依存抑制性の観点から、第二級アミノ基、又は第三級アミノ基であることが好ましい。
 芳香族アミノ基としては、アニリノ基、モノアルキルアニリノ基、又はジアルキルアニリノ基であることが好ましく、モノアルキルアニリノ基、又はジアルキルアニリノ基であることがより好ましい。
 含窒素複素芳香環基における含窒素複素芳香環としては、ピリジン環、イミダゾール環、又はトリアゾール環であることが好ましく、ピリジン環、又はイミダゾール環であることがより好ましく、ピリジン環であることが特に好ましい。
 また、上記含窒素複素芳香環基は、含窒素複素芳香環上にさらに置換基を有していてもよい。上記置換基としては、特に制限はないが、アルキル基であることが好ましく、メチル基であることがより好ましい。
The group having pKaH of 3 or more is preferably a group having a nitrogen atom from the viewpoint of resolution and retention time-dependent suppression, and is an aliphatic amino group, aromatic amino group, or nitrogen-containing heteroaromatic ring. It is more preferably a group, more preferably an aliphatic amino group or a nitrogen-containing heteroaromatic group, and particularly preferably an aliphatic amino group.
The aliphatic amino group may be any of a primary amino group, a secondary amino group, and a tertiary amino group, but from the viewpoint of resolution and retention time-dependent suppression, A primary amino group or a tertiary amino group is preferred.
The aromatic amino group is preferably an anilino group, a monoalkylanilino group, or a dialkylanilino group, and more preferably a monoalkylanilino group or a dialkylanilino group.
The nitrogen-containing heteroaromatic ring in the nitrogen-containing heteroaromatic group is preferably a pyridine ring, an imidazole ring, or a triazole ring, more preferably a pyridine ring or an imidazole ring, and particularly preferably a pyridine ring. preferable.
The nitrogen-containing heteroaromatic group may further have a substituent on the nitrogen-containing heteroaromatic ring. The substituent is not particularly limited, but is preferably an alkyl group, and more preferably a methyl group.
 また、pKaHが3以上の基としては、解像性及び引き置き時間依存抑制性の観点からアルキルアミン構造を有する基であることが特に好ましい。
 上記アルキルアミン構造としては、例えば、ジアルキルアミン、トリアルキルアミンが挙げられ、具体的には、ジメチルアミノ基、ジエチルアミノ基、ジプロピルアミノ基、ジイソプロピルアミノ基、1,2,2,6,6-ペンタアルキル-4-ピぺリジル基、及び2,2,6,6-テトラアルキル-4-ピぺリジル基が挙げられる。
 上記アルキルアミン構造を有する構成単位を形成するモノマーとしては、以下のものが好ましく挙げられる。
In addition, the group having a pKaH of 3 or more is particularly preferably a group having an alkylamine structure from the viewpoint of resolution and retention time-dependent suppression.
Examples of the alkylamine structure include dialkylamine and trialkylamine. Specifically, dimethylamino group, diethylamino group, dipropylamino group, diisopropylamino group, 1,2,2,6,6- Examples thereof include a pentaalkyl-4-piperidyl group and a 2,2,6,6-tetraalkyl-4-piperidyl group.
Preferred examples of the monomer that forms the structural unit having the alkylamine structure include the following.
 pKaHが3以上の基を有する構成単位は、解像性及び引き置き時間依存抑制性の観点から、下記式(B1)又は式(B2)で表される構成単位であることが好ましく、下記式(B1)で表される構成単位であることがより好ましい。 The structural unit having a pKaH group of 3 or more is preferably a structural unit represented by the following formula (B1) or formula (B2) from the viewpoints of resolution and retention time-dependent inhibition properties. The structural unit represented by (B1) is more preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
 式(B1)及び式(B2)中、Rは、水素原子又はメチル基を表し、Zは、単結合、メチレン基、アリーレン基、-O-、-C(=O)-NH-、又は-C(=O)-O-を表し、Rは、単結合、又は、エーテル結合、ウレタン結合、ウレア結合、アミド結合、エステル結合、及びカーボネート結合よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の基を有していてもよい炭素数1~10の直鎖状、分岐状若しくは環状のアルキレン基を表し、R及びRは、それぞれ独立して、水素原子、又は、エーテル結合、チオエーテル結合、ヒドロキシ基、ホルミル基、アセトキシ基、シアノ基、ウレタン結合、ウレア結合、アミド結合、エステル結合、カーボネート結合、及び芳香族基よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20の直鎖状、分岐状若しくは環状のアルキル基を表し、RとR、RとR、又は、RとRは、それぞれ結合して環を形成していてもよく、Qは、窒素原子を有する芳香族基、又は含窒素複素芳香族基を表す。 In formulas (B1) and (B2), R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and Z represents a single bond, a methylene group, an arylene group, —O—, —C (═O) —NH—, or —C (═O) —O—, wherein R 2 is a single bond or at least one selected from the group consisting of an ether bond, a urethane bond, a urea bond, an amide bond, an ester bond, and a carbonate bond. Represents a linear, branched or cyclic alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms which may have a group, and R 3 and R 4 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an ether bond or a thioether bond. , A hydroxyl group, a formyl group, an acetoxy group, a cyano group, a urethane bond, a urea bond, an amide bond, an ester bond, a carbonate bond, and at least one group selected from the group consisting of aromatic groups Yo Represents a straight, branched or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and R 2 and R 3 , R 2 and R 4 , or R 3 and R 4 are bonded to each other to form a ring. Q 1 represents an aromatic group having a nitrogen atom or a nitrogen-containing heteroaromatic group.
 式(B1)におけるZは、解像性、引き置き時間依存抑制性及び合成容易性の観点から、単結合、アリーレン基、-C(=O)-NH-、又は-C(=O)-O-であることが好ましく、アリーレン基、-C(=O)-NH-、又は-C(=O)-O-であることがより好ましく、-C(=O)-NH-、又は-C(=O)-O-であることが特に好ましい。
 式(B2)におけるZは、解像性、引き置き時間依存抑制性及び合成容易性の観点から、単結合、アリーレン基又は-C(=O)-O-であることが好ましく、単結合であることがより好ましい。
 式(B1)におけるRは、解像性、引き置き時間依存抑制性及び合成容易性の観点から、エーテル結合、ウレタン結合及びウレア結合よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の基を有していてもよい炭素数1~10の直鎖状、分岐状若しくは環状のアルキレン基であることが好ましく、エーテル結合、ウレタン結合及びウレア結合よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の基を有していてもよい炭素数2~10の直鎖状、分岐状若しくは環状のアルキレン基であることがより好ましく、炭素数2~10の直鎖状、分岐状若しくは環状のアルキレン基であることが特に好ましい。
 式(B2)におけるRは、解像性、引き置き時間依存抑制性及び合成容易性の観点から、単結合であることが好ましい。
Z in the formula (B1) is a single bond, an arylene group, —C (═O) —NH—, or —C (═O) — from the viewpoints of resolution, retention time-dependent inhibition, and ease of synthesis. It is preferably O—, more preferably an arylene group, —C (═O) —NH—, or —C (═O) —O—, —C (═O) —NH—, or — Particularly preferred is C (═O) —O—.
Z in the formula (B2) is preferably a single bond, an arylene group, or —C (═O) —O— from the viewpoints of resolution, retention time-dependent inhibition, and ease of synthesis. More preferably.
R 2 in Formula (B1) has at least one group selected from the group consisting of an ether bond, a urethane bond, and a urea bond from the viewpoints of resolution, retention time-dependent inhibition, and ease of synthesis. It is preferably a linear, branched or cyclic alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms which has at least one group selected from the group consisting of an ether bond, a urethane bond and a urea bond. It is more preferably a linear, branched or cyclic alkylene group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms, particularly a linear, branched or cyclic alkylene group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms. preferable.
R 2 in Formula (B2) is preferably a single bond from the viewpoints of resolution, retention time-dependent inhibition, and ease of synthesis.
 式(B1)におけるR及びRは、解像性、引き置き時間依存抑制性及び合成容易性の観点から、それぞれ独立して、水素原子、又は、エーテル結合を有していてもよい炭素数1~20の直鎖状、分岐状若しくは環状のアルキル基であることが好ましく、水素原子、又は、炭素数1~20の直鎖状、分岐状若しくは環状のアルキル基であることがより好ましい。
 また、式(B1)において、解像性及び引き置き時間依存抑制性の観点から、式(B1)におけるRとRとRとが結合し、含窒素脂肪族環を形成している態様が好ましく、ピペリジン環を形成している態様がより好ましい。
 式(B2)におけるQは、解像性、引き置き時間依存抑制性及び合成容易性の観点から、含窒素複素芳香族基であることが好ましく、ピリジル基、メチルピリジル基、イミダゾイル基、メチルイミダゾイル基、又は、トリアゾリル基であることがより好ましく、ピリジル基であることが更に好ましく、4-ピリジル基であることが特に好ましい。
R 3 and R 4 in the formula (B1) are each independently a hydrogen atom or carbon that may have an ether bond from the viewpoints of resolution, retention time-dependent inhibition, and ease of synthesis. It is preferably a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably a hydrogen atom or a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms. .
Further, in the formula (B1), R 2 , R 3 and R 4 in the formula (B1) are bonded to form a nitrogen-containing aliphatic ring from the viewpoint of resolution and retention time-dependent suppression. An embodiment is preferred, and an embodiment in which a piperidine ring is formed is more preferred.
Q 1 in formula (B2) is preferably a nitrogen-containing heteroaromatic group from the viewpoints of resolution, retention time-dependent inhibition, and ease of synthesis, and includes a pyridyl group, a methylpyridyl group, an imidazolyl group, a methyl group. It is more preferably an imidazolyl group or a triazolyl group, further preferably a pyridyl group, and particularly preferably a 4-pyridyl group.
 pKaHが3以上の基を有する構成単位としては、例えば、特開2015-187634号公報の段落0140に記載の構成単位、及び特開2011-039266号の0068段落~0070段落に記載のモノマー由来の構成単位が挙げられる。 Examples of the structural unit in which pKaH has a group of 3 or more are derived from the structural unit described in paragraph 0140 of JP-A-2015-187634 and the monomers described in paragraphs 0068 to 0070 of JP-A-2011-039266. A structural unit is mentioned.
 pKaHが3以上の基を有する構成単位を形成するモノマーとしては、例えば、メタクリル酸1,2,2,6,6-ペンタメチル-4-ピペリジル、メタクリル酸2-(ジメチルアミノ)エチル、アクリル酸2,2,6,6-テトラメチル-4-ピペリジル、メタクリル酸2,2,6,6-テトラメチル-4-ピペリジル、アクリル酸2,2,6,6-テトラメチル-4-ピペリジル、メタクリル酸2-(ジエチルアミノ)エチル、アクリル酸2-(ジメチルアミノ)エチル、アクリル酸2-(ジエチルアミノ)エチル、メタクリル酸N-(3-ジメチルアミノ)プロピル、アクリル酸N-(3-ジメチルアミノ)プロピル、メタクリル酸N-(3-ジエチルアミノ)プロピル、アクリル酸N-(3-ジエチルアミノ)プロピル、メタクリル酸2-(ジイソプロピルアミノ)エチル、メタクリル酸2-モルホリノエチル、アクリル酸2-モルホリノエチル、N-[3-(ジメチルアミノ)プロピル]アクリルアミド、アリルアミン、4-アミノスチレン、4-ビニルピリジン、2-ビニルピリジン、3-ビニルピリジン、1-ビニルイミダゾール、2-メチル-1-ビニルイミダゾール、1-アリルイミダゾール、及び1-ビニル-1,2,4-トリアゾールが挙げられる。 Examples of the monomer that forms a structural unit having a pKaH group of 3 or more include 1,2,2,6,6-pentamethyl-4-piperidyl methacrylate, 2- (dimethylamino) ethyl methacrylate, acrylic acid 2 , 2,6,6-Tetramethyl-4-piperidyl, 2,2,6,6-tetramethyl-4-piperidyl methacrylate, 2,2,6,6-tetramethyl-4-piperidyl acrylate, methacrylic acid 2- (diethylamino) ethyl, 2- (dimethylamino) ethyl acrylate, 2- (diethylamino) ethyl acrylate, N- (3-dimethylamino) propyl methacrylate, N- (3-dimethylamino) propyl acrylate, N- (3-diethylamino) propyl methacrylate, N- (3-diethylamino) propyl acrylate, methacrylate 2- (diisopropylamino) ethyl acid, 2-morpholinoethyl methacrylate, 2-morpholinoethyl acrylate, N- [3- (dimethylamino) propyl] acrylamide, allylamine, 4-aminostyrene, 4-vinylpyridine, 2- Examples include vinylpyridine, 3-vinylpyridine, 1-vinylimidazole, 2-methyl-1-vinylimidazole, 1-allylimidazole, and 1-vinyl-1,2,4-triazole.
 また、特開2015-187634号公報、又は、特開2011-39266号公報に記載されたアミノ基又は含窒素複素環基を有するモノマーも挙げられる。 In addition, monomers having an amino group or a nitrogen-containing heterocyclic group described in JP-A-2015-187634 or JP-A-2011-39266 are also included.
 重合体A中のpKaHが3以上の基を有する構成単位の含有量は、解像性及び引き置き時間依存抑制性の観点から、重合体Aの全質量に対して、好ましくは0.01質量%~30質量%であり、より好ましくは0.05質量%~20質量%であり、さらに好ましくは0.1質量%~10質量%であり、特に好ましくは0.4質量%~4質量%であり、最も好ましくは0.6質量%~2質量%である。 The content of the structural unit having a pKaH group of 3 or more in the polymer A is preferably 0.01 mass with respect to the total mass of the polymer A from the viewpoint of resolution and retention time-dependent suppression. % To 30% by mass, more preferably 0.05% to 20% by mass, still more preferably 0.1% to 10% by mass, and particularly preferably 0.4% to 4% by mass. Most preferably, it is 0.6 mass% to 2 mass%.
-酸基を有する構成単位-
 重合体Aは、酸基を有する構成単位をさらに含むことができる。重合体Aが酸基を有する構成単位をさらに含むことで、本開示における感光性樹脂層は、パターン形成時の感度が良好となり、パターン露光後の現像工程においてアルカリ性の現像液に溶けやすくなり、現像時間の短縮化を図ることができる。
-Structural unit having an acid group-
The polymer A can further include a structural unit having an acid group. When the polymer A further includes a structural unit having an acid group, the photosensitive resin layer in the present disclosure has good sensitivity at the time of pattern formation, and is easily dissolved in an alkaline developer in the development step after pattern exposure. Development time can be shortened.
 酸基は、例えば、酸基を形成し得るモノマーを用いて、酸基を有する構成単位として、重合体Aに組み込まれる。重合体Aへの酸基を有する構成単位の導入は、例えば、酸基を有するモノマーを共重合させること、酸無水物構造を有するモノマーを共重合させ、酸無水物を加水分解することなどによって行うことができる。 The acid group is incorporated into the polymer A as a structural unit having an acid group using, for example, a monomer capable of forming an acid group. The introduction of the structural unit having an acid group into the polymer A is, for example, by copolymerizing a monomer having an acid group, copolymerizing a monomer having an acid anhydride structure, and hydrolyzing the acid anhydride. It can be carried out.
 感度向上の観点から、酸基のpKaの上限は、好ましくは10以下であり、より好ましくは6以下である。また、酸基のpKaの下限は、好ましくは-5以上である。 From the viewpoint of improving sensitivity, the upper limit of the pKa of the acid group is preferably 10 or less, more preferably 6 or less. Further, the lower limit of the pKa of the acid group is preferably −5 or more.
 酸基としては、例えば、カルボキシ基、スルホンアミド基、ホスホン酸基、スルホン酸基、フェノール性ヒドロキシ基、及びスルホニルイミド基が挙げられる。これらの中でも、カルボキシ基、及びフェノール性ヒドロキシ基よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種の酸基が好ましい。 Examples of the acid group include a carboxy group, a sulfonamide group, a phosphonic acid group, a sulfonic acid group, a phenolic hydroxy group, and a sulfonylimide group. Among these, at least one acid group selected from the group consisting of a carboxy group and a phenolic hydroxy group is preferable.
 酸基を有する構成単位は、スチレン化合物に由来する構成単位、若しくはビニル化合物に由来する構成単位に酸基を導入した構成単位、又は(メタ)アクリル酸に由来する構成単位であることがより好ましい。 The structural unit having an acid group is more preferably a structural unit derived from a styrene compound, a structural unit obtained by introducing an acid group into a structural unit derived from a vinyl compound, or a structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid. .
 本開示において、酸基を有する構成単位は、1種単独で用いられてもよく、2種以上を組み合わせて用いられてもよい。 In the present disclosure, the structural unit having an acid group may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 重合体A中の酸基を有する構成単位の含有量は、重合体Aの全質量に対して、好ましくは0.1質量%~20質量%であり、より好ましくは0.5質量%~15質量%であり、特に好ましくは1質量%~10質量%である。酸基を有する構成単位の含有量が上記範囲であると、パターン形成性がより良好となる。なお、酸基を有する構成単位の含有量は、13C-NMR測定から常法により算出されるピーク強度の強度比により確認することができる。 The content of the structural unit having an acid group in the polymer A is preferably 0.1% by mass to 20% by mass, more preferably 0.5% by mass to 15% by mass with respect to the total mass of the polymer A. % By mass, particularly preferably 1% by mass to 10% by mass. When the content of the structural unit having an acid group is within the above range, the pattern formability is further improved. The content of the structural unit having an acid group can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity calculated by 13 C-NMR measurement by a conventional method.
-上記以外の構成単位-
 重合体Aは、本開示の感光性転写材料の効果を損なわない範囲において、上記した各構成単位以外の構成単位(以下、「構成単位Z」と称することがある。)をさらに含むことができる。構成単位Zの種類及び含有量の少なくともいずれか1つを調整することで、重合体Aの諸特性を調整することができる。特に、構成単位Zを適切に使用することで、重合体Aのガラス転移温度を容易に調整することができる。重合体Aのガラス転移温度を90℃以下とすることで、重合体Aを含有する感光性樹脂層は、転写性、仮支持体からの剥離性を良好なレベルに維持しつつ、パターン形成時の解像度及び感度がより良好となる。
-Other structural units-
The polymer A can further contain a constituent unit other than the constituent units described above (hereinafter, may be referred to as “constituent unit Z”) as long as the effects of the photosensitive transfer material of the present disclosure are not impaired. . Various characteristics of the polymer A can be adjusted by adjusting at least one of the type and content of the structural unit Z. In particular, the glass transition temperature of the polymer A can be easily adjusted by appropriately using the structural unit Z. By setting the glass transition temperature of the polymer A to 90 ° C. or lower, the photosensitive resin layer containing the polymer A can maintain the transferability and the peelability from the temporary support at a good level while forming a pattern. Better resolution and sensitivity.
 構成単位Zとしては、例えば、スチレン類、(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステル、(メタ)アクリル酸環状アルキルエステル、(メタ)アクリル酸アリールエステル、不飽和ジカルボン酸ジエステル、ビシクロ不飽和化合物、マレイミド化合物、不飽和芳香族化合物、共役ジエン系化合物、不飽和モノカルボン酸、不飽和ジカルボン酸、及び不飽和ジカルボン酸無水物を挙げることができる。構成単位Zとしては、具体的には、スチレン、tert-ブトキシスチレン、メチルスチレン、α-メチルスチレン、アセトキシスチレン、メトキシスチレン、エトキシスチレン、クロロスチレン、ビニル安息香酸メチル、ビニル安息香酸エチル、(メタ)アクリル酸メチル、(メタ)アクリル酸エチル、(メタ)アクリル酸n-プロピル、(メタ)アクリル酸イソプロピル、(メタ)アクリル酸2-ヒドロキシエチル、(メタ)アクリル酸2-ヒドロキシプロピル、(メタ)アクリル酸ベンジル、(メタ)アクリル酸イソボルニル、アクリロニトリル、エチレングリコールモノアセトアセテートモノ(メタ)アクリレート、又は(メタ)アクリル酸シクロヘキシルを重合して形成される構成単位を挙げることができる。その他、特開2004-264623号公報の段落0021~段落0024に記載の化合物を挙げることができる。 Examples of the structural unit Z include styrenes, (meth) acrylic acid alkyl esters, (meth) acrylic acid cyclic alkyl esters, (meth) acrylic acid aryl esters, unsaturated dicarboxylic acid diesters, bicyclounsaturated compounds, maleimide compounds, Mention may be made of unsaturated aromatic compounds, conjugated diene compounds, unsaturated monocarboxylic acids, unsaturated dicarboxylic acids, and unsaturated dicarboxylic acid anhydrides. Specific examples of the structural unit Z include styrene, tert-butoxystyrene, methylstyrene, α-methylstyrene, acetoxystyrene, methoxystyrene, ethoxystyrene, chlorostyrene, methyl vinylbenzoate, ethyl vinylbenzoate, (meta ) Methyl acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, n-propyl (meth) acrylate, isopropyl (meth) acrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, 2-hydroxypropyl (meth) acrylate, (meth And a structural unit formed by polymerizing benzyl acrylate, isobornyl (meth) acrylate, acrylonitrile, ethylene glycol monoacetoacetate mono (meth) acrylate, or cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate. In addition, the compounds described in paragraphs 0021 to 0024 of JP-A No. 2004-264623 can be given.
 構成単位Zとしては、芳香環を有する構成単位、又は脂肪族環式骨格を有する構成単位が、得られる転写材料の電気特性を向上させる観点で好ましい。このような、構成単位Zを形成するモノマーとして、具体的には、スチレン、tert-ブトキシスチレン、メチルスチレン、α-メチルスチレン、ジシクロペンタニル(メタ)アクリレート、シクロヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、イソボルニル(メタ)アクリレート、及びベンジル(メタ)アクリレートが挙げられる。これらの中でも、構成単位Zとしては、シクロヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート由来の構成単位が好ましい。 As the structural unit Z, a structural unit having an aromatic ring or a structural unit having an aliphatic cyclic skeleton is preferable from the viewpoint of improving the electrical characteristics of the obtained transfer material. Specific examples of the monomer that forms the structural unit Z include styrene, tert-butoxystyrene, methylstyrene, α-methylstyrene, dicyclopentanyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, and isobornyl ( Examples include meth) acrylate and benzyl (meth) acrylate. Among these, as the structural unit Z, a structural unit derived from cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate is preferable.
 また、構成単位Zを形成するモノマーとしては、例えば、(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステルが密着性の観点で好ましい。その中でも、炭素数が4~12のアルキル基を有する(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステルが密着性の観点でより好ましい。具体的には、(メタ)アクリル酸メチル、(メタ)アクリル酸エチル、(メタ)アクリル酸プロピル、(メタ)アクリル酸n-ブチル、及び(メタ)アクリル酸2-エチルヘキシルが挙げられる。 Further, as the monomer forming the structural unit Z, for example, (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester is preferable from the viewpoint of adhesion. Among them, (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester having an alkyl group having 4 to 12 carbon atoms is more preferable from the viewpoint of adhesion. Specific examples include methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, propyl (meth) acrylate, n-butyl (meth) acrylate, and 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate.
 本開示において、構成単位Zは、1種単独で用いられてもよく、2種以上を組み合わせて用いられてもよい。 In the present disclosure, the structural unit Z may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 重合体A中の構成単位Zの含有量の上限は、重合体Aの全質量に対して、好ましくは70質量%以下であり、より好ましくは60質量%以下であり、特に好ましくは50質量%以下である。構成単位Zの含有量の下限は、重合体Aの全質量に対して、0質量%以上でもよく、好ましくは1質量%以上であり、より好ましくは5質量%以上である。構成単位Zの含有量が上記範囲であると、解像度及び密着性がより向上する。なお、構成単位Zの含有量は、13C-NMR測定から常法により算出されるピーク強度の強度比により確認することができる。 The upper limit of the content of the structural unit Z in the polymer A is preferably 70% by mass or less, more preferably 60% by mass or less, and particularly preferably 50% by mass with respect to the total mass of the polymer A. It is as follows. The lower limit of the content of the structural unit Z may be 0% by mass or more with respect to the total mass of the polymer A, preferably 1% by mass or more, and more preferably 5% by mass or more. When the content of the structural unit Z is within the above range, the resolution and adhesion are further improved. The content of the structural unit Z can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of peak intensity calculated by 13 C-NMR measurement by a conventional method.
 以下、本開示における重合体Aの好ましい例を挙げるが、本開示は以下の例示に制限されない。なお、下記例示化合物における構成単位の比率、及び重量平均分子量は、好ましい物性を得るために適宜選択される。 Hereinafter, although the preferable example of the polymer A in this indication is given, this indication is not restrict | limited to the following illustrations. In addition, the ratio of the structural unit and the weight average molecular weight in the following exemplary compounds are appropriately selected in order to obtain preferable physical properties.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
 本開示において、重合体Aは、1種単独で用いられてもよく、2種以上を組み合わせて用いてもよい。 In the present disclosure, the polymer A may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 感光性樹脂層中の重合体Aの含有量は、被転写体に対して良好な密着性を発現させる観点から、感光性樹脂層の全質量に対して、好ましくは50質量%~99.9質量%であり、より好ましくは70質量%~98質量%である。 The content of the polymer A in the photosensitive resin layer is preferably 50% by mass to 99.9% with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer, from the viewpoint of developing good adhesion to the transfer target. % By mass, more preferably 70% by mass to 98% by mass.
(ガラス転移温度:Tg)
 重合体Aのガラス転移温度(Tg)は、90℃以下である。重合体Aのガラス転移温度が90℃以下であることによって、形状再現性、直線性、被転写体に対する感光性樹脂層の密着性が向上する。
(Glass transition temperature: Tg)
The glass transition temperature (Tg) of the polymer A is 90 ° C. or less. When the glass transition temperature of the polymer A is 90 ° C. or less, shape reproducibility, linearity, and adhesion of the photosensitive resin layer to the transfer target are improved.
 重合体Aのガラス転移温度(Tg)の上限は、形状再現性、直線性、及び被転写体に対する感光性樹脂層の密着性の観点から、好ましくは60℃以下であり、より好ましくは40℃以下である。
 重合体Aのガラス転移温度の下限は、制限されず、好ましくは-20℃以下であり、より好ましくは-10℃以上である。-20℃以上であることで、良好なパターン形成性が維持され、また、例えば、カバーフィルムを用いる場合、カバーフィルムを剥離する際の剥離性低下が抑制される。
The upper limit of the glass transition temperature (Tg) of the polymer A is preferably 60 ° C. or less, more preferably 40 ° C., from the viewpoints of shape reproducibility, linearity, and adhesion of the photosensitive resin layer to the transfer target. It is as follows.
The lower limit of the glass transition temperature of the polymer A is not limited, and is preferably −20 ° C. or lower, more preferably −10 ° C. or higher. When the temperature is −20 ° C. or higher, good pattern formability is maintained, and, for example, when a cover film is used, a decrease in peelability when the cover film is peeled is suppressed.
 重合体Aのガラス転移温度は、示差走査熱量測定(DSC)を用いて測定することができる。具体的な測定方法は、JIS K 7121(1987年)に記載の方法に順じて行うことができる。なお、本開示におけるガラス転移温度は、補外ガラス転移開始温度(以下、Tigと称することがある)を用いている。
 以下、重合体Aのガラス転移温度の測定方法をより具体的に説明する。
 ガラス転移温度を求める場合、予想される重合体AのTgより約50℃低い温度にて装置が安定するまで保持した後、加熱速度:20℃/分で、ガラス転移が終了した温度よりも約30℃高い温度まで加熱し,DTA曲線又はDSC曲線を描かせる。
 補外ガラス転移開始温度、すなわち、本開示におけるガラス転移温度は、DTA曲線又はDSC曲線における低温側のベースラインを高温側に延長した直線と、ガラス転移の階段状変化部分の曲線の勾配が最大になる点で引いた接線との交点の温度として求める。
The glass transition temperature of the polymer A can be measured using differential scanning calorimetry (DSC). A specific measuring method can be performed in accordance with the method described in JIS K 7121 (1987). The glass transition temperature in the present disclosure uses an extrapolated glass transition start temperature (hereinafter sometimes referred to as Tig).
Hereinafter, the measuring method of the glass transition temperature of the polymer A will be described more specifically.
When determining the glass transition temperature, after maintaining the apparatus at a temperature about 50 ° C. lower than the Tg of the expected polymer A until the apparatus is stabilized, the heating rate is about 20 ° C./minute, and is about the temperature at which the glass transition is completed. Heat to a temperature 30 ° C higher and draw a DTA or DSC curve.
The extrapolated glass transition start temperature, that is, the glass transition temperature in the present disclosure, has a maximum slope of a straight line obtained by extending the base line on the low temperature side in the DTA curve or DSC curve to the high temperature side and the curve of the stepped change portion of the glass transition. Calculated as the temperature of the intersection with the tangent drawn at the point.
 重合体Aのガラス転移温度を既述の好ましい範囲に調整する方法としては、例えば、FOX式を指針とする方法が挙げられる。FOX式によれば、目的とする重合体Aの各構成単位の単独重合体のガラス転移温度、及び各構成単位の質量比により、目的とする重合体Aのガラス転移温度を推定することが可能である。
 FOX式について、第1の構成単位と第2の構成単位とを含む重合体を例として、以下説明する。
 第1の構成単位の単独重合体のガラス転移温度をTg1、重合体における第1の構成単位の質量分率をW1とし、第2の構成単位の単独重合体のガラス転移温度をTg2とし、重合体における第2の構成単位の質量分率をW2とし、第1の構成単位と第2の構成単位とを含む重合体のガラス転移温度をTg0としたとき、Tg0は、以下のFOX式にしたがって推定することが可能である。なお、FOX式において用いられるガラス転移温度の単位は、ケルビン(K)である。
 FOX式:1/Tg0=(W1/Tg1)+(W2/Tg2)
 上記のとおり、FOX式を用いて、重合体Aに含まれる各構成単位の種類と質量分率とを調整して、所望のガラス転移温度を有する重合体を得ることができる。
 また、重合体Aの重量平均分子量を調整することにより、重合体Aのガラス転移温度を調整することも可能である。
Examples of a method for adjusting the glass transition temperature of the polymer A to the above-described preferable range include a method using the FOX formula as a guide. According to the FOX formula, the glass transition temperature of the target polymer A can be estimated from the glass transition temperature of the homopolymer of each constituent unit of the target polymer A and the mass ratio of each constituent unit. It is.
The FOX formula will be described below using a polymer containing a first structural unit and a second structural unit as an example.
The glass transition temperature of the homopolymer of the first structural unit is Tg1, the mass fraction of the first structural unit in the polymer is W1, the glass transition temperature of the homopolymer of the second structural unit is Tg2, When the mass fraction of the second structural unit in the coalescence is W2, and the glass transition temperature of the polymer containing the first structural unit and the second structural unit is Tg0, Tg0 is in accordance with the following FOX formula: It is possible to estimate. The unit of glass transition temperature used in the FOX formula is Kelvin (K).
FOX formula: 1 / Tg0 = (W1 / Tg1) + (W2 / Tg2)
As described above, a polymer having a desired glass transition temperature can be obtained by adjusting the type and mass fraction of each structural unit contained in the polymer A using the FOX formula.
It is also possible to adjust the glass transition temperature of the polymer A by adjusting the weight average molecular weight of the polymer A.
(重量平均分子量:Mw)
 重合体Aの重量平均分子量(Mw)は、ポリスチレン換算重量平均分子量で、好ましくは60,000以下であり、より好ましくは2,000~60,000以下であり、特に好ましくは3,000~50,000である。重合体Aの重量平均分子量が60,000以下であることで、感光性樹脂層の溶融粘度を低く抑え、被転写体と貼り合わせる際において低温(例えば、130℃以下)での貼り合わせを実現することができる。
(Weight average molecular weight: Mw)
The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the polymer A is a polystyrene equivalent weight average molecular weight, preferably 60,000 or less, more preferably 2,000 to 60,000, and particularly preferably 3,000 to 50. , 000. When the polymer A has a weight average molecular weight of 60,000 or less, the melt viscosity of the photosensitive resin layer is kept low, and bonding at a low temperature (for example, 130 ° C. or less) is realized when bonding to the transfer target. can do.
 重合体Aの重量平均分子量及び数平均分子量(Mn)は、ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィー(GPC)によって測定することができる。測定装置としては、様々な市販の装置を用いることができ、装置の内容、及び測定技術は同当業者に公知である。
 ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィ(GPC)による重量平均分子量の測定は、測定装置として、HLC(登録商標)-8220GPC(東ソー(株)製)を用い、カラムとして、TSKgel(登録商標)Super HZM-M(4.6mmID×15cm、東ソー(株)製)、Super HZ4000(4.6mmID×15cm、東ソー(株)製)、Super HZ3000(4.6mmID×15cm、東ソー(株)製)、及びSuper HZ2000(4.6mmID×15cm、東ソー(株)製)をそれぞれ1本、直列に連結したものを用い、溶離液として、THF(テトラヒドロフラン)を用いることができる。また、測定条件としては、試料濃度を0.2質量%、流速を0.35ml/min、サンプル注入量を10μL、及び測定温度を40℃とし、示差屈折率(RI)検出器を用いて行うことができる。検量線は、東ソー(株)製の「標準試料TSK standard,polystyrene」:「F-40」、「F-20」、「F-4」、「F-1」、「A-5000」、「A-2500」及び「A-1000」の7サンプルのいずれかを用いて作成できる。
The weight average molecular weight and number average molecular weight (Mn) of the polymer A can be measured by gel permeation chromatography (GPC). Various commercially available apparatuses can be used as the measuring apparatus, and the contents of the apparatus and measuring techniques are known to those skilled in the art.
For the measurement of the weight average molecular weight by gel permeation chromatography (GPC), HLC (registered trademark) -8220GPC (manufactured by Tosoh Corp.) was used as a measuring device, and TSKgel (registered trademark) Super HZM-M (4 .6 mmID × 15 cm, manufactured by Tosoh Corporation), Super HZ4000 (4.6 mmID × 15 cm, manufactured by Tosoh Corporation), Super HZ3000 (4.6 mmID × 15 cm, manufactured by Tosoh Corporation), and Super HZ2000 (4. 6 mm ID × 15 cm, manufactured by Tosoh Corporation), one each connected in series, and THF (tetrahydrofuran) can be used as an eluent. Further, the measurement conditions are as follows: the sample concentration is 0.2% by mass, the flow rate is 0.35 ml / min, the sample injection amount is 10 μL, the measurement temperature is 40 ° C., and a differential refractive index (RI) detector is used. be able to. The calibration curve is “Standard sample TSK standard, polystyrene” manufactured by Tosoh Corporation: “F-40”, “F-20”, “F-4”, “F-1”, “A-5000”, “ It can be created using any of the seven samples “A-2500” and “A-1000”.
 重合体Aの数平均分子量と重量平均分子量との比(分散度、Mw/Mn)は、好ましくは1.0~5.0であり、より好ましくは1.05~3.5である。 The ratio (dispersity, Mw / Mn) of the number average molecular weight and the weight average molecular weight of the polymer A is preferably 1.0 to 5.0, more preferably 1.05 to 3.5.
(重合体の製造方法)
 重合体Aの製造方法は、制限されず、上記の各構成単位を形成するための重合性モノマーを、公知の手法に基づいて重合することにより重合体Aを合成することができる。例えば、酸基が酸分解性基で保護された基を有する構成単位を形成するための重合性モノマー、更に必要に応じて、構成単位Zを形成するための重合性モノマーを含む有機溶剤中、重合開始剤を用いて重合することにより合成することができる。また、いわゆる高分子反応で合成することもできる。
(Method for producing polymer)
The manufacturing method of the polymer A is not restrict | limited, The polymer A can be synthesize | combined by superposing | polymerizing the polymerizable monomer for forming each said structural unit based on a well-known method. For example, in an organic solvent containing a polymerizable monomer for forming a structural unit having a group in which an acid group is protected with an acid-decomposable group, and further, if necessary, a polymerizable monomer for forming the structural unit Z, It can synthesize | combine by superposing | polymerizing using a polymerization initiator. It can also be synthesized by a so-called polymer reaction.
〔光酸発生剤〕
 本開示における感光性樹脂層は、光酸発生剤を含有する。
[Photoacid generator]
The photosensitive resin layer in the present disclosure contains a photoacid generator.
 光酸発生剤としては、紫外線、遠紫外線、X線、荷電粒子線などの放射線を照射することにより酸を発生することができる化合物であれば制限されず、公知の光酸発生剤を用いることができる。 The photoacid generator is not limited as long as it is a compound capable of generating an acid by irradiation with radiation such as ultraviolet rays, far ultraviolet rays, X-rays, and charged particle beams, and a known photoacid generator is used. Can do.
 光酸発生剤としては、波長300nm以上、好ましくは波長300nm~450nmの活性光線に感応し、酸を発生する化合物が好ましいが、その化学構造は制限されない。また、波長300nm以上の活性光線に直接感応しない光酸発生剤についても、増感剤と併用することによって波長300nm以上の活性光線に感応し、酸を発生する化合物であれば、増感剤と組み合わせて好ましく用いることができる。 As the photoacid generator, a compound that reacts with actinic rays having a wavelength of 300 nm or more, preferably 300 nm to 450 nm and generates an acid is preferable, but its chemical structure is not limited. Further, a photoacid generator that is not directly sensitive to an actinic ray having a wavelength of 300 nm or more can also be used as a sensitizer if it is a compound that reacts with an actinic ray having a wavelength of 300 nm or more and generates an acid when used in combination with a sensitizer. It can be preferably used in combination.
 光酸発生剤としては、pKaが4以下の酸を発生する光酸発生剤が好ましく、pKaが3以下の酸を発生する光酸発生剤がより好ましく、pKaが2以下の酸を発生する光酸発生剤が特に好ましい。pKaの下限値は特に定めないが、例えば、-10以上であることが好ましい。 The photoacid generator is preferably a photoacid generator that generates an acid having a pKa of 4 or less, more preferably a photoacid generator that generates an acid having a pKa of 3 or less, and a light that generates an acid having a pKa of 2 or less. Acid generators are particularly preferred. The lower limit value of pKa is not particularly defined, but is preferably −10 or more, for example.
 光酸発生剤としては、例えば、イオン性光酸発生剤、及び非イオン性光酸発生剤が挙げられ、光酸発生剤としては、感度及び解像度の観点から、後述するオニウム塩化合物、及び、後述するオキシムスルホネート化合物よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の化合物を含むことが好ましく、オキシムスルホネート化合物を含むことがより好ましい。 Examples of the photoacid generator include an ionic photoacid generator and a nonionic photoacid generator. As the photoacid generator, from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution, an onium salt compound described later, and It is preferable to include at least one compound selected from the group consisting of oxime sulfonate compounds described below, and more preferable to include oxime sulfonate compounds.
 非イオン性光酸発生剤としては、例えば、トリクロロメチル-s-トリアジン類、ジアゾメタン化合物、イミドスルホネート化合物、及びオキシムスルホネート化合物が挙げられる。これらの中でも、感度、解像度、及び密着性の観点から、オキシムスルホネート化合物が好ましい。トリクロロメチル-s-トリアジン類、及び、ジアゾメタン誘導体の具体例としては、特開2011-221494号公報の段落0083~段落0088に記載の化合物が例示できる。 Examples of the nonionic photoacid generator include trichloromethyl-s-triazines, diazomethane compounds, imide sulfonate compounds, and oxime sulfonate compounds. Among these, an oxime sulfonate compound is preferable from the viewpoints of sensitivity, resolution, and adhesion. Specific examples of trichloromethyl-s-triazines and diazomethane derivatives include the compounds described in paragraphs 0083 to 0088 of JP 2011-212494A.
 オキシムスルホネート化合物としては、下記式(L1)で表される化合物が好ましい。 As the oxime sulfonate compound, a compound represented by the following formula (L1) is preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
 式(L1)中、R21は、アルキル基、又はアリール基を表し、*は、他の原子、又は他の基との結合部位を表す。式(L1)で表されるオキシムスルホネート構造を有する化合物は、いずれの基も置換されてもよい。R21で表されるアルキル基は、直鎖状のアルキル基でもよく、分岐状のアルキル基でもよく、環状のアルキル基でもよい。また、R21で表されるアルキル基は、好ましくは、炭素数が1~10の、直鎖状又は分岐状のアルキル基が好ましい。R21で表されるアルキル基は、炭素数が6~11のアリール基、炭素数が1~10のアルコキシ基、シクロアルキル基、又は、ハロゲン原子で置換されてもよい。ここで、シクロアルキル基は、例えば、7,7-ジメチル-2-オキソノルボルニル基などの有橋式脂環基を含む。シクロアルキル基は、好ましくはビシクロアルキル基である。 In Formula (L1), R 21 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, and * represents a bonding site with another atom or another group. In the compound having an oxime sulfonate structure represented by the formula (L1), any group may be substituted. The alkyl group represented by R 21 may be a linear alkyl group, a branched alkyl group, or a cyclic alkyl group. The alkyl group represented by R 21 is preferably a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms. The alkyl group represented by R 21 may be substituted with an aryl group having 6 to 11 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, a cycloalkyl group, or a halogen atom. Here, the cycloalkyl group includes a bridged alicyclic group such as a 7,7-dimethyl-2-oxonorbornyl group. The cycloalkyl group is preferably a bicycloalkyl group.
 R21で表されるアリール基は、好ましくは炭素数6~18のアリール基であり、より好ましくはフェニル基、又はナフチル基である。
 R21で表されるアリール基は、炭素数1~4のアルキル基、炭素数1~4のアルコキシ基、及びハロゲン原子よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種の基で置換されてもよい。
The aryl group represented by R 21 is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 18 carbon atoms, more preferably a phenyl group or a naphthyl group.
The aryl group represented by R 21 may be substituted with at least one group selected from the group consisting of an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and a halogen atom.
 式(L1)で表される化合物は、下記式(L2)で表される化合物であることも好ましい。 The compound represented by the formula (L1) is also preferably a compound represented by the following formula (L2).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
 式(L2)中、R42は、アルキル基、又はアリール基を表し、X10は、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、又はハロゲン原子を表し、m4は、0~3の整数を表し、m4が2又は3であるとき、複数のX10は同一でも異なっていてもよい。 In the formula (L2), R 42 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, X 10 represents an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, or a halogen atom, m4 represents an integer of 0 to 3, and m4 represents 2 or When X is 3, the plurality of X 10 may be the same or different.
 X10で表されるアルキル基は、好ましくは、炭素数1~4の、直鎖状又は分岐状のアルキル基である。X10で表されるアルコキシ基は、好ましくは、炭素数1~4の、直鎖状又は分岐状アルコキシ基である。X10で表されるハロゲン原子は、好ましくは、塩素原子、又はフッ素原子である。m4は、好ましくは0又は1である。式(L2)中、m4が1であり、X10がメチル基であり、X10の置換位置がオルト位であり、R42が炭素数1~10の直鎖状アルキル基、7,7-ジメチル-2-オキソノルボルニルメチル基、又はp-トルイル基である化合物が特に好ましい。 The alkyl group represented by X 10 is preferably a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms. The alkoxy group represented by X 10 is preferably a linear or branched alkoxy group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms. The halogen atom represented by X 10 is preferably a chlorine atom or a fluorine atom. m4 is preferably 0 or 1. In the formula (L2), m4 is 1, X 10 is a methyl group, the substitution position of X 10 is an ortho position, R 42 is a linear alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, 7,7- A compound that is a dimethyl-2-oxonorbornylmethyl group or a p-toluyl group is particularly preferred.
 式(L1)で表される化合物は、下記式(L3)で表される化合物であることも好ましい。 The compound represented by the formula (L1) is also preferably a compound represented by the following formula (L3).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
 式(L3)中、R43は、アルキル基、又はアリール基を表し、X11は、ハロゲン原子、ヒドロキシ基、炭素数が1~4のアルキル基、炭素数が1~4のアルコキシ基、シアノ基又はニトロ基を表し、n4は、0~5の整数を表す。 In the formula (L3), R 43 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, X 11 represents a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, cyano Represents a group or a nitro group, and n4 represents an integer of 0 to 5.
 式(L3)中、R43は、好ましくは、メチル基、エチル基、n-プロピル基、n-ブチル基、n-オクチル基、トリフルオロメチル基、ペンタフルオロエチル基、パーフルオロ-n-プロピル基、パーフルオロ-n-ブチル基、p-トリル基、4-クロロフェニル基、又はペンタフルオロフェニル基であり、より好ましくは、n-オクチル基である。
 式(L3)中、X11は、好ましくは炭素数1~5のアルコキシ基であり、より好ましくはメトキシ基である。
 式(L3)中、n4は、好ましくは0~2の整数であり、より好ましくは0又は1である。
In the formula (L3), R 43 is preferably a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl group, an n-butyl group, an n-octyl group, a trifluoromethyl group, a pentafluoroethyl group, or perfluoro-n-propyl. Group, perfluoro-n-butyl group, p-tolyl group, 4-chlorophenyl group, or pentafluorophenyl group, more preferably n-octyl group.
In the formula (L3), X 11 is preferably an alkoxy group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, more preferably a methoxy group.
In the formula (L3), n4 is preferably an integer of 0 to 2, more preferably 0 or 1.
 式(L3)で表される化合物としては、例えば、α-(メチルスルホニルオキシイミノ)ベンジルシアニド、α-(エチルスルホニルオキシイミノ)ベンジルシアニド、α-(n-プロピルスルホニルオキシイミノ)ベンジルシアニド、α-(n-ブチルスルホニルオキシイミノ)ベンジルシアニド、α-(4-トルエンスルホニルオキシイミノ)ベンジルシアニド、α-〔(メチルスルホニルオキシイミノ)-4-メトキシフェニル〕アセトニトリル、α-〔(エチルスルホニルオキシイミノ)-4-メトキシフェニル〕アセトニトリル、α-〔(n-プロピルスルホニルオキシイミノ)-4-メトキシフェニル〕アセトニトリル、α-〔(n-ブチルスルホニルオキシイミノ)-4-メトキシフェニル〕アセトニトリル、及びα-〔(4-トルエンスルホニルオキシイミノ)-4-メトキシフェニル〕アセトニトリルが挙げられる。 Examples of the compound represented by the formula (L3) include α- (methylsulfonyloxyimino) benzyl cyanide, α- (ethylsulfonyloxyimino) benzyl cyanide, α- (n-propylsulfonyloxyimino) benzyl cyanide. Nido, α- (n-butylsulfonyloxyimino) benzyl cyanide, α- (4-toluenesulfonyloxyimino) benzyl cyanide, α-[(methylsulfonyloxyimino) -4-methoxyphenyl] acetonitrile, α- [ (Ethylsulfonyloxyimino) -4-methoxyphenyl] acetonitrile, α-[(n-propylsulfonyloxyimino) -4-methoxyphenyl] acetonitrile, α-[(n-butylsulfonyloxyimino) -4-methoxyphenyl] Acetonitrile, and α-[(4-to En sulfonyl) -4-methoxyphenyl] include acetonitrile.
 好ましいオキシムスルホネート化合物の具体例としては、下記化合物(i)~(viii)などが挙げられ、1種単独で用いられてもよく、2種以上を組み合わせて用いてもよい。化合物(i)~(viii)は、市販品として、入手することができる。また、他の種類の光酸発生剤と組み合わせて使用することもできる。 Specific examples of preferable oxime sulfonate compounds include the following compounds (i) to (viii), and the like may be used alone or in combination of two or more. Compounds (i) to (viii) can be obtained as commercial products. It can also be used in combination with other types of photoacid generators.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
 式(L1)で表される化合物としては、下記式(OS-1)で表される化合物であることも好ましい。 The compound represented by the formula (L1) is also preferably a compound represented by the following formula (OS-1).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
 式(OS-1)中、R411は、水素原子、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アルコキシ基、アルコキシカルボニル基、アシル基、カルバモイル基、スルファモイル基、スルホ基、シアノ基、アリール基、又はヘテロアリール基を表す。
 式(OS-1)中、R412は、アルキル基、又は、アリール基を表す。
 式(OS-1)中、X401は、-O-、-S-、-NH-、-NR415-、-CH-、-CR416H-、又は-CR415417-を表す。
 式(OS-1)中、R415~R417は、それぞれ独立して、アルキル基、又はアリール基を表す。
 式(OS-1)中、R421~R424は、それぞれ独立して、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アルコキシ基、アミノ基、アルコキシカルボニル基、アルキルカルボニル基、アリールカルボニル基、アミド基、スルホ基、シアノ基、又はアリール基を表す。R421~R424のうち2つは、それぞれ互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。
 式(OS-1)中、R421~R424は、それぞれ独立して、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、又はアルキル基であることが好ましく、水素原子であることがより好ましい。また、R421~R424のうち少なくとも2つが互いに結合してアリール基を形成する態様も好ましい。
In the formula (OS-1), R 411 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an acyl group, a carbamoyl group, a sulfamoyl group, a sulfo group, a cyano group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group Represents.
In formula (OS-1), R 412 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group.
In the formula (OS-1), X 401 represents —O—, —S—, —NH—, —NR 415 —, —CH 2 —, —CR 416 H—, or —CR 415 R 417 —.
In formula (OS-1), R 415 to R 417 each independently represents an alkyl group or an aryl group.
In the formula (OS-1), R 421 to R 424 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkoxy group, an amino group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an alkylcarbonyl group, an arylcarbonyl group, An amide group, a sulfo group, a cyano group, or an aryl group is represented. Two of R 421 to R 424 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
In the formula (OS-1), R 421 to R 424 are preferably each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, or an alkyl group, and more preferably a hydrogen atom. An embodiment in which at least two of R 421 to R 424 are bonded to each other to form an aryl group is also preferable.
 式(OS-1)で表される化合物の好適な具体例としては、特開2011-221494号公報の段落0128~段落0132に記載の化合物(例示化合物b-1~b-34)が挙げられるが、これらに制限されない。 Preferable specific examples of the compound represented by the formula (OS-1) include compounds described in paragraphs 0128 to 0132 of JP2011-212494A (exemplary compounds b-1 to b-34). However, it is not limited to these.
 式(L1)で表される化合物としては、下記の、式(OS-3)で表される化合物、式(OS-4)で表される化合物、又は式(OS-5)で表される化合物であることが好ましい。 As the compound represented by the formula (L1), the compound represented by the following formula (OS-3), the compound represented by the formula (OS-4), or the formula (OS-5) A compound is preferred.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
 式(OS-3)~式(OS-5)中、R22、R25、及びR28は、それぞれ独立して、アルキル基、アリール基、又はヘテロアリール基を表し、R23、R26、及びR29は、それぞれ独立して、水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基、又はハロゲン原子を表し、R24、R27、及びR30は、それぞれ独立して、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アルキルオキシ基、スルホン酸基、アミノスルホニル基、又はアルコキシスルホニル基を表し、X~Xは、それぞれ独立して、酸素原子、又は硫黄原子を表し、n1~n3は、それぞれ独立して、1又は2を表し、m1~m3は、それぞれ独立して、0~6の整数を表す。 In the formulas (OS-3) to (OS-5), R 22 , R 25 , and R 28 each independently represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group, and R 23 , R 26 , And R 29 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a halogen atom, and R 24 , R 27 , and R 30 each independently represent a halogen atom, an alkyl group, or an alkyloxy group. Represents a sulfonic acid group, an aminosulfonyl group or an alkoxysulfonyl group, X 1 to X 3 each independently represents an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, and n1 to n3 each independently represents 1 or 2 M1 to m3 each independently represents an integer of 0 to 6.
 式(OS-3)~式(OS-5)中、R22、R25、及びR28で表されるアルキル基、アリール基、又はヘテロアリール基は、置換基を有していてもよい。 In formulas (OS-3) to (OS-5), the alkyl group, aryl group, or heteroaryl group represented by R 22 , R 25 , and R 28 may have a substituent.
 式(OS-3)~式(OS-5)中、R22、R25、及びR28におけるアルキル基は、好ましくは炭素数が1~30のアルキル基である。
 また、式(OS-3)~式(OS-5)中、R22、R25、及びR28で表されるアリール基は、好ましくは炭素数が6~30のアリール基である。
 また、式(OS-3)~式(OS-5)中、R22、R25、及びR28で表されるヘテロアリール基は、好ましくは炭素数が4~30のヘテロアリール基である。式(OS-3)~式(OS-5)中、R22、R25、及びR28で表されるヘテロアリール基は、少なくとも1つの環が複素芳香環であればよく、例えば、複素芳香環とベンゼン環とが縮環していてもよい。
In formulas (OS-3) to (OS-5), the alkyl group in R 22 , R 25 and R 28 is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms.
In the formulas (OS-3) to (OS-5), the aryl group represented by R 22 , R 25 , and R 28 is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms.
In the formulas (OS-3) to (OS-5), the heteroaryl group represented by R 22 , R 25 and R 28 is preferably a heteroaryl group having 4 to 30 carbon atoms. In the formulas (OS-3) to (OS-5), the heteroaryl group represented by R 22 , R 25 , and R 28 suffices if at least one ring is a heteroaromatic ring. The ring and the benzene ring may be condensed.
 式(OS-3)~式(OS-5)中、R23、R26、及びR29は、それぞれ独立して、水素原子、アルキル基又はアリール基であることが好ましく、水素原子又はアルキル基であることがより好ましい。 In formulas (OS-3) to (OS-5), R 23 , R 26 and R 29 are each independently preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, and a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group It is more preferable that
 式(OS-3)~式(OS-5)において、各化合物中に2以上存在するR23、R26及びR29のうち、1つ又は2つがアルキル基、アリール基又はハロゲン原子であることが好ましく、1つがアルキル基、アリール基又はハロゲン原子であることがより好ましく、1つがアルキル基であり、かつ残りが水素原子であることが特に好ましい。 In Formula (OS-3) to Formula (OS-5), one or two of R 23 , R 26 and R 29 present in each compound are an alkyl group, an aryl group or a halogen atom. It is more preferable that one is an alkyl group, an aryl group or a halogen atom, and it is particularly preferable that one is an alkyl group and the rest is a hydrogen atom.
 R23、R26、及びR29で表されるアルキル基は、好ましくは炭素数が1~12のアルキル基であり、より好ましくは炭素数が1~6のアルキル基である。 The alkyl group represented by R 23 , R 26 and R 29 is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
 R23、R26、及びR29で表されるアリール基は、好ましくは炭素数6~30のアリール基である。 The aryl group represented by R 23 , R 26 and R 29 is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms.
 式(OS-3)~式(OS-5)中、X~Xは、それぞれ独立して、O又はSを表し、好ましくはOである。
 式(OS-3)~式(OS-5)において、X~Xを環員として含む環は、5員環又は6員環である。
In the formulas (OS-3) to (OS-5), X 1 to X 3 each independently represents O or S, preferably O.
In formulas (OS-3) to (OS-5), the ring containing X 1 to X 3 as a ring member is a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring.
 式(OS-3)~式(OS-5)中、n~nは、それぞれ独立して、1又は2を表し、X1~X3がOである場合、n1~n3は、それぞれ独立して、1であることが好ましく、また、X1~X3がSである場合、n1~n3は、それぞれ独立して、2であることが好ましい。 In formulas (OS-3) to (OS-5), n 1 to n 3 each independently represents 1 or 2, and when X1 to X3 are O, n1 to n3 are each independently In addition, when X1 to X3 are S, it is preferable that n1 to n3 are each independently 2.
 式(OS-3)~式(OS-5)中、R24、R27、及びR30は、それぞれ独立して、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アルキルオキシ基、スルホン酸基、アミノスルホニル基、又はアルコキシスルホニル基を表す。その中でも、R24、R27、及びR30は、それぞれ独立して、アルキル基、又はアルキルオキシ基であることが好ましい。R24、R27、及びR30で表されるアルキル基、アルキルオキシ基、スルホン酸基、アミノスルホニル基、及びアルコキシスルホニル基は、置換基を有していてもよい。 In formulas (OS-3) to (OS-5), R 24 , R 27 , and R 30 each independently represent a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkyloxy group, a sulfonic acid group, an aminosulfonyl group, or Represents an alkoxysulfonyl group. Among these, R 24 , R 27 , and R 30 are preferably each independently an alkyl group or an alkyloxy group. The alkyl group, alkyloxy group, sulfonic acid group, aminosulfonyl group, and alkoxysulfonyl group represented by R 24 , R 27 , and R 30 may have a substituent.
 式(OS-3)~式(OS-5)中、R24、R27、及びR30で表されるアルキル基は、好ましくは炭素数が1~30のアルキル基である。 In the formulas (OS-3) to (OS-5), the alkyl group represented by R 24 , R 27 , and R 30 is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms.
 式(OS-3)~式(OS-5)中、R24、R27、及びR30で表されるアルキルオキシ基は、好ましくは炭素数が1~30のアルキルオキシ基である。 In formulas (OS-3) to (OS-5), the alkyloxy groups represented by R 24 , R 27 and R 30 are preferably alkyloxy groups having 1 to 30 carbon atoms.
 また、式(OS-3)~式(OS-5)中、m1~m3は、それぞれ独立して、0~6の整数を表し、好ましくは0~2の整数であり、より好ましくは0又は1であり、特に好ましくは0である。
 また、式(OS-3)~式(OS-5)のそれぞれの置換基について、特開2011-221494号公報の段落0092~段落0109に記載の式(OS-3)~式(OS-5)の置換基の好ましい範囲も同様に好ましい。
In the formulas (OS-3) to (OS-5), m1 to m3 each independently represents an integer of 0 to 6, preferably an integer of 0 to 2, more preferably 0 or 1, particularly preferably 0.
Further, with respect to the substituents of the formulas (OS-3) to (OS-5), the formulas (OS-3) to (OS-5) described in paragraphs 0092 to 0109 of JP2011-221494A are disclosed. The preferred range of substituents of
 また、式(L1)で表されるオキシムスルホネート構造を含有する化合物は、下記式(OS-6)~式(OS-11)のいずれかで表されるオキシムスルホネート化合物であることが特に好ましい。 The compound containing an oxime sulfonate structure represented by the formula (L1) is particularly preferably an oxime sulfonate compound represented by any of the following formulas (OS-6) to (OS-11).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
 式(OS-6)~式(OS-11)中、R301~R306は、それぞれ独立して、アルキル基、アリール基、又はヘテロアリール基を表し、R307は、水素原子、又は臭素原子を表し、R308~R310、R313、R316、及びR318は、それぞれ独立して、水素原子、炭素数が1~8のアルキル基、ハロゲン原子、クロロメチル基、ブロモメチル基、ブロモエチル基、メトキシメチル基、フェニル基、又はクロロフェニル基を表し、R311、及びR314は、それぞれ独立して、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、メチル基、又はメトキシ基を表し、R312、R315、R317、及びR319は、それぞれ独立して、水素原子、又はメチル基を表す。 In the formulas (OS-6) to (OS-11), R 301 to R 306 each independently represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group, and R 307 represents a hydrogen atom or a bromine atom R 308 to R 310 , R 313 , R 316 , and R 318 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, a halogen atom, a chloromethyl group, a bromomethyl group, or a bromoethyl group. , A methoxymethyl group, a phenyl group, or a chlorophenyl group, R 311 and R 314 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a methyl group, or a methoxy group, and R 312 , R 315 , R 317 And R 319 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
 式(OS-6)~式(OS-11)における好ましい範囲は、特開2011-221494号公報の段落0110~段落0112に記載される(OS-6)~(OS-11)の好ましい範囲と同様である。 Preferred ranges in the formulas (OS-6) to (OS-11) are the preferred ranges of (OS-6) to (OS-11) described in paragraphs 0110 to 0112 of JP2011-221494A. It is the same.
 式(OS-3)~式(OS-5)で表されるオキシムスルホネート化合物の具体例としては、特開2011-221494号公報の段落0114~段落0120に記載の化合物が挙げられるが、本実施形態は、これらに制限されない。 Specific examples of the oxime sulfonate compounds represented by the formulas (OS-3) to (OS-5) include the compounds described in paragraphs 0114 to 0120 of JP2011-221494A. The form is not limited to these.
 イオン性光酸発生剤としては、例えば、ジアリールヨードニウム塩類及びトリアリールスルホニウム塩類等のオニウム塩化合物、並びに第四級アンモニウム塩類を挙げることができる。これらのうち、オニウム塩化合物が好ましく、トリアリールスルホニウム塩類及びジアリールヨードニウム塩類がより好ましい。 Examples of the ionic photoacid generator include onium salt compounds such as diaryliodonium salts and triarylsulfonium salts, and quaternary ammonium salts. Of these, onium salt compounds are preferable, and triarylsulfonium salts and diaryliodonium salts are more preferable.
 イオン性光酸発生剤としては特開2014-85643号公報の段落0114~0133に記載のイオン性光酸発生剤も好ましく用いることができる。 As the ionic photoacid generator, ionic photoacid generators described in paragraphs 0114 to 0133 of JP-A-2014-85643 can also be preferably used.
 本開示において、光酸発生剤は、1種単独で用いられてもよく、2種以上を組み合わせて用いられてもよい。
 感光性樹脂層における光酸発生剤の含有量は、感度、及び解像度の観点から、感光性樹脂層の全質量に対して、好ましくは0.1質量%~10質量%であり、より好ましくは0.5質量%~5質量%である。
In the present disclosure, the photoacid generator may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The content of the photoacid generator in the photosensitive resin layer is preferably from 0.1% by mass to 10% by mass, more preferably from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution, based on the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer. 0.5 mass% to 5 mass%.
〔その他の重合体〕
 本開示における感光性樹脂層は、本開示の感光性転写材料の効果を損なわない範囲において、酸基が酸分解性基で保護された基を有する構成単位を含まない重合体(以下、「その他の重合体」と称することがある。)をさらに含有することができる。
[Other polymers]
The photosensitive resin layer in the present disclosure is a polymer that does not contain a structural unit having a group in which an acid group is protected by an acid-decomposable group, as long as the effect of the photosensitive transfer material of the present disclosure is not impaired. It may be referred to as a “polymer of”).
 その他の重合体に含まれる構成単位は、酸基が酸分解性基で保護された基を有する構成単位以外の構成単位であれば制限されず、例えば、pKaHが3以上の基を有する構成単位、酸基を有する構成単位などを含むことができる。 The structural unit contained in the other polymer is not limited as long as the structural unit is a structural unit other than the structural unit having an acid group protected by an acid-decomposable group. For example, the structural unit having a pKaH of 3 or more. And a structural unit having an acid group.
 その他の重合体として、例えば、ポリヒドロキシスチレンを用いることができる。市販品としては、SMA 1000P、SMA 2000P、SMA 3000P、SMA 1440F、SMA 17352P、SMA 2625P、及びSMA 3840F(以上、サートマー社製)、ARUFON UC-3000、ARUFON UC-3510、ARUFON UC-3900、ARUFON UC-3910、ARUFON UC-3920、及びARUFON UC-3080(以上、東亞合成(株)製)、並びにJoncryl 690、Joncryl 678、Joncryl 67、及びJoncryl 586(以上、BASF社製)を用いることもできる。 As another polymer, for example, polyhydroxystyrene can be used. Commercially available products include SMA 1000P, SMA 2000P, SMA 3000P, SMA 1440F, SMA 17352P, SMA 2625P, and SMA 3840F (above, manufactured by Sartomer), ARUFON UC-3000, ARUFON UC-3510, ARUFON UC-3900, ARUFON. UC-3910, ARUFON UC-3920, and ARUFON UC-3080 (above, manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.), Joncry 690, Joncry 678, Joncry 67, and Joncry 586 (above, BASF) can also be used. .
 本開示において、その他の重合体は、1種単独で用いられてもよく、2種以上を組み合わせて用いられてもよい。 In the present disclosure, other polymers may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 感光性樹脂層がその他の重合体を含む場合、その他の重合体の含有量は、重合体Aの全質量及びその他の重合体の全質量の合計に対して、好ましくは50質量%以下であり、より好ましくは30質量%以下であり、特に好ましくは20質量%以下である。 When the photosensitive resin layer contains another polymer, the content of the other polymer is preferably 50% by mass or less with respect to the total mass of the polymer A and the total mass of the other polymer. More preferably, it is 30 mass% or less, Most preferably, it is 20 mass% or less.
〔その他の成分〕
(ベンゾトリアゾール化合物以外のアミン化合物)
 本開示における感光性樹脂層は、ベンゾトリアゾール化合物以外のアミン化合物(以下、「アミン化合物」と称することがある。)をさらに含有することができる。
[Other ingredients]
(Amine compounds other than benzotriazole compounds)
The photosensitive resin layer in the present disclosure may further contain an amine compound other than the benzotriazole compound (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “amine compound”).
 アミン化合物は、ベンゾトリアゾール骨格を有しないアミン化合物であれば制限されず、公知のアミン化合物を用いることができる。アミン化合物としては、例えば、トリメチルアミン、ジエチルアミン、トリエチルアミン、トリオクチルアミン、ジ-n-プロピルアミン、トリ-n-プロピルアミン、ジ-n-ペンチルアミン、トリ-n-ペンチルアミン、ジエタノールアミン、トリエタノールアミン、ジシクロヘキシルアミン、ジシクロヘキシルメチルアミン、ピリジン、2-メチルピリジン、4-メチルピリジン、2-エチルピリジン、4-エチルピリジン、2-フェニルピリジン、4-フェニルピリジン、N-メチル-4-フェニルピリジン、4-ジメチルアミノピリジン、イミダゾール、ベンズイミダゾール、4-メチルイミダゾール、2-フェニルベンズイミダゾール、2,4,5-トリフェニルイミダゾール、ニコチン、ニコチン酸、ニコチン酸アミド、キノリン、8-オキシキノリン、ピラジン、ピラゾール、ピリダジン、プリン、ピロリジン、ピペリジン、ピペラジン、モルホリン、4-メチルモルホリン、1,5-ジアザビシクロ[4.3.0]-5-ノネン、1,8-ジアザビシクロ[5.3.0]-7-ウンデセン、1,3-ジメチルチオウレア、トリメチルチオウレア、1,3-ジシクロヘキシルチオウレア、及び1-シクロヘキシル-3-(2-モルフォリノエチル)チオウレアが挙げられる。 The amine compound is not limited as long as it does not have a benzotriazole skeleton, and a known amine compound can be used. Examples of amine compounds include trimethylamine, diethylamine, triethylamine, trioctylamine, di-n-propylamine, tri-n-propylamine, di-n-pentylamine, tri-n-pentylamine, diethanolamine, triethanolamine. , Dicyclohexylamine, dicyclohexylmethylamine, pyridine, 2-methylpyridine, 4-methylpyridine, 2-ethylpyridine, 4-ethylpyridine, 2-phenylpyridine, 4-phenylpyridine, N-methyl-4-phenylpyridine, 4 -Dimethylaminopyridine, imidazole, benzimidazole, 4-methylimidazole, 2-phenylbenzimidazole, 2,4,5-triphenylimidazole, nicotine, nicotinic acid, nicotinamide, quino , 8-oxyquinoline, pyrazine, pyrazole, pyridazine, purine, pyrrolidine, piperidine, piperazine, morpholine, 4-methylmorpholine, 1,5-diazabicyclo [4.3.0] -5-nonene, 1,8-diazabicyclo [5.3.0] -7-undecene, 1,3-dimethylthiourea, trimethylthiourea, 1,3-dicyclohexylthiourea, and 1-cyclohexyl-3- (2-morpholinoethyl) thiourea.
 アミン化合物は、好ましくは、脂肪族アミン、及び芳香族アミンから選択された少なくとも1種の化合物であり、より好ましくは、脂肪族アミンである。脂肪族アミンは、好ましくは、炭素数が1~30の脂肪族アミンであり、より好ましくは、炭素数が10~30の脂肪族アミンであり、特に好ましくは、炭素数が10~30の第二級アミン、及び炭素数が10~30の第三級の脂肪族アミンから選ばれる少なくとも1種のアミンである。脂肪族アミン、及び芳香族アミンは、炭素原子及び窒素原子以外の他の原子、例えば、酸素原子、又は硫黄原子を含んでもよい。脂肪族アミンは、鎖状のアミン化合物であってもよく、環状のアミン化合物であってもよい。 The amine compound is preferably at least one compound selected from an aliphatic amine and an aromatic amine, and more preferably an aliphatic amine. The aliphatic amine is preferably an aliphatic amine having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably an aliphatic amine having 10 to 30 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably an aliphatic amine having 10 to 30 carbon atoms. It is at least one amine selected from secondary amines and tertiary aliphatic amines having 10 to 30 carbon atoms. Aliphatic amines and aromatic amines may contain atoms other than carbon and nitrogen atoms, for example, oxygen atoms or sulfur atoms. The aliphatic amine may be a chain amine compound or a cyclic amine compound.
 本開示において、アミン化合物は、1種単独で用いられてもよく、2種以上を組み合わせて用いてもよい。 In the present disclosure, amine compounds may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 アミン化合物の含有量は、感光性樹脂層の全質量に対して、0.001質量%~%5質量%であることが好ましく、0.005質量%~3質量%であることがより好ましい。 The content of the amine compound is preferably 0.001% by mass to 5% by mass and more preferably 0.005% by mass to 3% by mass with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer.
(界面活性剤)
 本開示における感光性樹脂層は、膜厚均一性の観点から、界面活性剤をさらに含有することができる。
(Surfactant)
The photosensitive resin layer in the present disclosure can further contain a surfactant from the viewpoint of film thickness uniformity.
 界面活性剤としては、アニオン系界面活性剤、カチオン系界面活性剤、ノニオン系界面活性剤、両性界面活性剤のいずれも用いることができるが、好ましくはノニオン系界面活性剤である。 As the surfactant, any of an anionic surfactant, a cationic surfactant, a nonionic surfactant, and an amphoteric surfactant can be used, and a nonionic surfactant is preferable.
 ノニオン系界面活性剤としては、例えば、ポリオキシエチレン高級アルキルエーテル類、ポリオキシエチレン高級アルキルフェニルエーテル類、ポリオキシエチレングリコールの高級脂肪酸ジエステル類、シリコーン系界面活性剤、及びフッ素系界面活性剤が挙げられる。また、以下商品名で、KP(信越化学工業(株)製)、ポリフロー(共栄社化学(株)製)、エフトップ(JEMCO社製)、メガファック(DIC(株)製)、フロラード(住友スリーエム(株)製)、アサヒガード、サーフロン(旭硝子(株)製)、PolyFox(OMNOVA社製)、及び、SH-8400(東レ・ダウコーニング(株)製)などの各シリーズを挙げることができる。 Nonionic surfactants include, for example, polyoxyethylene higher alkyl ethers, polyoxyethylene higher alkyl phenyl ethers, higher fatty acid diesters of polyoxyethylene glycol, silicone surfactants, and fluorine surfactants. Can be mentioned. In addition, the following trade names are KP (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), Polyflow (manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.), F-Top (manufactured by JEMCO), MegaFac (manufactured by DIC Corporation), Florard (Sumitomo 3M Asahi Guard, Surflon (manufactured by Asahi Glass Co., Ltd.), PolyFox (manufactured by OMNOVA), and SH-8400 (manufactured by Toray Dow Corning Co., Ltd.).
 界面活性剤は、好ましくは、下記式(S1)で表される構成単位X及び構成単位Yを含み、テトラヒドロフラン(THF)を溶剤とした場合のゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィーで測定されるポリスチレン換算の重量平均分子量(Mw)が1,000~10,000である共重合体である。ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィーによる重量平均分子量の測定については既述のとおりである。 The surfactant preferably contains a structural unit X and a structural unit Y represented by the following formula (S1), and has a polystyrene equivalent weight measured by gel permeation chromatography using tetrahydrofuran (THF) as a solvent. A copolymer having an average molecular weight (Mw) of 1,000 to 10,000. The measurement of the weight average molecular weight by gel permeation chromatography is as described above.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
 式(S1)中、R401及びR403は、それぞれ独立して、水素原子、又はメチル基を表し、R402は、炭素数が1~4の直鎖アルキレン基を表し、R404は、水素原子、又は炭素数が1~4のアルキル基を表し、Lは、炭素数が3~6のアルキレン基を表し、p及びqは、重合比を表す質量百分率であり、pは、10質量%~80質量%の数値を表し、qは、20質量%~90質量%の数値を表し、rは、1~18の整数を表し、sは、1~10の整数を表し、*は、他の構造との結合部位を表す。 In formula (S1), R 401 and R 403 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, R 402 represents a linear alkylene group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and R 404 represents hydrogen. Represents an atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, L represents an alkylene group having 3 to 6 carbon atoms, p and q are mass percentages representing a polymerization ratio, and p is 10% by mass Represents a numerical value of ˜80% by mass, q represents a numerical value of 20% by mass to 90% by mass, r represents an integer of 1 to 18, s represents an integer of 1 to 10, and * represents other Represents a binding site to the structure of
 式(S1)中、Lは、下記式(S2)で表される分岐アルキレン基であることが好ましい。式(S2)中、R405は、炭素数が1~4のアルキル基を表し、相溶性と被塗布面に対する濡れ性の点で、好ましくは炭素数が1~3のアルキル基であり、より好ましくは炭素数が2又は3のアルキル基である。pとqとの和は100、すなわち、100質量%であることが好ましい。 In formula (S1), L is preferably a branched alkylene group represented by the following formula (S2). In the formula (S2), R 405 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms in terms of compatibility and wettability with respect to the coated surface. Preferably, it is an alkyl group having 2 or 3 carbon atoms. The sum of p and q is preferably 100, that is, 100% by mass.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
 式(S1)で表される構成単位X及び構成単位Yを含む共重合体の重量平均分子量(Mw)は、1,500~5,000が好ましい。 The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the copolymer containing the structural unit X and the structural unit Y represented by the formula (S1) is preferably 1,500 to 5,000.
 界面活性剤としては、特許第4502784号公報の段落0017、特開2009-237362号公報の段落0060~段落0071に記載の界面活性剤も用いることができる。 As the surfactant, surfactants described in paragraph 0017 of Japanese Patent No. 4502784 and paragraphs 0060 to 0071 of JP-A-2009-237362 can also be used.
 本開示において、界面活性剤は、1種単独で用いられてもよく、2種以上を組み合わせて用いられてもよい。 In the present disclosure, the surfactant may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 感光性樹脂層中の界面活性剤の含有量は、感光性樹脂層の全質量に対して、10質量%以下であることが好ましく、0.001質量%~10質量%であることがより好ましく、0.01質量%~3質量%であることが特に好ましい。 The content of the surfactant in the photosensitive resin layer is preferably 10% by mass or less, more preferably 0.001% by mass to 10% by mass with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer. The content is particularly preferably 0.01% by mass to 3% by mass.
(溶剤)
 本開示における感光性樹脂層は、溶剤を含有していてもよい。
(solvent)
The photosensitive resin layer in the present disclosure may contain a solvent.
 溶剤は、制限されず、公知の溶剤を用いることができる。溶剤としては、例えば、エチレングリコールモノアルキルエーテル類、エチレングリコールジアルキルエーテル類、エチレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルアセテート類、プロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテル類、プロピレングリコールジアルキルエーテル類、プロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルアセテート類、ジエチレングリコールジアルキルエーテル類、ジエチレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルアセテート類、ジプロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテル類、ジプロピレングリコールジアルキルエーテル類、ジプロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルアセテート類、エステル類、ケトン類、アミド類、及びラクトン類が挙げられる。また、溶剤の具体例としては、特開2011-221494号公報の段落0174~段落0178に記載の溶剤も挙げられ、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 The solvent is not limited, and a known solvent can be used. Examples of the solvent include ethylene glycol monoalkyl ethers, ethylene glycol dialkyl ethers, ethylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates, propylene glycol monoalkyl ethers, propylene glycol dialkyl ethers, propylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates, diethylene glycol dialkyl. Examples include ethers, diethylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates, dipropylene glycol monoalkyl ethers, dipropylene glycol dialkyl ethers, dipropylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates, esters, ketones, amides, and lactones. Specific examples of the solvent include the solvents described in paragraphs 0174 to 0178 of JP2011-212494A, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
 また、既述の溶剤に加えて、必要に応じて、ベンジルエチルエーテル、ジヘキシルエーテル、エチレングリコールモノフェニルエーテルアセテート、ジエチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、イソホロン、カプロン酸、カプリル酸、1-オクタノール、1-ノナール、ベンジルアルコール、アニソール、酢酸ベンジル、安息香酸エチル、シュウ酸ジエチル、マレイン酸ジエチル、炭酸エチレン、炭酸プロピレンなどの溶剤をさらに含有してもよい。 In addition to the solvents described above, benzyl ethyl ether, dihexyl ether, ethylene glycol monophenyl ether acetate, diethylene glycol monomethyl ether, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether, isophorone, caproic acid, caprylic acid, 1-octanol, if necessary It may further contain a solvent such as 1-nonal, benzyl alcohol, anisole, benzyl acetate, ethyl benzoate, diethyl oxalate, diethyl maleate, ethylene carbonate, propylene carbonate.
 本開示において、溶剤は、1種単独で用いられてもよく、2種以上を組み合わせて用いてもよい。溶剤を2種以上使用する場合には、例えば、プロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルアセテート類とジアルキルエーテル類との併用、ジアセテート類とジエチレングリコールジアルキルエーテル類との併用、又は、エステル類とブチレングリコールアルキルエーテルアセテート類との併用が好ましい。 In the present disclosure, the solvent may be used alone or in combination of two or more. When two or more solvents are used, for example, combined use of propylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates and dialkyl ethers, combined use of diacetates and diethylene glycol dialkyl ethers, or esters and butylene glycol alkyl ether acetates A combination with the above is preferred.
 また、溶剤としては、沸点が130℃以上160℃未満の溶剤、沸点160℃以上の溶剤、又はこれらの混合物であることが好ましい。
 沸点が130℃以上160℃未満の溶剤としては、例えば、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート(沸点146℃)、プロピレングリコールモノエチルエーテルアセテート(沸点158℃)、プロピレングリコールメチル-n-ブチルエーテル(沸点155℃)、及び、プロピレングリコールメチル-n-プロピルエーテル(沸点131℃)が挙げられる。
 沸点が160℃以上の溶剤としては、例えば、3-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル(沸点170℃)、ジエチレングリコールメチルエチルエーテル(沸点176℃)、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルプロピオネート(沸点160℃)、ジプロピレングリコールメチルエーテルアセテート(沸点213℃)、3-メトキシブチルエーテルアセテート(沸点171℃)、ジエチレングリコールジエチエルエーテル(沸点189℃)、ジエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル(沸点162℃)、プロピレングリコールジアセテート(沸点190℃)、ジエチレングリコールモノエチルエーテルアセテート(沸点220℃)、ジプロピレングリコールジメチルエーテル(沸点175℃)、及び1,3-ブチレングリコールジアセテート(沸点232℃)が挙げられる。
In addition, the solvent is preferably a solvent having a boiling point of 130 ° C. or higher and lower than 160 ° C., a solvent having a boiling point of 160 ° C. or higher, or a mixture thereof.
Examples of the solvent having a boiling point of 130 ° C. or higher and lower than 160 ° C. include propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (boiling point 146 ° C.), propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate (boiling point 158 ° C.), propylene glycol methyl-n-butyl ether (boiling point 155 ° C.). And propylene glycol methyl-n-propyl ether (boiling point 131 ° C.).
Examples of the solvent having a boiling point of 160 ° C. or higher include ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate (boiling point 170 ° C.), diethylene glycol methyl ethyl ether (boiling point 176 ° C.), propylene glycol monomethyl ether propionate (boiling point 160 ° C.), dipropylene glycol. Methyl ether acetate (boiling point 213 ° C), 3-methoxybutyl ether acetate (boiling point 171 ° C), diethylene glycol diethyl ether (boiling point 189 ° C), diethylene glycol dimethyl ether (boiling point 162 ° C), propylene glycol diacetate (boiling point 190 ° C), diethylene glycol mono Ethyl ether acetate (boiling point 220 ° C), dipropylene glycol dimethyl ether (boiling point 175 ° C), and 1,3-butylene glycol diacetate (boiling point) 32 ° C.) and the like.
 感光性樹脂層中の溶剤の含有量は、感光性樹脂層の質量に対し、2質量%以下であることが好ましく、1質量%以下であることがより好ましく、0.5質量%以下であることが特に好ましい。 The content of the solvent in the photosensitive resin layer is preferably 2% by mass or less, more preferably 1% by mass or less, and 0.5% by mass or less with respect to the mass of the photosensitive resin layer. It is particularly preferred.
(可塑剤)
 本開示の感光性樹脂層は、可塑性を改良する目的で、可塑剤をさらに含有することができる。
(Plasticizer)
The photosensitive resin layer of the present disclosure can further contain a plasticizer for the purpose of improving plasticity.
 可塑剤は、重合体よりも重量平均分子量が小さいことが好ましい。可塑剤の重量平均分子量は、可塑性付与の観点から500以上10,000未満が好ましく、700以上5,000未満がより好ましく、800以上4,000未満が特に好ましい。 The plasticizer preferably has a weight average molecular weight smaller than that of the polymer. The weight average molecular weight of the plasticizer is preferably 500 or more and less than 10,000, more preferably 700 or more and less than 5,000, and particularly preferably 800 or more and less than 4,000 from the viewpoint of imparting plasticity.
 可塑剤は、上記の重合体と相溶して可塑性を発現する化合物であれば特に制限されないが、可塑性付与の観点から、可塑剤は、分子中にアルキレンオキシ基を有することが好ましい。可塑剤に含まれるアルキレンオキシ基は下記構造を有することが好ましい。 The plasticizer is not particularly limited as long as it is a compound that is compatible with the above polymer and exhibits plasticity. However, from the viewpoint of imparting plasticity, the plasticizer preferably has an alkyleneoxy group in the molecule. The alkyleneoxy group contained in the plasticizer preferably has the following structure.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
 上記式中、Rは、炭素数が2~8のアルキレン基であり、nは、1~50の整数を表し、*は、他の原子との結合部位を表す。 In the above formula, R represents an alkylene group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms, n represents an integer of 1 to 50, and * represents a bonding site with another atom.
 なお、例えば、上記構造のアルキレンオキシ基を有する化合物(以下、「化合物X」と称することがある。)であっても、化合物Xを含む感光性樹脂組成物が、化合物Xを含まない感光性樹脂組成物に比べて可塑性が向上しない場合は、本開示における可塑剤には該当しない。例えば、任意に添加される界面活性剤は、一般に感光性樹脂組成物に可塑性をもたらす量で使用されることはないため、本開示における可塑剤には該当しない。 For example, even if the compound has an alkyleneoxy group having the above structure (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “compound X”), the photosensitive resin composition containing compound X does not contain compound X. When plasticity does not improve compared to the resin composition, it does not fall under the plasticizer in the present disclosure. For example, an optionally added surfactant is not used as an amount of plasticizer in the present disclosure because it is generally not used in an amount that brings plasticity to the photosensitive resin composition.
 上記構造のアルキレンオキシ基を有する可塑剤としては、例えば、下記構造を有する化合物が挙げられるが、これらに制限されるものではない。 Examples of the plasticizer having an alkyleneoxy group having the above structure include compounds having the following structure, but are not limited thereto.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
 本開示において、可塑剤は、1種単独で用いられてもよく、2種以上を組み合わせて用いられてもよい。 In the present disclosure, the plasticizer may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 可塑剤の含有量は、密着性の観点から、感光性樹脂層の全質量に対して、1質量%~50質量%であることが好ましく、2質量%~20質量%であることがより好ましい。 The content of the plasticizer is preferably 1% by mass to 50% by mass and more preferably 2% by mass to 20% by mass with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer from the viewpoint of adhesion. .
(その他の添加剤)
 本開示における感光性樹脂層は、上記各成分の他、増感剤、アルコキシシラン化合物、金属酸化物粒子、酸化防止剤、分散剤、酸増殖剤、現像促進剤、導電性繊維、着色剤、熱ラジカル重合開始剤、熱酸発生剤、紫外線吸収剤、増粘剤、架橋剤、有機又は無機の沈殿防止剤などの公知の添加剤をさらに含有することができる。これらの添加剤の好ましい態様については特開2014-85643号公報の段落0148~段落156、段落0165~段落0184、国際公開第2015/093271号の段落0139~段落0141にそれぞれ記載があり、この公報の内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
(Other additives)
In addition to the above components, the photosensitive resin layer in the present disclosure includes a sensitizer, an alkoxysilane compound, metal oxide particles, an antioxidant, a dispersant, an acid proliferator, a development accelerator, a conductive fiber, a colorant, It may further contain known additives such as a thermal radical polymerization initiator, a thermal acid generator, an ultraviolet absorber, a thickener, a crosslinking agent, and an organic or inorganic precipitation inhibitor. Preferred embodiments of these additives are described in JP-A No. 2014-85643, paragraphs 0148 to 156, paragraphs 0165 to 0184, and paragraphs 0139 to 0141 of WO2015 / 092731, respectively. Is incorporated herein by reference.
〔感光性樹脂層の平均膜厚〕
 感光性樹脂層の平均膜厚の下限は、転写性(ラミネート性)の観点から、好ましくは0.5μm以上であり、より好ましくは2.0μm以上であり、特に好ましくは5.0μm以上である。また、感光性樹脂層の平均膜厚の上限は、製造適性の観点から、好ましくは20μm以下であり、より好ましくは15μm以下であり、特に好ましくは5μm以下である。また、感光性樹脂層の平均膜厚は、感光性樹脂層の10箇所の厚さを測定して算出することが好ましい。具体的には、表面形状測定、断面の光学顕微鏡又は電子顕微鏡観察等が挙げられる。また、表面形状測定には、ブルカー社製Dektakシリーズを好適に使用することができる。また、断面観察には、走査型電子顕微鏡(SEM)を好適に用いることができる。
[Average film thickness of photosensitive resin layer]
The lower limit of the average film thickness of the photosensitive resin layer is preferably 0.5 μm or more, more preferably 2.0 μm or more, and particularly preferably 5.0 μm or more from the viewpoint of transferability (laminability). . The upper limit of the average film thickness of the photosensitive resin layer is preferably 20 μm or less, more preferably 15 μm or less, and particularly preferably 5 μm or less from the viewpoint of production suitability. Moreover, it is preferable to calculate the average film thickness of the photosensitive resin layer by measuring the thickness of 10 places of the photosensitive resin layer. Specific examples include surface shape measurement, cross-sectional optical microscope or electron microscope observation, and the like. In addition, Bruker's Dektak series can be suitably used for surface shape measurement. Moreover, a scanning electron microscope (SEM) can be used suitably for cross-sectional observation.
[中間層]
 本開示の感光性転写材料は、形状再現性、直線性、及び感光性樹脂層の密着性の観点から、仮支持体と感光性樹脂層との間に、中間層をさらに有することが好ましい。
[Middle layer]
The photosensitive transfer material of the present disclosure preferably further includes an intermediate layer between the temporary support and the photosensitive resin layer from the viewpoint of shape reproducibility, linearity, and adhesiveness of the photosensitive resin layer.
 中間層は、バインダーを含有することが好ましい。
 バインダーは、好ましくは、水溶性又はアルカリ可溶性のバインダーであり、より好ましくは、水溶性又はアルカリ可溶性のポリマーである。なお、本開示において、「水溶性」とは、25℃においてpH7.0の水への溶解度が0.1質量%以上であることを意味する。本開示において、「アルカリ可溶性」とは、25℃においてpH8.5以上のアルカリ水溶液水への溶解度が0.1質量%以上であることを意味する。また、上記「水溶性又はアルカリ可溶性であり」とは、水溶性か、アルカリ可溶性のいずれかであっても、水溶性かつアルカリ可溶性であってもよい。
The intermediate layer preferably contains a binder.
The binder is preferably a water-soluble or alkali-soluble binder, more preferably a water-soluble or alkali-soluble polymer. In the present disclosure, “water-soluble” means that the solubility in water at pH 7.0 at 25 ° C. is 0.1% by mass or more. In the present disclosure, “alkali-soluble” means that the solubility in an aqueous alkali solution having a pH of 8.5 or higher at 25 ° C. is 0.1% by mass or higher. In addition, the above “water-soluble or alkali-soluble” may be either water-soluble or alkali-soluble, or may be water-soluble and alkali-soluble.
 バインダーとしては、例えば、フェノールホルムアルデヒド樹脂、m-クレゾールホルムアルデヒド樹脂、p-クレゾールホルムアルデヒド樹脂、m-/p-混合クレゾールホルムアルデヒド樹脂、フェノール/クレゾール(m-,p-,又はm-/p-混合のいずれでもよい)混合ホルムアルデヒド樹脂等のノボラック樹脂、ピロガロールアセトン樹脂、ポリヒドロキシスチレン樹脂、変性セルロース樹脂、ヒドロキシ基を有するアクリル樹脂(例えば、ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレートの単独重合体又は共重合体)、デンプン類、グリコーゲン類、キチン類、アガロース類、カラギーナン類、プルラン類、アラビアガム、ソヤガム、ポリアミド樹脂、エポキシ樹脂、ポリアセタール樹脂、アクリル樹脂、ポリスチレン樹脂、ポリウレタン樹脂、ポリビニルアルコール、ポリビニルホルマール、ポリアミド樹脂、ポリエステル樹脂、ポリエチレンイミン、ポリアリルアミン、及びポリアルキレングリコールが挙げられる。 Examples of the binder include phenol formaldehyde resin, m-cresol formaldehyde resin, p-cresol formaldehyde resin, m- / p-mixed cresol formaldehyde resin, phenol / cresol (m-, p-, or m- / p-mixed). Any may be used) novolak resin such as mixed formaldehyde resin, pyrogallol acetone resin, polyhydroxystyrene resin, modified cellulose resin, acrylic resin having a hydroxy group (for example, hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate homopolymer or copolymer), Starches, glycogens, chitins, agaroses, carrageenans, pullulans, gum arabic, soya gum, polyamide resin, epoxy resin, polyacetal resin, acrylic resin, polystyrene resin, polyester Urethane resins, polyvinyl alcohol, polyvinyl formal, polyamide resin, polyester resin, polyethyleneimine, polyallylamine, and polyalkylene glycols.
 上記の中でも、バインダーとしては、中間層と感光性樹脂層との密着性及びパターン形成性の観点から、ノボラック樹脂、変性セルロース樹脂、及びヒドロキシ基を有するアクリル樹脂よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種の樹脂であることが好ましく、変性セルロース樹脂、及びヒドロキシ基を有するアクリル樹脂よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種の樹脂であることがより好ましく、変性セルロース樹脂であることが特に好ましい。
 また、変性セルロース樹脂としては、中間層と感光性樹脂層との密着性及びパターン形成性の観点から、ヒドロキシアルキル化セルロースが好ましい。
 ヒドロキシアルキル化セルロースとしては、ヒドロキシメチルセルロース、ヒドロキシエチルセルロース、ポリヒドロキシエチル化セルロース、ヒドロキシプロピルセルロース、ヒドロキシプロピルメチルセルロース、グリオキザール化ヒドロキシプロピルメチルセルロース、及びヒドロキシプロピルメチルセルロースフタレートが好ましく挙げられる。
 中でも、中間層と感光性樹脂層との密着性及びパターン形成性の観点から、ヒドロキシプロピルセルロース及びヒドロキシプロピルメチルセルロースよりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種の樹脂であることが好ましく、ヒドロキシプロピルメチルセルロースであることがより好ましい。
 また、バインダーとしては、中間層と感光性樹脂層との密着性の観点から、ポリビニルアルコール、及び、ポリビニルホルマールよりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種の樹脂であることが好ましく、ポリビニルアルコールであることがより好ましい。
Among the above, the binder is at least one selected from the group consisting of a novolak resin, a modified cellulose resin, and an acrylic resin having a hydroxy group, from the viewpoints of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer and pattern formability. The resin is preferably at least one resin selected from the group consisting of a modified cellulose resin and an acrylic resin having a hydroxy group, and particularly preferably a modified cellulose resin.
The modified cellulose resin is preferably hydroxyalkylated cellulose from the viewpoints of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer and pattern formation.
Preferred examples of the hydroxyalkylated cellulose include hydroxymethylcellulose, hydroxyethylcellulose, polyhydroxyethylated cellulose, hydroxypropylcellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, glyoxalized hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, and hydroxypropylmethylcellulose phthalate.
Among these, from the viewpoint of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer and pattern formability, it is preferably at least one resin selected from the group consisting of hydroxypropylcellulose and hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, and is hydroxypropylmethylcellulose. It is more preferable.
In addition, the binder is preferably at least one resin selected from the group consisting of polyvinyl alcohol and polyvinyl formal from the viewpoint of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer, and is polyvinyl alcohol. Is more preferable.
 バインダーの重量平均分子量は、中間層と感光性樹脂層との密着性、パターン形成性、露光後の現像液への溶解性及び転写性の観点から、好ましくは1,000以上であり、より好ましくは2,000~100,000であり、特に好ましくは10,000~50,000である。 The weight average molecular weight of the binder is preferably 1,000 or more, more preferably from the viewpoint of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer, pattern formation, solubility in the developer after exposure, and transferability. Is from 2,000 to 100,000, particularly preferably from 10,000 to 50,000.
 本開示において、中間層に含有されるバインダーは、1種単独で用いられてもよく、2種以上を組み合わせて用いられてもよい。 In the present disclosure, the binder contained in the intermediate layer may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 中間層中のバインダーの含有量は、中間層と感光性樹脂層との密着性、パターン形成性、露光後の現像液への溶解性及び転写性の観点から、中間層の全質量に対し、好ましくは10質量%~100質量%であり、より好ましくは20質量%~100質量%であり、さらに好ましくは40質量%~100質量%であり、特に好ましくは65質量%~85質量%である。 The content of the binder in the intermediate layer is based on the adhesiveness between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer, pattern formation, solubility in the developer after exposure, and transferability, with respect to the total mass of the intermediate layer, It is preferably 10% by mass to 100% by mass, more preferably 20% by mass to 100% by mass, still more preferably 40% by mass to 100% by mass, and particularly preferably 65% by mass to 85% by mass. .
 上記中間層は、中間層と感光性樹脂層との密着性の観点から、粒子を含有することが好ましい。
 上記粒子としては、中間層と感光性樹脂層との密着性の観点から、金属酸化物粒子、又は有機粒子であることが好ましく、Si、Ti及びZrよりなる群から選択される少なくとも1種の元素を含有する金属酸化物粒子、又は有機粒子であることがより好ましい。
 なお、本開示における金属酸化物粒子の金属には、B、Si、Ge、As、Sb、Te等の半金属も含まれるものとする。
The intermediate layer preferably contains particles from the viewpoint of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer.
The particles are preferably metal oxide particles or organic particles from the viewpoint of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer, and at least one selected from the group consisting of Si, Ti and Zr. More preferred are metal oxide particles containing elements or organic particles.
Note that the metal of the metal oxide particles in the present disclosure includes semimetals such as B, Si, Ge, As, Sb, and Te.
 中間層は、2層以上の層を有していてもよい。中間層が2層以上の層を有する場合、水溶性又はアルカリ可溶性のバインダーをそれぞれの層に含有することが好ましい。また、中間層が2層以上の層を有する場合、上記粒子は複数の層に含有されていてもよいが、中間層と感光層との密着性の観点から、感光層と接する層に含有されていることが好ましい。 The intermediate layer may have two or more layers. When the intermediate layer has two or more layers, each layer preferably contains a water-soluble or alkali-soluble binder. In addition, when the intermediate layer has two or more layers, the particles may be contained in a plurality of layers, but from the viewpoint of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer, the particles are contained in the layer in contact with the photosensitive layer. It is preferable.
 中間層の平均膜厚は、中間層と感光性樹脂層との密着性、及び、パターン形成性の観点から、好ましくは0.3μm~10μmであり、より好ましくは0.3μm~5μmであり、特に好ましくは0.3μm~2μmである。
 中間層の平均膜厚の測定方法は、制限されず、公知の方法を用いることができる。また、中間層の平均膜厚は、中間層の10箇所を測定して算出することが好ましい。具体的には例えば、表面形状測定、断面の光学顕微鏡又は電子顕微鏡観察等が挙げられる。また、表面形状測定には、ブルカー社製Dektakシリーズを好適に使用することができる。また、断面観察には、走査型電子顕微鏡(SEM)を好適に用いることができる。
 また、上記中間層の厚みは、上記感光性樹脂層の厚みより薄いことが好ましい。
The average film thickness of the intermediate layer is preferably 0.3 μm to 10 μm, more preferably 0.3 μm to 5 μm, from the viewpoints of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer and pattern formation. Particularly preferred is 0.3 μm to 2 μm.
The measuring method of the average film thickness of an intermediate | middle layer is not restrict | limited, A well-known method can be used. The average film thickness of the intermediate layer is preferably calculated by measuring 10 points of the intermediate layer. Specific examples include surface shape measurement, cross-sectional optical microscope or electron microscope observation, and the like. In addition, Bruker's Dektak series can be suitably used for surface shape measurement. Moreover, a scanning electron microscope (SEM) can be used suitably for cross-sectional observation.
Moreover, it is preferable that the thickness of the said intermediate | middle layer is thinner than the thickness of the said photosensitive resin layer.
 中間層の形成方法は、制限されず、中間層形成用組成物を仮支持体に塗布し、乾燥させることで、仮支持体上に中間層を容易に形成することができる。塗布方法は、制限されず、スリット塗布、スピン塗布、カーテン塗布、インクジェット塗布などの公知の方法で塗布することができる。 The method for forming the intermediate layer is not limited, and the intermediate layer can be easily formed on the temporary support by applying the intermediate layer-forming composition to the temporary support and drying it. The coating method is not limited, and the coating can be performed by a known method such as slit coating, spin coating, curtain coating, and inkjet coating.
 中間層形成用組成物の調製方法は、制限されず、例えば、上記の樹脂、及び溶剤を予め定められた割合で任意の方法で混合し、撹拌溶解して調製することができる。例えば、上記の樹脂を、それぞれ予め溶剤に溶解させた溶液とした後、得られた溶液を予め定められた割合で混合して中間層形成用組成物を調製することもできる。以上の如くして調製した中間層形成用組成物は、孔径5μmのフィルターなどを用いてろ過した後に、使用に供することもできる。中間層の形成方法で用いられる溶剤としては、水系溶剤が好ましい。水系溶剤としては、例えば、水、及びアルコール類が挙げられる。 The method for preparing the intermediate layer forming composition is not limited, and for example, the above-mentioned resin and solvent can be mixed at a predetermined ratio by an arbitrary method, and can be prepared by stirring and dissolving. For example, an intermediate layer-forming composition can be prepared by preparing a solution in which each of the above resins is previously dissolved in a solvent, and then mixing the obtained solution at a predetermined ratio. The intermediate layer-forming composition prepared as described above can be used after being filtered using a filter having a pore diameter of 5 μm. As the solvent used in the method for forming the intermediate layer, an aqueous solvent is preferable. Examples of the aqueous solvent include water and alcohols.
[その他の層]
 本開示の感光性転写材料は、上記以外の層(以下、「その他の層」と称することがある。)を有することができる。
[Other layers]
The photosensitive transfer material of the present disclosure may have layers other than those described above (hereinafter, may be referred to as “other layers”).
 その他の層としては、例えば、カバーフィルム、熱可塑性樹脂層、及びコントラストエンハンスメント層が挙げられる。 Other layers include, for example, a cover film, a thermoplastic resin layer, and a contrast enhancement layer.
 本開示の感光性転写材料がその他の層を有する場合、感光性転写材料は、特開2006-259138号公報の段落0094~段落0098に記載の感光性転写材料の作製方法に準じて作製することができる。
 例えば、熱可塑性樹脂層を有する感光性転写材料を作製する場合には、仮支持体上に、熱可塑性の有機高分子と添加剤とを溶解した溶解液(熱可塑性樹脂層用塗布液)を塗布し、乾燥させて熱可塑性樹脂層を設けた後、得られた熱可塑性樹脂層上に、熱可塑性樹脂層を溶解しない溶剤に樹脂及び添加剤を加えて調製した調製液(中間層用組成物)を塗布し、乾燥させて中間層を積層する。形成した中間層上に、さらに、中間層を溶解しない溶剤を用いて調製した感光性樹脂組成物を塗布し、乾燥させて感光性樹脂層を積層することによって、感光性転写材料を好適に作製することができる。
When the photosensitive transfer material of the present disclosure has other layers, the photosensitive transfer material should be produced according to the method for producing a photosensitive transfer material described in paragraphs 0094 to 0098 of JP-A-2006-259138. Can do.
For example, when producing a photosensitive transfer material having a thermoplastic resin layer, a solution (thermoplastic resin layer coating solution) in which a thermoplastic organic polymer and an additive are dissolved on a temporary support is used. After applying and drying to provide a thermoplastic resin layer, a prepared liquid (composition for intermediate layer) was prepared by adding a resin and additives to a solvent that does not dissolve the thermoplastic resin layer on the obtained thermoplastic resin layer And the intermediate layer is laminated. A photosensitive transfer material is suitably produced by applying a photosensitive resin composition prepared using a solvent that does not dissolve the intermediate layer on the formed intermediate layer, and drying and laminating the photosensitive resin layer. can do.
〔カバーフィルム〕
 本開示の感光性転写材料は、感光性樹脂層の保護の観点から、カバーフィルムを有することができる。
 カバーフィルムとしては、例えば、樹脂フィルム、及び紙が挙げられ、強度及び可撓性等の観点から、樹脂フィルムが特に好ましい。樹脂フィルムとしては、例えば、ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム、トリ酢酸セルロースフィルム、ポリスチレンフィルム、及びポリカーボネートフィルムが挙げられる。樹脂フィルムは、好ましくはポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルムであり、より好ましくは2軸延伸ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルムである。
 カバーフィルムの厚さは、制限されず、好ましくは1μm~2,000μmである。
[Cover film]
The photosensitive transfer material of the present disclosure can have a cover film from the viewpoint of protecting the photosensitive resin layer.
Examples of the cover film include a resin film and paper, and a resin film is particularly preferable from the viewpoints of strength and flexibility. Examples of the resin film include a polyethylene terephthalate film, a cellulose triacetate film, a polystyrene film, and a polycarbonate film. The resin film is preferably a polyethylene terephthalate film, more preferably a biaxially stretched polyethylene terephthalate film.
The thickness of the cover film is not limited and is preferably 1 μm to 2,000 μm.
〔熱可塑性樹脂層〕
 本開示の感光性転写材料は、転写性の観点から、仮支持体と中間層との間に、熱可塑性樹脂層を有することができる。
 熱可塑性樹脂層の好ましい態様については、特開2014-85643号公報の段落0189~段落0193に記載があり、この公報の内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
 転写性の観点から、熱可塑性樹脂層が、アクリル樹脂及びスチレン/アクリル共重合体よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の熱可塑性樹脂を含むことが好ましい。
[Thermoplastic resin layer]
The photosensitive transfer material of the present disclosure can have a thermoplastic resin layer between the temporary support and the intermediate layer from the viewpoint of transferability.
Preferred embodiments of the thermoplastic resin layer are described in JP-A-2014-85643, paragraphs 0189 to 0193, and the contents of this publication are incorporated herein.
From the viewpoint of transferability, it is preferable that the thermoplastic resin layer contains at least one thermoplastic resin selected from the group consisting of acrylic resins and styrene / acrylic copolymers.
〔コントラストエンハンスメント層〕
 本開示に係る感光性転写材料は、コントラストエンハンスメント層を有することができる。
 コントラストエンハンスメント層(Contrast Enhancement Layer:CEL)は、露光前には露光波長に対する吸収が大きいが、露光されるに伴って次第に吸収が小さくなる、すなわち、光の透過率が高くなる材料(以下、「光消色性色素成分」と称することがある。)を含有する層である。光消色性色素成分としては、例えば、ジアゾニウム塩、スチルバゾリウム塩、及びアリールニトロソ塩類が挙げられる。皮膜形成成分としては、例えば、フェノール系樹脂が用いられる。その他、コントラストエンハンスメント層としては、特開平6-97065号公報の段落0004~段落0051、特開平6-332167号公報の段落0012~段落0055、フォトポリマーハンドブック,フォトポリマー懇話会編,工業調査会(1989)、フォトポリマー・テクノロジー,山岡、永松編,日刊工業新聞社(1988)に記載の材料を用いることができる。
[Contrast enhancement layer]
The photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure can have a contrast enhancement layer.
The contrast enhancement layer (Contrast Enhancement Layer: CEL) has a large absorption with respect to the exposure wavelength before the exposure, but the absorption gradually decreases with the exposure, that is, a material (hereinafter referred to as “light transmittance”). This layer is sometimes referred to as a “photo-decolorable dye component”. Examples of the photodecolorable dye component include diazonium salts, stilbazolium salts, and arylnitroso salts. For example, a phenolic resin is used as the film forming component. In addition, as contrast enhancement layers, paragraphs 0004 to 0051 of JP-A-6-97065, paragraphs 0012 to 0055 of JP-A-6-332167, photopolymer handbook, photopolymer social gathering, industrial research group ( 1989), Photopolymer Technology, Yamaoka, edited by Nagamatsu, Nikkan Kogyo Shimbun (1988).
<回路配線の製造方法>
 本開示に係る感光性転写材料を用いた、回路配線の製造方法の第1の実施態様について説明する。
 回路配線の製造方法の第1の実施態様は、基板に対し、本開示に係る感光性転写材料の、仮支持体の感光性樹脂層側の最外層を貼り合わせる工程(貼り合わせ工程)と、上記貼り合わせる工程後の上記感光性転写材料の上記感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する工程(露光工程)と、上記パターン露光する工程後の露光部を現像してパターンを形成する工程(現像工程)と、上記パターンが配置されていない領域における基板をエッチング処理する工程(エッチング工程)と、を含む。
 回路配線の製造方法の第1の実施態様における基板は、ガラス、シリコン、フィルムなどの基材自体が基板であってもよく、ガラス、シリコン、フィルムなどの基材上に、必要により導電層などの任意の層が設けられた基板であってもよい。
 回路配線の製造方法の第1の実施態様によれば、基板表面に微細パターンを形成することができる。
<Circuit wiring manufacturing method>
A first embodiment of a circuit wiring manufacturing method using the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure will be described.
The first embodiment of the method for producing circuit wiring includes a step of bonding the outermost layer on the photosensitive resin layer side of the temporary support of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure to the substrate (bonding step), A step of exposing the photosensitive resin layer of the photosensitive transfer material after the bonding step (exposure step), and a step of developing an exposed portion after the pattern exposure step to form a pattern (development step) And a step of etching the substrate in a region where the pattern is not disposed (etching step).
The substrate in the first embodiment of the method for producing circuit wiring may be a substrate itself such as glass, silicon, or film, and may be a conductive layer or the like on the substrate such as glass, silicon, or film, if necessary. The board | substrate with which arbitrary layers of were provided may be sufficient.
According to the first embodiment of the circuit wiring manufacturing method, a fine pattern can be formed on the substrate surface.
 回路配線の製造方法の第2の実施形態は、基材、及び、互いに構成材料が異なる第1導電層及び第2導電層を含む複数の導電層とを有し、上記基材の表面上に、上記基材の表面から遠い順に、最表面層である上記第1導電層及び上記第2導電層が積層されている基板に対し、本開示に係る感光性転写材料の、仮支持体の感光性樹脂層側の最外層を上記第1導電層に接触させて貼り合わせる工程(貼り合わせ工程)と、上記貼り合わせる工程後の上記感光性転写材料の上記仮支持体を介して上記感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する第1露光工程と、上記第1露光工程後の感光性樹脂層から上記仮支持体を剥離した後、上記第1露光工程後の露光部を現像して第1パターンを形成する第1現像工程と、上記第1パターンが配置されていない領域における上記複数の導電層のうち少なくとも上記第1導電層及び上記第2導電層をエッチング処理する第1エッチング工程と、上記第1エッチング工程後の上記第1パターンを上記第1パターンとは異なるパターンでパターン露光する第2露光工程と、上記第2露光工程後の上記第1パターンを現像して第2パターンを形成する第2現像工程と、上記第2パターンが配置されていない領域における上記複数の導電層のうち少なくとも上記第1導電層をエッチング処理する第2エッチング工程と、をこの順に含む。上記第2の実施形態としては、国際公開第2006/190405号を参考にすることができ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 The second embodiment of the circuit wiring manufacturing method includes a base material and a plurality of conductive layers including a first conductive layer and a second conductive layer having different constituent materials from each other, on the surface of the base material. The photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure is exposed to a temporary support on a substrate on which the first conductive layer and the second conductive layer, which are the outermost surface layers, are laminated in order from the surface of the base material. A step of bonding the outermost layer on the side of the photosensitive resin layer to the first conductive layer (bonding step), and the photosensitive resin via the temporary support of the photosensitive transfer material after the bonding step A first exposure step for pattern exposure of the layer, and after peeling the temporary support from the photosensitive resin layer after the first exposure step, the exposed portion after the first exposure step is developed to form a first pattern The first developing step and the region where the first pattern is not disposed. A first etching step for etching at least the first conductive layer and the second conductive layer among the plurality of conductive layers, and a pattern different from the first pattern in the first pattern after the first etching step. A second exposure step of performing pattern exposure in the second step, a second development step of developing the first pattern after the second exposure step to form a second pattern, and the plurality of regions in a region where the second pattern is not disposed. A second etching step of etching at least the first conductive layer among the conductive layers in this order. As the second embodiment, International Publication No. 2006/190405 can be referred to, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
 本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、タッチパネル又はタッチパネル表示装置用の回路配線の製造方法として用いることができる。
 以下、第2の実施形態を基に、各工程の詳細について説明する。
The circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure can be used as a circuit wiring manufacturing method for a touch panel or a touch panel display device.
Hereinafter, details of each step will be described based on the second embodiment.
[貼り合わせ工程]
 貼り合わせ工程の一例を、図2(a)に概略的に示した。
 例えば図2(a)のように、まず、貼り合わせ工程では、基材22と、互いに構成材料が異なる第1導電層24及び第2導電層26を含む複数の導電層とを有し、基材22の表面上に、基材22の表面から遠い順に、最表面層である第1導電層24と第2導電層26とが積層されている基板(回路配線形成用基板)20に対し、上述した本開示に係る感光性転写材料100の、仮支持体の感光性樹脂層側の最外層である感光性樹脂層12を第1導電層24に接触させて貼り合わせる。なお、このような回路配線形成用基板と感光性転写材料との貼り合わせを「転写」又は「ラミネート」と称する場合がある。
 図2(a)において、感光性転写材料100の、仮支持体の感光性樹脂層側の最外層は感光性樹脂層であるが、感光性樹脂層上にその他の層が形成され、最外層がその他の層であってもよい。
[Lamination process]
An example of the bonding process is schematically shown in FIG.
For example, as shown in FIG. 2A, first, in the bonding step, the substrate 22 and a plurality of conductive layers including the first conductive layer 24 and the second conductive layer 26 having different constituent materials are included. On the surface of the material 22 with respect to the substrate (circuit wiring forming substrate) 20 in which the first conductive layer 24 and the second conductive layer 26 which are the outermost surface layers are laminated in order from the surface of the base material 22, In the photosensitive transfer material 100 according to the present disclosure described above, the photosensitive resin layer 12 that is the outermost layer on the photosensitive resin layer side of the temporary support is brought into contact with the first conductive layer 24 and bonded thereto. Such a bonding of the circuit wiring forming substrate and the photosensitive transfer material may be referred to as “transfer” or “laminate”.
In FIG. 2A, the outermost layer of the photosensitive transfer material 100 on the photosensitive resin layer side of the temporary support is a photosensitive resin layer, but other layers are formed on the photosensitive resin layer, and the outermost layer is formed. May be other layers.
 図1に示したように感光性転写材料100Aの感光性樹脂層12上にカバーフィルム16を有する場合は、感光性転写材料100A(感光性樹脂層12)からカバーフィルム16を除去した後、感光性転写材料100Aの感光性樹脂層12を第1導電層24に接触させて貼り合わせる。 As shown in FIG. 1, when the cover film 16 is provided on the photosensitive resin layer 12 of the photosensitive transfer material 100A, the cover film 16 is removed from the photosensitive transfer material 100A (photosensitive resin layer 12), and then the photosensitive film is formed. The photosensitive resin layer 12 of the conductive transfer material 100A is brought into contact with the first conductive layer 24 and bonded.
 感光性転写材料の第1導電層上への貼り合わせ(転写)は、感光性転写材料の感光性樹脂層側を第1導電層の上に重ね、ロール等による加圧及び加熱することに行われることが好ましい。貼り合わせには、例えば、ラミネータ、真空ラミネータ、及び、より生産性を高めることができるオートカットラミネーター等の公知のラミネータを使用することができる。
 回路配線形成用基板の基材が樹脂フィルムである場合は、ロールツーロールでの貼り合わせも行うこともできる。
The bonding (transfer) of the photosensitive transfer material onto the first conductive layer is performed by stacking the photosensitive resin layer side of the photosensitive transfer material on the first conductive layer, and applying pressure and heating with a roll or the like. Are preferred. For laminating, for example, a known laminator such as a laminator, a vacuum laminator, and an auto-cut laminator capable of improving productivity can be used.
When the base material of the circuit wiring forming substrate is a resin film, roll-to-roll bonding can also be performed.
〔基材〕
 基材上に複数の導電層が積層された基板は、基材がガラス基材又はフィルム基材であることが好ましく、フィルム基材であることがより好ましい。本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、タッチパネル用の回路配線である場合、基材がシート状樹脂組成物であることが特に好ましい。
 また、基材は透明であることが好ましい。
 基材の屈折率は、1.50~1.52であることが好ましい。
 基材は、ガラス基材等の透光性基材で構成されていてもよく、コーニング社のゴリラガラスに代表される強化ガラスなどを用いることができる。また、前述の透明基材としては、特開2010-86684号公報、特開2010-152809号公報及び特開2010-257492号公報に用いられている材料を好ましく用いることができる。
 基材としてフィルム基材を用いる場合は、光学的に歪みがない基材、及び、透明度が高い基材を用いることがより好ましく、具体的な素材には、例えば、ポリエチレンテレフタレート(polyethylene terephthalate;PET)、ポリエチレンナフタレート、ポリカーボネート、トリアセチルセルロース、及びシクロオレフィンポリマーを挙げることができる。
〔Base material〕
As for the board | substrate with which the some electroconductive layer was laminated | stacked on the base material, it is preferable that a base material is a glass base material or a film base material, and it is more preferable that it is a film base material. When the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure is a circuit wiring for a touch panel, the substrate is particularly preferably a sheet-shaped resin composition.
Moreover, it is preferable that a base material is transparent.
The refractive index of the substrate is preferably 1.50 to 1.52.
The base material may be composed of a light-transmitting base material such as a glass base material, and tempered glass represented by gorilla glass manufactured by Corning Inc. can be used. Further, as the above-mentioned transparent base material, materials used in JP 2010-86684 A, JP 2010-152809 A, and JP 2010-257492 A can be preferably used.
When a film substrate is used as the substrate, it is more preferable to use a substrate that is not optically distorted and a substrate having high transparency. Specific examples of the material include polyethylene terephthalate (PET). ), Polyethylene naphthalate, polycarbonate, triacetylcellulose, and cycloolefin polymers.
〔導電層〕
 基材上に形成されている複数の導電層としては、一般的な回路配線又はタッチパネル配線に用いられる任意の導電層を挙げることができる。
 導電層の材料としては、例えば、金属及び金属酸化物を挙げることができる。
 金属酸化物としては、例えば、ITO(Indium Tin Oxide)、IZO(Indium Zinc Oxide)、及びSiOを挙げることができる。金属としては、例えば、Al、Zn、Cu、Fe、Ni、Cr、及びMoを挙げることができる。
[Conductive layer]
Examples of the plurality of conductive layers formed on the substrate include arbitrary conductive layers used for general circuit wiring or touch panel wiring.
Examples of the material for the conductive layer include metals and metal oxides.
Examples of the metal oxide include ITO (Indium Tin Oxide), IZO (Indium Zinc Oxide), and SiO 2 . Examples of the metal include Al, Zn, Cu, Fe, Ni, Cr, and Mo.
 本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、複数の導電層のうち少なくとも一つの導電層が金属酸化物を含むことが好ましい。
 導電層としては、静電容量型タッチパネルに用いられる視認部のセンサーに相当する電極パターン又は周辺取り出し部の配線であることが好ましい。
In the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure, it is preferable that at least one of the plurality of conductive layers includes a metal oxide.
The conductive layer is preferably an electrode pattern corresponding to a sensor of a visual recognition part used in a capacitive touch panel or a wiring of a peripheral extraction part.
〔回路配線形成用基板〕
 基材の表面に導電層を有する基板である。導電層をパターンニングすることで回路配線とする。本例では、PETなどのフィルム基材に金属酸化物、金属などの複数の導電層が設けられたものであることが好ましい。
[Circuit wiring formation board]
It is a board | substrate which has a conductive layer on the surface of a base material. Circuit wiring is formed by patterning the conductive layer. In this example, it is preferable that a film substrate such as PET is provided with a plurality of conductive layers such as metal oxide and metal.
[露光工程(第1露光工程)]
 上記第1の実施態様においては露光工程が、上記第2の実施態様においては第1露光工程が行われる。露光工程(第1露光工程)の一例を、図2(b)に概略的に示した。
 例えば図2(b)のように、露光工程(第1露光工程)では、貼り合わせ工程後の感光性転写材料の仮支持体10及び中間層14を介して感光性樹脂層12をパターン露光する。
[Exposure process (first exposure process)]
The exposure process is performed in the first embodiment, and the first exposure process is performed in the second embodiment. An example of the exposure process (first exposure process) is schematically shown in FIG.
For example, as shown in FIG. 2B, in the exposure step (first exposure step), the photosensitive resin layer 12 is subjected to pattern exposure via the temporary support 10 and the intermediate layer 14 of the photosensitive transfer material after the bonding step. .
 本実施形態における露光工程、現像工程、及びその他の工程の例としては、特開2006-23696号公報の段落0035~段落0051に記載の方法を本実施形態においても好適に用いることができる。 As examples of the exposure step, the development step, and other steps in the present embodiment, the method described in paragraphs 0035 to 0051 of JP-A-2006-23696 can be suitably used in the present embodiment.
 例えば、第1導電層24の上に配置された感光性転写材料100の上方(第1導電層24と接する側とは反対側)に所定のパターンを有するマスク30を配置し、その後、マスク30を介してマスク上方から紫外線で露光する方法などが挙げられる。
 本実施形態においてパターンの詳細な配置及び具体的サイズは特に限定されない。本実施形態により製造される回路配線を有する入力装置を備えた表示装置(例えばタッチパネル)の表示品質を高め、また、取り出し配線の占める面積をできるだけ小さくしたいことから、パターンの少なくとも一部(特にタッチパネルの電極パターン及び取り出し配線の部分)は100μm以下の細線であることが好ましく、70μm以下の細線であることが更に好ましい。
 ここで、露光に使用する光源としては、感光性転写材料の露光された箇所が現像液に溶解しうる波長域の光(例えば、365nm、405nmなど)を照射できれば適宜選定して用いることができる。具体的には、超高圧水銀灯、高圧水銀灯、及びメタルハライドランプが挙げられる。
 露光量としては、5mJ/cm~200mJ/cmであることが好ましく、10mJ/cm~100mJ/cmであることがより好ましい。
 また、露光後にパターンの矩形性、直線性を向上させる目的で、現像前に熱処理を行うことも好ましい。いわゆるPEB(Post Exposure Bake)と呼ばれる工程により、露光時に感光性樹脂層中で生じた定在波によるパターンエッジの荒れを低減することが可能である。
For example, a mask 30 having a predetermined pattern is disposed above the photosensitive transfer material 100 disposed on the first conductive layer 24 (on the side opposite to the side in contact with the first conductive layer 24), and then the mask 30 And a method of exposing with ultraviolet rays from above the mask.
In the present embodiment, the detailed arrangement and specific size of the pattern are not particularly limited. In order to improve the display quality of a display device (for example, a touch panel) including an input device having circuit wiring manufactured according to the present embodiment and to reduce the area occupied by the extraction wiring as much as possible, at least a part of the pattern (particularly the touch panel) The electrode pattern and the part of the lead-out wiring) are preferably fine wires of 100 μm or less, and more preferably 70 μm or less.
Here, the light source used for exposure can be appropriately selected and used as long as it can irradiate light (for example, 365 nm, 405 nm, etc.) in a wavelength region where the exposed portion of the photosensitive transfer material can be dissolved in the developer. . Specifically, an ultrahigh pressure mercury lamp, a high pressure mercury lamp, and a metal halide lamp are mentioned.
The exposure dose is preferably 5 mJ / cm 2 to 200 mJ / cm 2 , and more preferably 10 mJ / cm 2 to 100 mJ / cm 2 .
It is also preferable to perform heat treatment before development for the purpose of improving the rectangularity and linearity of the pattern after exposure. By a process called PEB (Post Exposure Bake), pattern edge roughness due to standing waves generated in the photosensitive resin layer during exposure can be reduced.
 なお、パターン露光は、仮支持体を感光性樹脂層から剥離してから行っても、仮支持体を剥離する前に、仮支持体を介して露光し、その後、仮支持体を剥離してもよい。感光性樹脂層とマスクの接触によるマスク汚染の防止、及びマスクに付着した異物による露光への影響を避けるためには、仮支持体を剥離せずに露光することが好ましい。なお、パターン露光は、マスクを介した露光でもよいし、レーザー等を用いたデジタル露光でもよい。 In addition, even if pattern exposure performs after peeling a temporary support body from the photosensitive resin layer, before peeling a temporary support body, it exposes through a temporary support body, and peels a temporary support body after that. Also good. In order to prevent mask contamination due to the contact between the photosensitive resin layer and the mask and to avoid the influence on the exposure caused by the foreign matter adhering to the mask, it is preferable to perform the exposure without peeling off the temporary support. The pattern exposure may be exposure through a mask or digital exposure using a laser or the like.
[現像工程(第1現像工程)]
 上記第1の実施態様においては現像工程が、上記第2の実施態様においては第1現像工程が行われる。現像工程(第1現像工程)の一例を、図2(c)に概略的に示した。
 例えば図2(c)のように、現像工程(第1現像工程)では、露光工程(第1露光工程)後の感光性樹脂層12から仮支持体10(及び中間層14)を剥離した後、露光工程(第1露光工程)後の感光性樹脂層12を現像して第1パターン12Aを形成する。
[Development process (first development process)]
In the first embodiment, the developing step is performed, and in the second embodiment, the first developing step is performed. An example of the development process (first development process) is schematically shown in FIG.
For example, as shown in FIG. 2C, in the development step (first development step), the temporary support 10 (and the intermediate layer 14) is peeled from the photosensitive resin layer 12 after the exposure step (first exposure step). The photosensitive resin layer 12 after the exposure step (first exposure step) is developed to form the first pattern 12A.
 現像工程(第1現像工程)は、パターン露光された感光性樹脂層を現像することによりパターン(第1パターン)を形成する工程である。
 パターン露光された感光性樹脂層の現像は、現像液を用いて行うことができる。
 現像液としては、感光性樹脂層の露光部分を除去することができれば特に制限はなく、例えば、特開平5-72724号公報に記載の現像液など、公知の現像液を使用することができる。なお、現像液は感光性樹脂層の露光部が溶解型の現像挙動をする現像液が好ましい。例えば、pKa=7~13の化合物を0.05mol/L(リットル)~5mol/Lの濃度で含むアルカリ水溶液系の現像液が好ましい。現像液は、更に、水と混和性を有する有機溶剤、及び界面活性剤を含有してもよい。本実施形態において好適に用いられる現像液としては、例えば、国際公開第2015/093271号の段落0194に記載の現像液が挙げられる。
The development step (first development step) is a step of forming a pattern (first pattern) by developing the pattern-exposed photosensitive resin layer.
Development of the pattern-exposed photosensitive resin layer can be performed using a developer.
The developer is not particularly limited as long as the exposed portion of the photosensitive resin layer can be removed. For example, a known developer such as the developer described in JP-A-5-72724 can be used. The developer is preferably a developer in which the exposed portion of the photosensitive resin layer exhibits a dissolution type development behavior. For example, an alkaline aqueous developer containing a compound having a pKa of 7 to 13 at a concentration of 0.05 mol / L (liter) to 5 mol / L is preferable. The developer may further contain an organic solvent miscible with water and a surfactant. Examples of the developer suitably used in the present embodiment include the developer described in paragraph 0194 of International Publication No. 2015/092731.
 現像方式としては、特に制限はなくパドル現像、シャワー現像、シャワー及びスピン現像、ディップ現像等のいずれでもよい。ここで、シャワー現像について説明すると、露光後の感光性樹脂層に現像液をシャワーにより吹き付けることにより、露光部分を除去することができる。また、現像の後に、洗浄剤などをシャワーにより吹き付け、ブラシなどで擦りながら、現像残渣を除去することが好ましい。現像液の液温度は20℃~40℃が好ましい。 The development method is not particularly limited and may be any of paddle development, shower development, shower and spin development, dip development, and the like. Here, the shower development will be described. The exposed portion can be removed by spraying the developer onto the exposed photosensitive resin layer by shower. Further, after the development, it is preferable to remove the development residue while spraying a cleaning agent or the like with a shower and rubbing with a brush or the like. The liquid temperature of the developer is preferably 20 ° C. to 40 ° C.
 更に、現像して得られた感光性樹脂層を含むパターンを加熱処理するポストベーク工程を有していてもよい。
 ポストベークの加熱は8.1kPa~121.6kPaの環境下で行うことが好ましく、50.66kPa以上の環境下で行うことがより好ましい。一方、ポストベークの加熱は114.6kPa以下の環境下で行うことがより好ましく、101.3kPa以下の環境下で行うことが特に好ましい。
 ポストベークの温度は、80℃~250℃であることが好ましく、110℃~170℃であることがより好ましく、130℃~150℃であることが特に好ましい。
 ポストベークの時間は、1分~30分であることが好ましく、2分~10分であることがより好ましく、2分~4分であることが特に好ましい。
 ポストベークは、空気環境下で行っても、窒素置換環境下で行ってもよい。
Furthermore, you may have the post-baking process which heat-processes the pattern containing the photosensitive resin layer obtained by image development.
The post-baking is preferably performed in an environment of 8.1 kPa to 121.6 kPa, and more preferably in an environment of 50.66 kPa or more. On the other hand, the post-bake heating is more preferably performed under an environment of 114.6 kPa or less, and particularly preferably performed under an environment of 101.3 kPa or less.
The post-baking temperature is preferably 80 ° C. to 250 ° C., more preferably 110 ° C. to 170 ° C., and particularly preferably 130 ° C. to 150 ° C.
The post-baking time is preferably 1 to 30 minutes, more preferably 2 to 10 minutes, and particularly preferably 2 to 4 minutes.
The post-bake may be performed in an air environment or a nitrogen substitution environment.
 ポスト露光工程等、その他の工程を有していてもよい。 Other steps such as a post-exposure step may be included.
[エッチング工程(第1エッチング工程)]
 上記第1の実施態様においてはエッチング工程が、上記第2の実施態様においては第1エッチング工程が行われる。エッチング工程(第1エッチング工程)の一例を、図2(d)に概略的に示した。
 例えば図2(d)のように、エッチング工程(第1エッチング工程)では、第1パターン12Aが配置されていない領域における複数の導電層のうち少なくとも第1導電層24及び第2導電層26をエッチング処理する。エッチングにより、第1パターン12Aと同じパターンを有する第1導電層24A及び第2導電層26Aが形成される。
[Etching step (first etching step)]
The etching process is performed in the first embodiment, and the first etching process is performed in the second embodiment. An example of the etching process (first etching process) is schematically shown in FIG.
For example, as shown in FIG. 2D, in the etching step (first etching step), at least the first conductive layer 24 and the second conductive layer 26 among the plurality of conductive layers in the region where the first pattern 12A is not disposed are formed. Etching process. By etching, a first conductive layer 24A and a second conductive layer 26A having the same pattern as the first pattern 12A are formed.
 導電層のエッチングは、特開2010-152155号公報の段落0048~段落0054等に記載の方法、公知のプラズマエッチング等のドライエッチングによる方法など、公知の方法でエッチングを適用することができる。 Etching of the conductive layer can be performed by a known method such as a method described in paragraphs 0048 to 0054 of JP 2010-152155 A or a dry etching method such as a known plasma etching.
 例えば、エッチングの方法としては、一般的に行われている、エッチング液に浸漬するウェットエッチング法が挙げられる。ウェットエッチングに用いられるエッチング液は、エッチングの対象に合わせて酸性タイプ又はアルカリ性タイプのエッチング液を適宜選択すればよい。
 酸性タイプのエッチング液としては、塩酸、硫酸、フッ酸、リン酸等の酸性成分単独の水溶液、酸性成分と、塩化第二鉄、フッ化アンモニウム、過マンガン酸カリウム等の塩との混合水溶液等が例示される。酸性成分は、複数の酸性成分を組み合わせた成分を使用してもよい。
 アルカリ性タイプのエッチング液としては、水酸化ナトリウム、水酸化カリウム、アンモニア、有機アミン、テトラメチルアンモニウムハイドロオキサイドのような有機アミンの塩等のアルカリ成分単独の水溶液、アルカリ成分と過マンガン酸カリウム等の塩との混合水溶液等が例示される。アルカリ成分は、複数のアルカリ成分を組み合わせた成分を使用してもよい。
For example, as an etching method, a commonly performed wet etching method in which the substrate is immersed in an etching solution can be used. As an etchant used for wet etching, an acid type or alkaline type etchant may be appropriately selected in accordance with an object to be etched.
Acidic etching solutions include aqueous solutions of acidic components such as hydrochloric acid, sulfuric acid, hydrofluoric acid, and phosphoric acid, mixed aqueous solutions of acidic components and salts such as ferric chloride, ammonium fluoride, and potassium permanganate. Is exemplified. As the acidic component, a component obtained by combining a plurality of acidic components may be used.
Examples of alkaline type etchants include aqueous solutions of alkali components such as sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, ammonia, organic amines, salts of organic amines such as tetramethylammonium hydroxide, alkaline components and potassium permanganate. Examples thereof include a mixed aqueous solution with a salt. As the alkali component, a component obtained by combining a plurality of alkali components may be used.
 エッチング液の温度は特に限定されないが、45℃以下であることが好ましい。本実施形態でエッチングマスク(エッチングパターン)として使用される第1パターンは、45℃以下の温度域における酸性及びアルカリ性のエッチング液に対して特に優れた耐性を発揮することが好ましい。したがって、エッチング工程中に感光性樹脂層が剥離することが防止され、感光性樹脂層の存在しない部分が選択的にエッチングされることになる。 The temperature of the etching solution is not particularly limited, but is preferably 45 ° C. or lower. The first pattern used as an etching mask (etching pattern) in the present embodiment preferably exhibits particularly excellent resistance to acidic and alkaline etching solutions in a temperature range of 45 ° C. or lower. Therefore, the photosensitive resin layer is prevented from being peeled off during the etching process, and a portion where the photosensitive resin layer does not exist is selectively etched.
 エッチング工程後、工程ラインの汚染を防ぐために、必要に応じて洗浄工程及び乾燥工程を行ってもよい。洗浄工程については、例えば常温で純水により10秒~300秒間基板を洗浄して行い、乾燥工程については、例えばエアブローを使用し、エアブロー圧(好ましくは0.1kg/cm~5kg/cm程度)を適宜調整して乾燥を行えばよい。 After the etching process, a cleaning process and a drying process may be performed as necessary to prevent contamination of the process line. The cleaning process is performed by cleaning the substrate with pure water for 10 seconds to 300 seconds at room temperature, for example, and the drying process is performed using an air blow, for example, with an air blow pressure (preferably 0.1 kg / cm 2 to 5 kg / cm 2). The degree of drying may be appropriately adjusted.
[第2露光工程]
 上記第2の実施態様においては第2露光工程が行われる。第2露光工程の一例を、図2(e)に概略的に示した。
 例えば図2(e)のように、第1エッチング工程後、第1エッチング工程後の第1パターン12Aを第1パターンとは異なるパターンでパターン露光する。
[Second exposure step]
In the second embodiment, the second exposure process is performed. An example of the second exposure step is schematically shown in FIG.
For example, as shown in FIG. 2E, after the first etching step, the first pattern 12A after the first etching step is subjected to pattern exposure with a pattern different from the first pattern.
 第2露光工程では、第1導電層上に残存する第1パターンに対し、後述する第2現像工程において少なくとも第1導電層の除去すべき部分に相当する箇所を露光する。
 第2露光工程におけるパターン露光は、第1露光工程で用いたマスク(例えば図2(b)に示されるようなマスク30)とはパターンが異なるマスク(例えば図2(e)に示されるようなマスク40)を用いること以外は第1露光工程におけるパターン露光と同じ方法を適用することができる。
In the second exposure step, the first pattern remaining on the first conductive layer is exposed to at least a portion corresponding to a portion to be removed in the second development step described later.
The pattern exposure in the second exposure process is different from the mask used in the first exposure process (for example, the mask 30 as shown in FIG. 2B) (for example, as shown in FIG. 2E). The same method as the pattern exposure in the first exposure step can be applied except that the mask 40) is used.
[第2現像工程]
 上記第2の実施態様においては第2現像工程が行われる。第2現像工程の一例を、図2(f)に概略的に示した。
 例えば図2(f)のように、第2現像工程では、第2露光工程後の第1パターン12Aを現像して第2パターン12Bを形成する。
 現像により、第1パターンのうち第2露光工程において露光された部分が除去される。
 なお、第2現像工程では、第1現像工程における現像と同じ方法を適用することができる。
[Second development step]
In the second embodiment, the second development step is performed. An example of the second developing process is schematically shown in FIG.
For example, as shown in FIG. 2F, in the second development step, the first pattern 12A after the second exposure step is developed to form the second pattern 12B.
By the development, the exposed portion of the first pattern in the second exposure step is removed.
In the second development step, the same method as the development in the first development step can be applied.
[第2エッチング工程]
 上記第2の実施態様においては第2露光工程が行われる。第2エッチング工程の一例を、図2(g)に概略的に示した。
 例えば図2(g)のように、第2エッチング工程では、第2パターン12Bが配置されていない領域における複数の導電層のうち少なくとも第1導電層24Aをエッチング処理する。
[Second etching step]
In the second embodiment, the second exposure process is performed. An example of the second etching step is schematically shown in FIG.
For example, as shown in FIG. 2G, in the second etching step, at least the first conductive layer 24A is etched among the plurality of conductive layers in the region where the second pattern 12B is not disposed.
 第2エッチング工程におけるエッチングは、エッチングにより除去すべき導電層に応じたエッチング液を選択すること以外は第1エッチング工程におけるエッチングと同じ方法を適用することができる。
 第2エッチング工程では、所望のパターンに応じて、第1エッチング工程よりも少ない導電層を選択的にエッチングすることが好ましい。例えば、図2に示すように、感光性樹脂層が配置されていない領域において第1導電層24Aのみを選択的にエッチングするエッチング液を用いてエッチングを行うことで、第1導電層を第2導電層のパターンとは異なるパターンにすることができる。
 第2エッチング工程の終了後、少なくとも2種類のパターンの導電層24B及び26Aを含む回路配線が形成される。
For the etching in the second etching step, the same method as the etching in the first etching step can be applied except that an etching solution corresponding to the conductive layer to be removed by etching is selected.
In the second etching step, it is preferable to selectively etch fewer conductive layers than in the first etching step, depending on the desired pattern. For example, as shown in FIG. 2, the first conductive layer is removed by etching using an etchant that selectively etches only the first conductive layer 24 </ b> A in a region where the photosensitive resin layer is not disposed. The pattern can be different from the pattern of the conductive layer.
After the second etching step is completed, circuit wiring including conductive layers 24B and 26A having at least two types of patterns is formed.
[感光性樹脂層除去工程]
 感光性樹脂層除去工程の一例を、図2(h)に概略的に示した。
 第2エッチング工程の終了後、第1導電層24B上の一部には第2パターン12Bが残存している。感光性樹脂層が不要であれば、残存する全ての感光性樹脂層の第2パターン12Bを除去すればよい。
[Photosensitive resin layer removal step]
An example of the photosensitive resin layer removing step is schematically shown in FIG.
After the second etching step, the second pattern 12B remains on a part of the first conductive layer 24B. If the photosensitive resin layer is unnecessary, the second pattern 12B of all remaining photosensitive resin layers may be removed.
 残存する感光性樹脂層を除去する方法としては特に制限はないが、薬品処理により除去する方法を挙げることができる。
 感光性樹脂層の除去方法としては、好ましくは30℃~80℃、より好ましくは50℃~80℃にて撹拌中の剥離液に感光性樹脂層などを有する基材を1分~30分間浸漬する方法が挙げられる。
Although there is no restriction | limiting in particular as a method of removing the remaining photosensitive resin layer, The method of removing by chemical processing can be mentioned.
As a method for removing the photosensitive resin layer, the substrate having the photosensitive resin layer and the like is immersed in a stripping solution that is preferably stirred at 30 ° C. to 80 ° C., more preferably 50 ° C. to 80 ° C. for 1 minute to 30 minutes. The method of doing is mentioned.
 剥離液としては、例えば、水酸化ナトリウム、水酸化カリウム等の無機アルカリ成分、又は、第1級アミン、第2級アミン、第3級アミン、第4級アンモニウム塩等の有機アルカリ成分を、水、ジメチルスルホキシド、N-メチルピロリドン又はこれらの混合溶液に溶解させた剥離液が挙げられる。剥離液を使用し、スプレー法、シャワー法、パドル法等により剥離してもよい。 Examples of the stripping solution include inorganic alkali components such as sodium hydroxide and potassium hydroxide, or organic alkali components such as primary amine, secondary amine, tertiary amine, and quaternary ammonium salt. , A stripping solution dissolved in dimethyl sulfoxide, N-methylpyrrolidone or a mixed solution thereof. A stripping solution may be used and stripped by a spray method, a shower method, a paddle method, or the like.
 本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、他の任意の工程を含んでもよい。例えば、以下のような工程が挙げられるが、これらの工程に限定されない。 The circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure may include other optional steps. For example, although the following processes are mentioned, it is not limited to these processes.
[保護フィルムを貼り付ける工程]
 上記第2の実施態様において、第1エッチング工程の後、第2露光工程の前に、第1パターン上に、光透過性を有する保護フィルム(不図示)を貼り付ける工程を更に有してもよい。
 この場合、第2露光工程において、保護フィルムを介して第1パターンをパターン露光し、第2露光工程後、第1パターンから保護フィルムを剥離した後、第2現像工程を行うことが好ましい。
[Process of attaching protective film]
The second embodiment may further include a step of attaching a light-transmitting protective film (not shown) on the first pattern after the first etching step and before the second exposure step. Good.
In this case, it is preferable that in the second exposure step, the first pattern is subjected to pattern exposure via the protective film, and after the second exposure step, the protective film is peeled off from the first pattern, and then the second development step is performed.
[可視光線反射率を低下させる工程]
 本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、基材上の複数の導電層の一部又は全ての可視光線反射率を低下させる処理をする工程を含むことが可能である。
 可視光線反射率を低下させる処理としては、酸化処理などを挙げることができる。例えば、銅を酸化処理して酸化銅とすることで、黒化することにより、可視光線反射率を低下させることができる。
 可視光線反射率を低下させる処理の好ましい態様については、特開2014-150118号公報の段落0017~段落0025、並びに、特開2013-206315号公報の段落0041、段落0042、段落0048及び段落0058に記載があり、この公報の内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
[Step of reducing visible light reflectance]
The manufacturing method of the circuit wiring which concerns on this indication can include the process of reducing the visible light reflectance of some or all of the some conductive layers on a base material.
Examples of the treatment for reducing the visible light reflectance include an oxidation treatment. For example, the visible light reflectance can be reduced by blackening the copper by oxidizing copper.
Regarding preferred embodiments of the treatment for reducing the visible light reflectance, paragraphs 0017 to 0025 of JP2014-150118A, and paragraphs 0041, 0042, 0048 and 0058 of JP2013-206315A are described. The contents of this publication are incorporated herein.
[絶縁膜上に新たな導電層を形成する工程]
 本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、形成した回路配線上に絶縁膜を形成する工程と、絶縁膜上に新たな導電層を形成する工程を含むことも好ましい。
 このような構成により、上述の第二の電極パターンを、第一の電極パターンと絶縁しつつ、形成することができる。
 絶縁膜を形成する工程については、特に制限はなく、公知の永久膜を形成する方法を挙げることができる。また、絶縁性を有する感光性材料を用いて、フォトリソグラフィにより所望のパターンの絶縁膜を形成してもよい。
 絶縁膜上に新たな導電層を形成する工程については、特に制限はない。導電性を有する感光性材料を用いて、フォトリソグラフィにより所望のパターンの新たな導電層を形成してもよい。
[Step of forming a new conductive layer on the insulating film]
The method for manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure preferably includes a step of forming an insulating film on the formed circuit wiring and a step of forming a new conductive layer on the insulating film.
With such a configuration, the above-described second electrode pattern can be formed while being insulated from the first electrode pattern.
There is no restriction | limiting in particular about the process of forming an insulating film, The method of forming a well-known permanent film can be mentioned. Alternatively, an insulating film having a desired pattern may be formed by photolithography using a photosensitive material having insulating properties.
There is no particular limitation on the process of forming a new conductive layer on the insulating film. A new conductive layer having a desired pattern may be formed by photolithography using a photosensitive material having conductivity.
 また、図2を参照した説明では、2層の導電層を備えた回路配線形成用基板に対して2つの異なるパターンを有する回路配線を形成する場合について説明したが、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法を適用する基板の導電層の数は2層に限定されず、導電層が3層以上積層された回路配線形成用基板を用い、前述した露光工程、現像工程、及びエッチング工程の組み合わせを3回以上行うことで、3層以上の導電層をそれぞれ異なる回路配線パターンに形成することもできる。 Further, in the description with reference to FIG. 2, the case where the circuit wiring having two different patterns is formed on the circuit wiring forming substrate including the two conductive layers has been described. The number of conductive layers of the substrate to which the manufacturing method is applied is not limited to two layers, and a circuit wiring forming substrate in which three or more conductive layers are stacked is used, and the combination of the exposure step, the development step, and the etching step described above is used. By performing it three times or more, three or more conductive layers can be formed in different circuit wiring patterns.
 また、図2には示していないが、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、基材が両方の表面にそれぞれ複数の導電層を有し、基材の両方の表面に形成された導電層に対して逐次又は同時に回路形成することも好ましい。このような構成により、基材の一方の表面に第一の導電パターン、もう一方の表面に第二の導電パターンを形成したタッチパネル用回路配線を形成することができる。また、このような構成のタッチパネル用回路配線を、ロールツーロールで基材の両面から形成することも好ましい。 Moreover, although not shown in FIG. 2, the manufacturing method of the circuit wiring which concerns on this indication WHEREIN: The base material has a some conductive layer in both surfaces, respectively, and the conductive layer formed in both surfaces of the base material It is also preferable to form circuits sequentially or simultaneously. With such a configuration, it is possible to form a circuit wiring for a touch panel in which a first conductive pattern is formed on one surface of the substrate and a second conductive pattern is formed on the other surface. Moreover, it is also preferable to form the circuit wiring for touch panels of such a structure from both surfaces of a base material by roll-to-roll.
<回路配線及び回路基板>
 本開示に係る回路配線は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法により製造された回路配線である。
 本開示に係る回路基板は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法により製造された回路配線を有する基板である。
 本開示に係る回路基板の用途は限定されないが、例えば、タッチパネル用回路基板であることが好ましい。
<Circuit wiring and circuit board>
The circuit wiring according to the present disclosure is a circuit wiring manufactured by the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure.
The circuit board according to the present disclosure is a substrate having circuit wiring manufactured by the method for manufacturing circuit wiring according to the present disclosure.
Although the use of the circuit board concerning this indication is not limited, for example, it is preferred that it is a circuit board for touch panels.
<入力装置及び表示装置>
 本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法により製造される回路配線を備えた装置として、入力装置が挙げられる。
 本実施形態における入力装置は、静電容量型タッチパネルであることが好ましい。
 本実施形態における表示装置は、本実施形態における入力装置を備えることが好ましい。本実施形態における表示装置は、有機EL表示装置、及び、液晶表示装置等の画像表示装置であることが好ましい。
<Input device and display device>
An input device is mentioned as an apparatus provided with the circuit wiring manufactured by the manufacturing method of the circuit wiring concerning this indication.
The input device in the present embodiment is preferably a capacitive touch panel.
The display device in the present embodiment preferably includes the input device in the present embodiment. The display device in the present embodiment is preferably an image display device such as an organic EL display device and a liquid crystal display device.
<タッチパネル、及び、タッチパネル表示装置並びにこれらの製造方法>
 本開示に係るタッチパネルは、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法により製造された回路配線を少なくとも有するタッチパネルである。また、本開示に係るタッチパネルは、透明基板と、電極と、絶縁層又は保護層とを少なくとも有することが好ましい。
 本開示に係るタッチパネル表示装置は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法により製造された回路配線を少なくとも有するタッチパネル表示装置であり、本開示に係るタッチパネルを有するタッチパネル表示装置であることが好ましい。
 本開示に係るタッチパネル又はタッチパネル表示装置の製造方法は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法を含むことが好ましい。
 本開示に係るタッチパネル又はタッチパネル表示装置の製造方法は、感光性転写材料の製造方法により得られた感光性転写材料の、仮支持体の感光性樹脂層側の最外層を貼り合わせる工程と、上記貼り合わせる工程後の上記感光性転写材料の上記感光性層をパターン露光する工程と、上記パターン露光する工程後の感光性層を現像してパターンを形成する工程と、上記パターンが配置されていない領域における基板をエッチング処理する工程と、をこの順に含むことが好ましい。各工程の詳細は、上述の回路配線の製造方法における各工程の詳細と同義であり、好ましい態様も同様である。
 本開示に係るタッチパネル及び本開示に係るタッチパネル表示装置のおける検出方法としては、抵抗膜方式、静電容量方式、超音波方式、電磁誘導方式、及び、光学方式など公知の方式いずれでもよい。中でも、静電容量方式が好ましい。
 タッチパネル型としては、例えば、いわゆる、インセル型(例えば、特表2012-517051号公報の図5、図6、図7、図8に記載のもの)、いわゆる、オンセル型(例えば、特開2013-168125号公報の図19に記載のもの、特開2012-89102号公報の図1及び図5に記載のもの)、OGS(One Glass Solution)型、TOL(Touch-on-Lens)型(例えば、特開2013-54727号公報の図2に記載のもの)、その他の構成(例えば、特開2013-164871号公報の図6に記載のもの)、及び各種アウトセル型(いわゆる、GG、G1・G2、GFF、GF2、GF1、G1Fなど)を挙げることができる。
 本実施形態のタッチパネル及び本実施形態のタッチパネル表示装置としては、『最新タッチパネル技術』(2009年7月6日、(株)テクノタイムズ社発行)、三谷雄二監修、“タッチパネルの技術と開発”、シーエムシー出版(2004,12)、FPD International 2009 Forum T-11講演テキストブック、Cypress Semiconductor Corporation アプリケーションノートAN2292等に開示されている構成を適用することができる。
<Touch panel, touch panel display device and manufacturing method thereof>
The touch panel according to the present disclosure is a touch panel having at least circuit wiring manufactured by the method for manufacturing circuit wiring according to the present disclosure. In addition, the touch panel according to the present disclosure preferably includes at least a transparent substrate, an electrode, and an insulating layer or a protective layer.
The touch panel display device according to the present disclosure is a touch panel display device having at least circuit wiring manufactured by the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure, and is preferably a touch panel display device including the touch panel according to the present disclosure.
The method for manufacturing a touch panel or a touch panel display device according to the present disclosure preferably includes a method for manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure.
The method for manufacturing a touch panel or a touch panel display device according to the present disclosure includes a step of bonding the outermost layer on the photosensitive resin layer side of the temporary support of the photosensitive transfer material obtained by the method for manufacturing a photosensitive transfer material, and the above A pattern exposure step of the photosensitive layer of the photosensitive transfer material after the bonding step, a step of developing the photosensitive layer after the pattern exposure step to form a pattern, and the pattern is not disposed It is preferable to include a process of etching the substrate in the region in this order. The details of each process are synonymous with the details of each process in the above-described circuit wiring manufacturing method, and the preferred embodiments are also the same.
As a detection method in the touch panel according to the present disclosure and the touch panel display device according to the present disclosure, any of known methods such as a resistive film method, a capacitance method, an ultrasonic method, an electromagnetic induction method, and an optical method may be used. Among these, the electrostatic capacity method is preferable.
As the touch panel type, for example, a so-called in-cell type (for example, those described in FIGS. 5, 6, 7 and 8 of JP-T-2012-517051), a so-called on-cell type (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-517051). No. 168125 in FIG. 19, JP 2012-89102 A in FIGS. 1 and 5), OGS (One Glass Solution) type, TOL (Touch-on-Lens) type (for example, JP-A-2013-54727 shown in FIG. 2), other configurations (for example, those shown in FIG. 6 of JP-A-2013-164871), and various out-cell types (so-called GG, G1, G2) , GFF, GF2, GF1, G1F, etc.).
As the touch panel of this embodiment and the touch panel display device of this embodiment, “latest touch panel technology” (July 6, 2009, issued by Techno Times Co., Ltd.), supervised by Yuji Mitani, “Touch Panel Technology and Development”, The configurations disclosed in CM Publishing (2004, 12), FPD International 2009 Forum T-11 Lecture Textbook, Cypress Semiconductor Corporation Application Note AN2292, etc. can be applied.
 以下、実施例により本開示を詳細に説明するが、本開示はこれらに制限されるものではない。なお、特に断りのない限り、「部」、「%」は質量基準である。 Hereinafter, the present disclosure will be described in detail by way of examples, but the present disclosure is not limited thereto. Unless otherwise specified, “part” and “%” are based on mass.
 以下の略号は、それぞれ以下の化合物を表す。
 「ATHF」:2-テトラヒドロフラニルアクリレート(合成品)(式(A1)で表される構成単位を形成するモノマー)
 「MATHF」:2-テトラヒドロフラニルメタクリレート(合成品)(式(A1)で表される構成単位を形成するモノマー)
 「TBMA」:tert-ブチルメタクリレート(東京化成工業(株)製)
 「TBS」:4-tert-ブトキシスチレン(東京化成工業(株)製)
 「AA」:アクリル酸(東京化成工業(株)製)
 「CHA」:アクリル酸シクロヘキシル(東京化成工業(株)製)
 「DMAEMA」:メタクリル酸2-(ジメチルアミノ)エチル(東京化成工業(株)製)
 「EA」:エチルアクリレート(東京化成工業(株)製)
 「MEMA」:メタクリル酸2-モルホリノエチル(東京化成工業(株)製)
 「MMA」:メチルメタクリレート(東京化成工業(株)製)
 「MS」:4-メトキシスチレン(東京化成工業(株)製)
 「PGMEA」:プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート(昭和電工(株)製)
 「PMPMA」:メタクリル酸1,2,2,6,6-ペンタメチル-4-ピペリジル(東京化成工業(株)製)
 「V-601」:ジメチル 2,2’-アゾビス(2-メチルプロピオネート)(和光純薬工業(株)製)
The following abbreviations represent the following compounds, respectively.
“ATHF”: 2-tetrahydrofuranyl acrylate (synthetic product) (monomer forming the structural unit represented by the formula (A1))
“MATHF”: 2-tetrahydrofuranyl methacrylate (synthetic product) (monomer forming the structural unit represented by the formula (A1))
“TBMA”: tert-butyl methacrylate (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
“TBS”: 4-tert-butoxystyrene (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
“AA”: acrylic acid (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
“CHA”: cyclohexyl acrylate (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
“DMAEMA”: 2- (dimethylamino) ethyl methacrylate (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
“EA”: ethyl acrylate (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
“MEMA”: 2-morpholinoethyl methacrylate (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
“MMA”: Methyl methacrylate (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
“MS”: 4-methoxystyrene (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
“PGMEA”: Propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (manufactured by Showa Denko KK)
“PMPMA”: 1,2,2,6,6-pentamethyl-4-piperidyl methacrylate (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
“V-601”: Dimethyl 2,2′-azobis (2-methylpropionate) (manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
<2-テトラヒドロフラニルアクリレートの合成>
 3つ口フラスコにアクリル酸(72.1g、1.0mol)、ヘキサン(72.1g)を加え20℃に冷却した。得られた溶液に、カンファースルホン酸(7.0mg、0.03mmol)、2-ジヒドロフラン(77.9g、1.0mol)を滴下し、20℃±2℃で1.5時間撹拌した後、35℃まで昇温して2時間撹拌した。ヌッチェに、キョーワード200(水酸化アルミニウム吸着剤、協和化学工業(株)製)、次いでキョーワード1000(ハイドロタルサイト系吸着剤、協和化学工業(株)製)を敷き詰めた後、反応液をろ過した。得られたろ液に、ヒドロキノンモノメチルエーテル(1.2mg)を加えた後、40℃で減圧濃縮することによって、2-テトラヒドロフラニルアクリレート(140.8g)を無色油状物として得た(収率99.0%)。
<Synthesis of 2-tetrahydrofuranyl acrylate>
Acrylic acid (72.1 g, 1.0 mol) and hexane (72.1 g) were added to a three-necked flask and cooled to 20 ° C. To the resulting solution, camphorsulfonic acid (7.0 mg, 0.03 mmol) and 2-dihydrofuran (77.9 g, 1.0 mol) were added dropwise and stirred at 20 ° C. ± 2 ° C. for 1.5 hours, It heated up to 35 degreeC and stirred for 2 hours. Kyoward 200 (aluminum hydroxide adsorbent, manufactured by Kyowa Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) and then Kyoward 1000 (hydrotalcite-based adsorbent, manufactured by Kyowa Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) were spread over Nutsche, and then the reaction solution was Filtered. Hydroquinone monomethyl ether (1.2 mg) was added to the obtained filtrate, followed by concentration under reduced pressure at 40 ° C. to obtain 2-tetrahydrofuranyl acrylate (140.8 g) as a colorless oil (yield: 99. 0%).
<2-テトラヒドロフラニルメタクリレートの合成>
 3つ口フラスコにメタクリル酸(86.1g、1.0mol)、ヘキサン(86.1g)を加え20℃に冷却した。得られた溶液に、カンファースルホン酸(7.0mg、0.03mmol)、2-ジヒドロフラン(70.1g、1.0mol)を滴下し、20℃±2℃で1.5時間撹拌した後、35℃まで昇温して2時間撹拌した。ヌッチェにキョーワード200、キョーワード1000をこの順で敷き詰めた後、反応液をろ過した。得られたろ液に、ヒドロキノンモノメチルエーテル(1.2mg)を加えた後、40℃で減圧濃縮することによって、2-テトラヒドロフラニルメタクリレート(156.2g)を無色油状物として得た(収率98.0%)。
<Synthesis of 2-tetrahydrofuranyl methacrylate>
Methacrylic acid (86.1 g, 1.0 mol) and hexane (86.1 g) were added to a three-necked flask and cooled to 20 ° C. To the obtained solution, camphorsulfonic acid (7.0 mg, 0.03 mmol) and 2-dihydrofuran (70.1 g, 1.0 mol) were added dropwise and stirred at 20 ° C. ± 2 ° C. for 1.5 hours, It heated up to 35 degreeC and stirred for 2 hours. After Kyoward 200 and Kyoward 1000 were spread over Nutsche in this order, the reaction solution was filtered. Hydroquinone monomethyl ether (1.2 mg) was added to the obtained filtrate, followed by concentration under reduced pressure at 40 ° C. to obtain 2-tetrahydrofuranyl methacrylate (156.2 g) as a colorless oil (yield 98.98). 0%).
<重合体A-1の合成>
 3つ口フラスコにPGMEA(75.0g)を加え、窒素雰囲気下において90℃に昇温した。90℃±2℃で維持した3つ口フラスコの溶液に、ATHF(25.0g)、CHA(60.0g)、EA(10.0g)、AA(5.0g)、V-601(4.1g)、及びPGMEA(75.0g)を含む溶液を、2時間かけて滴下した。滴下終了後,90℃±2℃にて2時間撹拌することによって、重合体A-1(固形分濃度40.0%)を得た。
<Synthesis of Polymer A-1>
PGMEA (75.0 g) was added to the three-necked flask, and the temperature was raised to 90 ° C. in a nitrogen atmosphere. To a solution in a three-necked flask maintained at 90 ° C. ± 2 ° C., ATHF (25.0 g), CHA (60.0 g), EA (10.0 g), AA (5.0 g), V-601 (4. 1 g) and a solution containing PGMEA (75.0 g) were added dropwise over 2 hours. After completion of the dropping, the mixture was stirred at 90 ° C. ± 2 ° C. for 2 hours to obtain a polymer A-1 (solid content concentration 40.0%).
<重合体A-2~A-11の合成>
 モノマーの種類等を表1に記載のとおりに変更した点以外は、重合体A-1と同様の手順により、重合体A-2~重合体A-11を合成した。各重合体の固形分濃度は40質量%である。
<Synthesis of Polymers A-2 to A-11>
Polymer A-2 to Polymer A-11 were synthesized by the same procedure as for Polymer A-1, except that the monomer type and the like were changed as shown in Table 1. The solid content concentration of each polymer is 40% by mass.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000025
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000025
<実施例1>
[感光性樹脂組成物1の調製]
 下記処方に従い、感光性樹脂組成物1を調製した。
 重合体(A-1):93.9部
 光酸発生剤(B-1):2.0部
 界面活性剤(C-1):0.1部
 アミン化合物(D-2):0.3部
 ベンゾトリアゾール化合物(E-1):0.2部
 PGMEA:900部
<Example 1>
[Preparation of photosensitive resin composition 1]
Photosensitive resin composition 1 was prepared according to the following formulation.
Polymer (A-1): 93.9 parts Photoacid generator (B-1): 2.0 parts Surfactant (C-1): 0.1 part Amine compound (D-2): 0.3 Part Benzotriazole compound (E-1): 0.2 part PGMEA: 900 parts
[感光性転写材料の作製]
 感光性樹脂組成物1を、仮支持体であるポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム(厚さ25μm)の上に、スリット状ノズルを用いて乾燥膜厚が3.0μmとなるように塗布した。100℃のコンベクションオーブンで2分間乾燥した後、カバーフィルムとしてポリエチレンフィルム(トレデガー社製、OSM-N)を圧着することによって、実施例1の感光性転写材料を作製した。
[Production of photosensitive transfer material]
The photosensitive resin composition 1 was applied on a polyethylene terephthalate film (thickness 25 μm), which is a temporary support, using a slit nozzle so that the dry film thickness was 3.0 μm. After drying in a convection oven at 100 ° C. for 2 minutes, a polyethylene film (Tradegar, OSM-N) was pressure-bonded as a cover film to produce the photosensitive transfer material of Example 1.
<比較例1及び3>
 感光性樹脂組成物1の各成分を表2の記載に従って変更した感光性樹脂組成物1a及び3aを用いた点以外は、実施例1と同様の手順により、比較例1、3の感光性転写材料をそれぞれ作製した。
<Comparative Examples 1 and 3>
Photosensitive transfer of Comparative Examples 1 and 3 in the same procedure as in Example 1 except that the photosensitive resin compositions 1a and 3a were used in which the components of the photosensitive resin composition 1 were changed according to the description in Table 2. Each material was made.
<実施例2>
[感光性樹脂組成物2の調製]
 下記処方に従い、感光性樹脂組成物2を調製した。
 重合体(A-1):93.9部
 光酸発生剤(B-1):2.0部
 界面活性剤(C-1):0.1部
 アミン化合物(D-1):0.3部
 ベンゾトリアゾール化合物(E-1):0.2部
 PGMEA:900部
<Example 2>
[Preparation of photosensitive resin composition 2]
Photosensitive resin composition 2 was prepared according to the following formulation.
Polymer (A-1): 93.9 parts Photoacid generator (B-1): 2.0 parts Surfactant (C-1): 0.1 part Amine compound (D-1): 0.3 Part Benzotriazole compound (E-1): 0.2 part PGMEA: 900 parts
[中間層用組成物1の調製]
 以下の処方に従い、中間層用組成物1を調製した。
 蒸留水:13.4部
 メタノール:75.6部
 ヒドロキシプロピルメチルセルロース(商品名:TC-5、信越化学工業(株)製):4.1部
[Preparation of composition 1 for intermediate layer]
The intermediate layer composition 1 was prepared according to the following formulation.
Distilled water: 13.4 parts Methanol: 75.6 parts Hydroxypropyl methylcellulose (trade name: TC-5, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.): 4.1 parts
[感光性転写材料の作製]
 中間層用組成物1を、仮支持体であるポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム(厚さ25μm)の上に、乾燥膜厚が2.0μmとなるようにスリットコートした後、100℃のコンベクションオーブンで2分間乾燥した。次に、感光性樹脂組成物2を、この中間層上に、スリット状ノズルを用いて乾燥膜厚が3.0μmとなるように塗布した。100℃のコンベクションオーブンで2分間乾燥した後、カバーフィルムとしてポリエチレンフィルム(トレデガー社製、OSM-N)を圧着することによって、実施例2の感光性転写材料を作製した。
[Production of photosensitive transfer material]
The intermediate layer composition 1 is slit coated on a polyethylene terephthalate film (thickness 25 μm) as a temporary support so that the dry film thickness becomes 2.0 μm, and then dried in a convection oven at 100 ° C. for 2 minutes. did. Next, the photosensitive resin composition 2 was applied on the intermediate layer using a slit-like nozzle so that the dry film thickness was 3.0 μm. After drying in a convection oven at 100 ° C. for 2 minutes, a photosensitive transfer material of Example 2 was produced by pressure-bonding a polyethylene film (OSM-N, manufactured by Tredegar) as a cover film.
<実施例3~6>
 感光性樹脂組成物2の各成分を表2の記載に従って変更した感光性樹脂組成物3~6を用いた点以外は、実施例2と同様の手順により、実施例3~6の感光性転写材料をそれぞれ作製した。
<Examples 3 to 6>
The photosensitive transfer compositions of Examples 3 to 6 were prepared in the same manner as in Example 2 except that the photosensitive resin compositions 3 to 6 were used in which the components of the photosensitive resin composition 2 were changed according to the description in Table 2. Each material was made.
<実施例7>
 感光性樹脂組成物2を下記の感光性樹脂組成物7に変更した点、及び中間層用組成物1を下記の中間層用組成物2に変更した点以外は、実施例2と同様の手順により、実施例7の感光性転写材料を作製した。
<Example 7>
The same procedure as in Example 2 except that the photosensitive resin composition 2 was changed to the following photosensitive resin composition 7 and the intermediate layer composition 1 was changed to the following intermediate layer composition 2. Thus, a photosensitive transfer material of Example 7 was produced.
[感光性樹脂組成物7の調製]
 以下の処方で調合し、孔径0.2μmのポリテトラフルオロエチレン製フィルターで濾過することで、感光性樹脂組成物7を調製した。
 重合体(A-4):93.9部
 光酸発生剤(B-1):2.0部
 界面活性剤(C-2):0.1部
 ベンゾトリアゾール化合物(E-1):0.2部
 PGMEA:900部
[Preparation of photosensitive resin composition 7]
The photosensitive resin composition 7 was prepared by preparing with the following prescription and filtering with a filter made of polytetrafluoroethylene having a pore diameter of 0.2 μm.
Polymer (A-4): 93.9 parts Photoacid generator (B-1): 2.0 parts Surfactant (C-2): 0.1 part Benzotriazole compound (E-1): 0. 2 parts PGMEA: 900 parts
[中間層用組成物2の調製]
 以下の処方で中間層用組成物2を調製した。
 蒸留水:13.4部
 メタノール:75.6部
 ヒドロキシメチルセルロース(商品名:HPC-SSL、日本曹達(株)製):4.1部
 スノーテックスO(日産化学工業(株)製):68.5部
[Preparation of intermediate layer composition 2]
An intermediate layer composition 2 was prepared according to the following formulation.
Distilled water: 13.4 parts Methanol: 75.6 parts Hydroxymethylcellulose (trade name: HPC-SSL, manufactured by Nippon Soda Co., Ltd.): 4.1 parts Snowtex O (manufactured by Nissan Chemical Industries, Ltd.): 68. 5 copies
<実施例8~15、並びに比較例2及び4~10>
 感光性樹脂組成物7の各成分を表2の記載従って変更した、感光性樹脂組成物8~15、並びに感光性樹脂組成物2a及び4a~10aを用いた点以外は、実施例7と同様の手順により、実施例8~15、並びに比較例2、及び4~10の感光性転写材料をそれぞれ作製した。
<Examples 8 to 15 and Comparative Examples 2 and 4 to 10>
Each component of the photosensitive resin composition 7 was changed in accordance with the description in Table 2, except that the photosensitive resin compositions 8 to 15 and the photosensitive resin compositions 2a and 4a to 10a were used. The photosensitive transfer materials of Examples 8 to 15 and Comparative Examples 2 and 4 to 10 were prepared by the above procedure.
<実施例16>
 使用するベンゾトリアゾール化合物の量を1.0部に変更した点以外は、実施例7と同様の手順により、実施例16の感光性転写材料を作製した。
<Example 16>
A photosensitive transfer material of Example 16 was produced in the same manner as in Example 7 except that the amount of the benzotriazole compound used was changed to 1.0 part.
<実施例17>
 使用するベンゾトリアゾール化合物の量を2.0部に変更した点以外は、実施例7と同様の手順により、実施例17の感光性転写材料を作製した。
<Example 17>
A photosensitive transfer material of Example 17 was produced in the same manner as in Example 7, except that the amount of the benzotriazole compound used was changed to 2.0 parts.
<実施例18>
[中間層用組成物3の調製]
 以下の処方で中間層用組成物3を調製した。
 蒸留水:13.4部
 メタノール:75.6部
 ヒドロキシメチルセルロース(商品名:HPC-SSL、日本曹達(株)製):4.1部
 スノーテックスXL(日産化学工業(株)製):68.5部
<Example 18>
[Preparation of composition 3 for intermediate layer]
An intermediate layer composition 3 was prepared according to the following formulation.
Distilled water: 13.4 parts Methanol: 75.6 parts Hydroxymethylcellulose (trade name: HPC-SSL, manufactured by Nippon Soda Co., Ltd.): 4.1 parts Snowtex XL (manufactured by Nissan Chemical Industries, Ltd.): 68. 5 copies
[感光性転写材料の作製]
 中間層用組成物1を、仮支持体であるポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム(厚さ25μm)の上に、乾燥膜厚が2.0μmとなるようにスリットコートした後、100℃のコンベクションオーブンで2分間乾燥した。次に、中間層形成用組成物3を乾燥膜厚2.0μmとなるようにスリットコートした後、100℃のコンベクションオーブンで2分間乾燥した。次に、感光性樹脂組成物7を、この中間層上に、スリット状ノズルを用いて乾燥膜厚が3.0μmとなるように塗布した。100℃のコンベクションオーブンで2分間乾燥した後、カバーフィルムとしてポリエチレンフィルム(トレデガー社製、OSM-N)を圧着することによって、実施例18の感光性転写材料を作製した。
[Production of photosensitive transfer material]
The intermediate layer composition 1 is slit coated on a polyethylene terephthalate film (thickness 25 μm) as a temporary support so that the dry film thickness becomes 2.0 μm, and then dried in a convection oven at 100 ° C. for 2 minutes. did. Next, the intermediate layer forming composition 3 was slit coated so as to have a dry film thickness of 2.0 μm, and then dried in a convection oven at 100 ° C. for 2 minutes. Next, the photosensitive resin composition 7 was applied onto the intermediate layer using a slit nozzle so that the dry film thickness was 3.0 μm. After drying in a convection oven at 100 ° C. for 2 minutes, a photosensitive transfer material of Example 18 was produced by pressure-bonding a polyethylene film (Tradegar, OSM-N) as a cover film.
<評価>
 実施例1~18、及び比較例1~10の感光性転写材料を用いて、転写性、形状再現性、濡れ性、直線性について評価した。評価の結果を、まとめて表2に示す。
 なお、以下の評価では、厚さ188μmのポリエチレンテレフタレート(PET)フィルム上に、スパッタ法により形成された厚さ500nmの銅層を有するPET基板(以下、「銅層付きPET基板」と称する。)を使用した。
<Evaluation>
Using the photosensitive transfer materials of Examples 1 to 18 and Comparative Examples 1 to 10, transferability, shape reproducibility, wettability, and linearity were evaluated. Table 2 summarizes the results of the evaluation.
In the following evaluation, a PET substrate having a copper layer with a thickness of 500 nm formed by sputtering on a polyethylene terephthalate (PET) film having a thickness of 188 μm (hereinafter referred to as “PET substrate with a copper layer”). It was used.
[転写性]
 感光性転写材料を50cm角にカットし、試料片とした。次いでカバーフィルムを剥がした後、ロール温度90℃、線圧0.6MPa、線速度(ラミネート速度)3.6m/min.のラミネート条件で、感光性転写材料を銅層付きPET基板の銅層表面に貼り合わせて積層体とした。銅層表面における感光性樹脂層の付着部分を目視にて判別し、銅層表面における感光性樹脂層の付着部分を、仮支持体の上から油性マジックを用いてマーキングし、PET基板全体を撮影した。得られた画像から、画像解析ソフト(ImageJ(米国 National Instisute of Health社製))を用いて、銅層表面における感光性樹脂層の付着面積と試料片全体の面積をそれぞれ算出した。そして、下記式より面積比を求め、以下の評価基準にしたがって評価した。
 面積比(%)=(感光性樹脂層の付着面積/試料片全体の面積)×100
  5:95%以上
  4:90%以上95%未満
  3:85%以上90%未満
  2:80%以上85%未満
  1:80%未満
[Transferability]
The photosensitive transfer material was cut into a 50 cm square to obtain a sample piece. Next, after the cover film was peeled off, the roll temperature was 90 ° C., the linear pressure was 0.6 MPa, and the linear velocity (laminate velocity) was 3.6 m / min. Under the laminating conditions, the photosensitive transfer material was bonded to the surface of the copper layer of the PET substrate with a copper layer to obtain a laminate. The adhesion part of the photosensitive resin layer on the surface of the copper layer is visually discriminated, and the adhesion part of the photosensitive resin layer on the surface of the copper layer is marked with an oily magic on the temporary support, and the entire PET substrate is photographed. did. From the obtained image, the adhesion area of the photosensitive resin layer on the surface of the copper layer and the area of the entire sample piece were calculated using image analysis software (ImageJ (manufactured by National Institute of Health, USA)). And area ratio was calculated | required from the following formula and evaluated according to the following evaluation criteria.
Area ratio (%) = (Attached area of photosensitive resin layer / Area of entire sample piece) × 100
5: 95% or more 4: 90% or more and less than 95% 3: 85% or more and less than 90% 2: 80% or more and less than 85% 1: less than 80%
[形状再現性]
 カバーフィルムを剥がした後、線圧0.6MPa、線速度(ラミネート速度)3.6m/minのラミネート条件で、感光性転写材料を銅層付きPET基板の銅層表面に貼り合わせて積層体とした。なお、ロール温度90℃で上記転写性が4以下の場合、転写性が5になるまでロール温度を上げて積層体を作製した。その後、積層体をオートクレーブで加圧した。加圧条件は、50℃、3時間、0.6MPaである。仮支持体を剥離せずに、線幅10μmのラインアンドスペースパターン(Duty比 1:1)マスクを介して超高圧水銀灯で積層体を露光後、5時間引き置いて仮支持体を剥離し、現像した。露光においては、ライン幅とスペース幅の比が1:1になる露光量を求め、その露光量で積層体を露光した。現像においては、28℃の1.0%炭酸ナトリウム水溶液を用い、シャワー現像を40秒行った。以上の手順により、ラインアンドスペースが10μmの樹脂パターンを有する試料を作製した。得られた試料の樹脂パターンの形態をSEM(走査型電子顕微鏡、倍率20000倍。)で観察し、下記基準を指標として形状再現性を評価した。2以上が実用可能レベルである。
  3:裾切れの良い樹脂パターンが得られた。
  2:わずかに裾のある樹脂パターンが得られた。
  1:裾の長い樹脂パターンが得られた、又は裾が長くて解像できずに樹脂パターン同士が繋がった。
[Shape reproducibility]
After peeling off the cover film, the laminate was prepared by laminating the photosensitive transfer material on the surface of the copper layer of the PET substrate with the copper layer under the laminating conditions of a linear pressure of 0.6 MPa and a linear velocity (laminate velocity) of 3.6 m / min. did. When the transferability was 4 or less at a roll temperature of 90 ° C., the roll temperature was raised until the transferability was 5, and a laminate was produced. Thereafter, the laminate was pressurized with an autoclave. The pressing condition is 50 MPa, 3 hours, and 0.6 MPa. Without peeling off the temporary support, the laminated body was exposed with an ultra-high pressure mercury lamp through a line and space pattern (duty ratio 1: 1) mask with a line width of 10 μm, and then left for 5 hours to peel off the temporary support. Developed. In the exposure, an exposure amount at which the ratio of the line width to the space width was 1: 1 was determined, and the laminate was exposed with the exposure amount. In the development, a 1.0% sodium carbonate aqueous solution at 28 ° C. was used, and shower development was performed for 40 seconds. By the above procedure, a sample having a resin pattern with a line and space of 10 μm was produced. The form of the resin pattern of the obtained sample was observed by SEM (scanning electron microscope, magnification 20000 times), and shape reproducibility was evaluated using the following criteria as an index. Two or more are practical levels.
3: A resin pattern with a good hem was obtained.
2: A slightly skirted resin pattern was obtained.
1: A resin pattern with a long skirt was obtained, or the resin pattern was connected without resolution because the skirt was long.
[濡れ性]
 上記形状再現性の評価において作製した試料を、銅エッチング液(Cu-02:関東化学(株)製)に25℃で5分間浸漬した。銅層のエッチング状態を目視で確認し、下記基準を指標として濡れ性を評価した。3が実用可能レベルである。
  3:正常に銅層がエッチングできている。
  2:一部濡れの悪い領域があり、一部の銅層しかエッチングできていない。
  1:濡れが悪く、銅層がエッチングできていない。
[Wettability]
The sample prepared in the evaluation of the shape reproducibility was immersed in a copper etching solution (Cu-02: manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.) at 25 ° C. for 5 minutes. The etching state of the copper layer was visually confirmed, and the wettability was evaluated using the following criteria as an index. 3 is a practical level.
3: The copper layer has been etched normally.
2: There is an area with poor wettability, and only a part of the copper layer can be etched.
1: Wetting is poor and the copper layer cannot be etched.
[直線性]
 上記形状再現性の評価において作製した試料を、銅エッチング液(Cu-02:関東化学(株)社製)を用いて23℃で30秒エッチングした後、PGMEAを用いてレジスト剥離することで、ラインアンドスペースが10μmの導電パターンを有する銅配線を形成した。銅配線のLWR(Line Width Roughness、銅配線の線幅を250点計測した値の3σ)を求め、下記基準を指標にして直線性を評価した。3以上が実用可能レベルである。
  5:LWRが160nm未満である。
  4:LWRが160nm以上200nm未満である。
  3:LWRが200nm以上250nm未満である。
  2:LWRが250nm以上300nm未満である。
  1:LWRが300nm以上、又は導電パターンが形成できなかった。
[Linearity]
The sample prepared in the evaluation of the shape reproducibility was etched at 23 ° C. for 30 seconds using a copper etching solution (Cu-02: manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.), and then the resist was peeled off using PGMEA. A copper wiring having a conductive pattern with a line and space of 10 μm was formed. The copper wiring LWR (Line Width Roughness, 3σ of a value obtained by measuring the width of the copper wiring at 250 points) was obtained, and the linearity was evaluated using the following criteria as an index. Three or more are practical levels.
5: LWR is less than 160 nm.
4: LWR is 160 nm or more and less than 200 nm.
3: LWR is 200 nm or more and less than 250 nm.
2: LWR is 250 nm or more and less than 300 nm.
1: LWR was 300 nm or more, or a conductive pattern could not be formed.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000026
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000026
<光酸発生剤>
 B-1:下記に示す構造の化合物を、特開2013-047765号公報の段落0204に記載の方法に従って合成した。
<Photo acid generator>
B-1: A compound having the structure shown below was synthesized according to the method described in paragraph 0204 of JP2013-047765A.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027
 B-2:下記の構造を有する化合物(PAG-103、BASF社製) B-2: Compound having the following structure (PAG-103, manufactured by BASF)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
<界面活性剤>
 C-1:下記の構造を有する化合物
<Surfactant>
C-1: Compound having the following structure
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000029
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000029
 C-2:メガファックF552(DIC社製) C-2: Megafuck F552 (manufactured by DIC)
<アミン化合物>
 D-1:下記に示す構造を有する化合物
<Amine compound>
D-1: Compound having the structure shown below
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030
 D-2:トリオクチルアミン D-2: Trioctylamine
<ベンゾトリアゾール化合物>
 E-1:下記に示す構造を有する化合物(1,2,3-ベンゾトリアゾール)
<Benzotriazole compound>
E-1: Compound having the structure shown below (1,2,3-benzotriazole)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000031
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000031
 E-2:下記に示す構造を有する化合物(1-[N,N-ビス(2-エチルヘキシル)アミノメチル]ベンゾトリアゾール) E-2: Compound having the structure shown below (1- [N, N-bis (2-ethylhexyl) aminomethyl] benzotriazole)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000032
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000032
 E-3:下記に示す構造を有する化合物(5-カルボキシベンゾトリアゾール) E-3: Compound having the structure shown below (5-carboxybenzotriazole)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033

 
 E-4:下記に示す構造を有する化合物(1-(ヒドロキシメチル)-1H-ベンゾトリアゾール) E-4: Compound having the structure shown below (1- (hydroxymethyl) -1H-benzotriazole)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000034
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000034
 E-5:下記に示す構造を有する化合物(1-アセチル-1H-ベンゾトリアゾール) E-5: Compound having the structure shown below (1-acetyl-1H-benzotriazole)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000035
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000035
 E-6:下記に示す構造を有する化合物(1-アミノベンゾトリアゾール) E-6: Compound having the structure shown below (1-aminobenzotriazole)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000036
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000036
<比較化合物>
 E-7:下記に示す構造を有する化合物。
<Comparative compound>
E-7: A compound having the structure shown below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000037
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000037
 E-8:下記に示す構造を有する化合物。 E-8: A compound having the structure shown below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000038
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000038
 E-9:下記に示す構造を有する化合物。 E-9: A compound having the structure shown below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000039
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000039
 E-10:下記に示す構造を有する化合物。 E-10: Compound having the structure shown below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000040
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000040
 E-11:下記に示す構造を有する化合物。 E-11: A compound having the structure shown below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000041
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000041
 E-12:下記に示す構造を有する化合物。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000042
E-12: A compound having the structure shown below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000042
 表2において、[ベンゾトリアゾール]/[重合体]の欄に記載された数値は、重合体の固形分質量に基づいて算出した値である。 In Table 2, the numerical value described in the column of [benzotriazole] / [polymer] is a value calculated based on the solid content mass of the polymer.
 表2より、添加剤としてベンゾトリアゾール化合物を用いていない比較例1、2、及び4~9の各感光性転写材料、並びに酸基が酸分解性基で保護された基を有する構成単位を含むものの、ガラス転移温度が90℃を超える重合体を用いた比較例3及び10の感光性転写材料に比べ、実施例1~18の感光性転写材料は、形状再現性、直線性に優れることがわかった。また、表2により、実施例1~18の感光性転写材料は、転写性、濡れ性にも優れることがわかった。 From Table 2, each photosensitive transfer material of Comparative Examples 1, 2, and 4 to 9 not using a benzotriazole compound as an additive, and a structural unit having a group in which an acid group is protected by an acid-decomposable group are included. However, the photosensitive transfer materials of Examples 1 to 18 are excellent in shape reproducibility and linearity as compared with the photosensitive transfer materials of Comparative Examples 3 and 10 using a polymer having a glass transition temperature exceeding 90 ° C. all right. Table 2 also shows that the photosensitive transfer materials of Examples 1 to 18 are excellent in transferability and wettability.
<実施例101>
 100μm厚PET基材上に、第2層の導電層としてITOをスパッタリングで150nm厚にて成膜し、その上に第1層の導電層として銅を真空蒸着法で200nm厚にて成膜して、導電パターン形成用の基板とした。
 銅層上に実施例1で得た感光性転写材料を基板に貼り合わせて(ロール温度120℃、線圧0.8MPa、線速度1.0m/min.)、積層体とした。積層体を、仮支持体を剥離せずに一方向に導電層パッドが連結された構成を持つ図3に示すパターン(以下、「パターンA」とも称する。)を設けたフォトマスクを用いてコンタクトパターン露光した。
 なお、図3に示すパターンAは、実線部SL及びグレー部Gが遮光部であり、点線部DLはアライメント合わせの枠を仮想的に示したものである。
 その後仮支持体を剥離し、現像、水洗を行ってパターンAで描画された樹脂パターンを得た。次いで銅エッチング液(関東化学(株)製Cu-02)を用いて銅層をエッチングした後、ITOエッチング液(関東化学(株)製ITO-02)を用いてITO層をエッチングすることで、銅とITOが共にパターンAで描画された基板を得た。
 次いで、アライメントを合わせた状態で図4に示すパターン(以下、「パターンB」とも称する。)の開口部を設けたフォトマスクを用いてパターン露光し、現像、水洗を行った。
 なお、図4に示すパターンBは、グレー部Gが遮光部であり、点線部DLはアライメント合わせの枠を仮想的に示したものである。
 その後、Cu-02を用いて銅層をエッチングし、残った感光性樹脂層を剥離液(関東化学(株)製KP-301)を用いて剥離し、回路配線基板を得た。
 得られた回路配線基板を、顕微鏡で観察したところ、剥がれ、欠けなどは無く、きれいなパターンであった。
<Example 101>
On the 100 μm-thick PET substrate, ITO was deposited as a second conductive layer by sputtering to a thickness of 150 nm, and copper was deposited thereon as a first conductive layer at a thickness of 200 nm by vacuum evaporation. Thus, a substrate for forming a conductive pattern was obtained.
The photosensitive transfer material obtained in Example 1 was bonded to a substrate on a copper layer (roll temperature 120 ° C., linear pressure 0.8 MPa, linear velocity 1.0 m / min.) To obtain a laminate. The laminate is contacted using a photomask provided with a pattern shown in FIG. 3 (hereinafter also referred to as “pattern A”) having a configuration in which conductive layer pads are connected in one direction without peeling off the temporary support. The pattern was exposed.
In the pattern A shown in FIG. 3, the solid line portion SL and the gray portion G are light shielding portions, and the dotted line portion DL virtually shows an alignment alignment frame.
Thereafter, the temporary support was peeled off, developed and washed with water to obtain a resin pattern drawn with pattern A. Next, after etching the copper layer using a copper etching solution (Cu-02 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.), the ITO layer is etched using an ITO etching solution (ITO-02 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.), A substrate on which both copper and ITO were drawn in pattern A was obtained.
Next, pattern alignment was performed using a photomask provided with openings of the pattern shown in FIG. 4 (hereinafter also referred to as “pattern B”) in the aligned state, and development and washing were performed.
In the pattern B shown in FIG. 4, the gray portion G is a light shielding portion, and the dotted line portion DL is a virtual alignment alignment frame.
Thereafter, the copper layer was etched using Cu-02, and the remaining photosensitive resin layer was peeled off using a peeling solution (KP-301 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.) to obtain a circuit wiring board.
When the obtained circuit wiring board was observed with a microscope, it was a clean pattern with no peeling or chipping.
<実施例102>
 100μm厚PET基材上に、第2層の導電層としてITOをスパッタリングで150nm厚にて成膜し、その上に第1層の導電層として銅を真空蒸着法で200nm厚にて成膜して、導電パターン形成用の基板とした。
 銅層上に実施例1で得た感光性転写材料を基板に貼り合わせて(ロール温度120℃、線圧0.8MPa、線速度1.0m/min.)、積層体とした。積層体を、仮支持体を剥離せずに一方向に導電層パッドが連結された構成を持つパターンAを設けたフォトマスクを用いてパターン露光した。その後仮支持体を剥離し、現像、水洗を行ってパターンAで描画された樹脂パターンを得た。次いで銅エッチング液(関東化学(株)製Cu-02)を用いて銅層をエッチングした後、ITOエッチング液(関東化学(株)製ITO-02)を用いてITO層をエッチングすることで、銅とITOが共にパターンAで描画された基板を得た。
 次いで、残存しているレジスト上に保護層としてPET(A)を貼り合わせた。この状態で、アライメントを合わせた状態でパターンBの開口部を設けたフォトマスクを用いてパターン露光し、PET(A)を剥離した後に現像、水洗を行った。その後、Cu-02を用いて銅配線をエッチングし、残った感光性樹脂層を剥離液(関東化学(株)製KP-301)を用いて剥離し、回路配線基板を得た。
 得られた回路配線基板を、顕微鏡で観察したところ、剥がれ、欠けなどは無く、きれいなパターンであった。
<Example 102>
On the 100 μm-thick PET substrate, ITO was deposited as a second conductive layer by sputtering to a thickness of 150 nm, and copper was deposited thereon as a first conductive layer at a thickness of 200 nm by vacuum evaporation. Thus, a substrate for forming a conductive pattern was obtained.
The photosensitive transfer material obtained in Example 1 was bonded to a substrate on a copper layer (roll temperature 120 ° C., linear pressure 0.8 MPa, linear velocity 1.0 m / min.) To obtain a laminate. The laminate was subjected to pattern exposure using a photomask provided with a pattern A having a configuration in which conductive layer pads were connected in one direction without peeling off the temporary support. Thereafter, the temporary support was peeled off, developed and washed with water to obtain a resin pattern drawn with pattern A. Next, after etching the copper layer using a copper etching solution (Cu-02 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.), the ITO layer is etched using an ITO etching solution (ITO-02 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.), A substrate on which both copper and ITO were drawn in pattern A was obtained.
Subsequently, PET (A) was bonded as a protective layer on the remaining resist. In this state, pattern exposure was performed using a photomask provided with an opening of pattern B in the aligned state, and after developing PET (A), development and washing were performed. Thereafter, the copper wiring was etched using Cu-02, and the remaining photosensitive resin layer was stripped using a stripping solution (KP-301 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.) to obtain a circuit wiring board.
When the obtained circuit wiring board was observed with a microscope, it was a clean pattern with no peeling or chipping.
<実施例103>
 100μm厚シクロオレフィンポリマー(COP)基材上に、第2層の導電層としてITOをスパッタリングで150nm厚にて成膜し、その上に第1層の導電層として銅を真空蒸着法で200nm厚にて成膜して、導電パターン形成用の基板とした。
 銅層上に実施例1で得た感光性転写材料を基板に貼り合わせて(ロール温度100℃、線圧0.8MPa、線速度3.0m/min.)、積層体とした。積層体を、仮支持体を剥離せずに一方向に導電層パッドが連結された構成を持つパターンAを設けたフォトマスクを用いてパターン露光した。その後仮支持体を剥離し、現像、水洗を行ってパターンAで描画された樹脂パターンを得た。次いで銅エッチング液(関東化学(株)製Cu-02)を用いて銅層をエッチングした後、ITOエッチング液(関東化学(株)製ITO-02)を用いてITO層をエッチングし、剥離液(関東化学(株)製KP-301)を用いて剥離することで、銅とITOが共にパターンAで描画された基板を得た。
 次いで、残存しているレジスト上に保護層としてCOP(A)を貼り合わせた。この状態で、アライメントを合わせた状態でパターンBの開口部を設けたフォトマスクを用いてパターン露光し、COP(A)を剥離した後に現像、水洗を行った。その後、Cu-02を用いて銅配線をエッチングし、残った感光性樹脂層を剥離液(関東化学(株)製KP-301)を用いて剥離し、回路配線基板を得た。
 得られた回路配線基板を、顕微鏡で観察したところ、剥がれ、欠けなどは無く、きれいなパターンであった。
<Example 103>
On the 100 μm-thick cycloolefin polymer (COP) substrate, ITO was deposited as a second conductive layer by sputtering to a thickness of 150 nm, and copper was deposited thereon as a first conductive layer by a thickness of 200 nm by vacuum evaporation. To form a substrate for forming a conductive pattern.
The photosensitive transfer material obtained in Example 1 was bonded to a substrate on a copper layer (roll temperature 100 ° C., linear pressure 0.8 MPa, linear velocity 3.0 m / min.) To obtain a laminate. The laminate was subjected to pattern exposure using a photomask provided with a pattern A having a configuration in which conductive layer pads were connected in one direction without peeling off the temporary support. Thereafter, the temporary support was peeled off, developed and washed with water to obtain a resin pattern drawn with pattern A. Next, after etching the copper layer using a copper etching solution (Cu-02 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.), the ITO layer is etched using an ITO etching solution (ITO-02 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.), and a peeling solution. By peeling using (KP-301, manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.), a substrate on which both copper and ITO were drawn with the pattern A was obtained.
Subsequently, COP (A) was bonded as a protective layer on the remaining resist. In this state, pattern exposure was performed using a photomask provided with an opening of pattern B in the aligned state, and after developing COP (A), development and washing were performed. Thereafter, the copper wiring was etched using Cu-02, and the remaining photosensitive resin layer was stripped using a stripping solution (KP-301 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.) to obtain a circuit wiring board.
When the obtained circuit wiring board was observed with a microscope, it was a clean pattern with no peeling or chipping.
 2018年5月22日に出願された日本国特許出願2018-098328号の開示は、その全体が参照により本明細書に取り込まれる。本明細書に記載されたすべての文献、特許出願、及び技術規格は、個々の文献、特許出願、及び技術規格が参照により取り込まれることが具体的かつ個々に記された場合と同程度に、本明細書中に本明細書に取り込まれる。 The disclosure of Japanese Patent Application No. 2018-098328 filed on May 22, 2018 is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. All documents, patent applications, and technical standards mentioned in this specification are to the same extent as if each individual document, patent application, and technical standard were specifically and individually stated to be incorporated by reference, It is incorporated herein by reference.

Claims (17)

  1.  仮支持体と、
     酸基が酸分解性基で保護された基を有する構成単位を含み、かつ、ガラス転移温度が90℃以下である重合体、光酸発生剤、及びベンゾトリアゾール化合物を含有する感光性樹脂層と、
     を有する感光性転写材料。
    A temporary support;
    A photosensitive resin layer containing a polymer having a structural unit having an acid group protected by an acid-decomposable group and having a glass transition temperature of 90 ° C. or less, a photoacid generator, and a benzotriazole compound; ,
    A photosensitive transfer material.
  2.  前記ベンゾトリアゾール化合物が、下記式(1)で表される化合物である請求項1に記載の感光性転写材料。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001

     式(1)中、Pは、水素原子、又は置換基を表し、Qは、置換基を表し、nは、0~4の整数を表し、nが2以上の場合、複数のQは、同一でも異なっていてもよい。ただし、スルホン酸基、チオール基、及びチオエーテル基よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種の官能基を有するベンゾトリアゾール化合物を除く。
    The photosensitive transfer material according to claim 1, wherein the benzotriazole compound is a compound represented by the following formula (1).
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001

    In formula (1), P represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent, Q represents a substituent, n represents an integer of 0 to 4, and when n is 2 or more, a plurality of Q are the same But it can be different. However, a benzotriazole compound having at least one functional group selected from the group consisting of a sulfonic acid group, a thiol group, and a thioether group is excluded.
  3.  前記式(1)において、Pが、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、ヒドロキシ基、アルキル基、アリール基、複素環基、アシル基、アミノ基、カルボキシ基、アルキルアミノ基、ジアルキルアミノ基、又は-Z-Y基であり、Zは、アルキレン基を表し、Yは、ヒドロキシ基、カルボキシ基、アルキルアミノ基、又はジアルキルアミノ基を表す請求項2に記載の感光性転写材料。 In the formula (1), P represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an acyl group, an amino group, a carboxy group, an alkylamino group, a dialkylamino group, or —Z—. The photosensitive transfer material according to claim 2, wherein the photosensitive transfer material is a Y group, Z represents an alkylene group, and Y represents a hydroxy group, a carboxy group, an alkylamino group, or a dialkylamino group.
  4.  前記式(1)において、Qが、ハロゲン原子、ヒドロキシ基、アルキル基、アリール基、複素環基、アシル基、アミノ基、-Z-Y基、アルコキシ基、カルボキシ基、又はアルコキシアシル基であり、Zは、アルキレン基を表し、Yは、ヒドロキシ基、カルボキシ基、アルキルアミノ基、又はジアルキルアミノ基を表す請求項2又は請求項3に記載の感光性転写材料。 In the formula (1), Q is a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an acyl group, an amino group, a —ZY group, an alkoxy group, a carboxy group, or an alkoxyacyl group. 4. The photosensitive transfer material according to claim 2, wherein Z represents an alkylene group, and Y represents a hydroxy group, a carboxy group, an alkylamino group, or a dialkylamino group.
  5.  前記式(1)において、Pが、水素原子、ヒドロキシ基、炭素数が1~6のアルキル基、炭素数が1~6のアシル基、アミノ基、又は-Z-Y基であり、Zは、カルボキシ基で置換されていてもよい、炭素数が1又は2のアルキレン基を表し、Yは、ヒドロキシ基、カルボキシ基、又は各アルキル基の炭素数が1~10のジアルキルアミノ基を表し、Qが、ハロゲン原子、ヒドロキシ基、炭素数が1~6のアルキル基、炭素数が1~6のアシル基、アミノ基、炭素数が1~6のアルコキシ基、カルボキシ基、又は炭素数が1~6のアルコキシアシル基であり、nが、0又は1である請求項2に記載の感光性転写材料。 In the formula (1), P is a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, an acyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, an amino group, or a -ZY group, and Z is , Represents an alkylene group having 1 or 2 carbon atoms which may be substituted with a carboxy group, Y represents a hydroxy group, a carboxy group, or a dialkylamino group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms in each alkyl group; Q is a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, an acyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, an amino group, an alkoxy group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, a carboxy group, or 1 carbon atom. The photosensitive transfer material according to claim 2, which is an alkoxyacyl group of 1 to 6, wherein n is 0 or 1.
  6.  前記式(1)において、Pが、水素原子、又は-Z-Y基であり、Zは、カルボキシ基で置換されていてもよい、炭素数が1又は2のアルキレン基を表し、Yは、各アルキル基の炭素数が1~10のジアルキルアミノ基を表し、Qが、炭素数が1~6のアルキル基、又は炭素数が1~6のアルコキシ基であり、nが、0又は1である請求項5に記載の感光性転写材料。 In the formula (1), P represents a hydrogen atom or a —Z—Y group, Z represents an alkylene group having 1 or 2 carbon atoms which may be substituted with a carboxy group, and Y represents Each alkyl group represents a dialkylamino group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, Q is an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, or an alkoxy group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and n is 0 or 1 The photosensitive transfer material according to claim 5.
  7.  前記ベンゾトリアゾール化合物の含有量が、感光性樹脂層の全質量に対して、0.01質量%~10質量%である請求項1~請求項6のいずれか1項に記載の感光性転写材料。 The photosensitive transfer material according to claim 1, wherein the content of the benzotriazole compound is 0.01% by mass to 10% by mass with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer. .
  8.  前記重合体の含有量に対する、前記ベンゾトリアゾール化合物の含有量の質量比が、0.001~0.1である請求項1~請求項7のいずれか1項に記載の感光性転写材料。 The photosensitive transfer material according to any one of claims 1 to 7, wherein a mass ratio of the content of the benzotriazole compound to the content of the polymer is 0.001 to 0.1.
  9.  前記光酸発生剤の含有量に対する、前記ベンゾトリアゾール化合物の含有量の質量比が、0.01~5である請求項1~請求項8のいずれか1項に記載の感光性転写材料。 The photosensitive transfer material according to any one of claims 1 to 8, wherein a mass ratio of the content of the benzotriazole compound to the content of the photoacid generator is 0.01 to 5.
  10.  前記重合体中の酸基が酸分解性基で保護された基を有する構成単位の含有量が、重合体の全質量に対して、20質量%~50質量%である請求項1~請求項9のいずれか1項に記載の感光性転写材料。 The content of the structural unit having a group in which an acid group in the polymer is protected by an acid-decomposable group is 20% by mass to 50% by mass with respect to the total mass of the polymer. 10. The photosensitive transfer material according to any one of 9 above.
  11.  前記酸基が酸分解性基で保護された基を有する構成単位が、下記式(A1)で表される構成単位である請求項1~請求項10のいずれか1項に記載の感光性転写材料。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002

     式(A1)中、R31、及びR32は、それぞれ独立して、水素原子、アルキル基、又はアリール基を表し、R31、及びR32の少なくとも一方が、アルキル基、又はアリール基であり、R33は、アルキル基、又はアリール基を表し、R31又はR32と、R33とが連結して環状エーテルを形成してもよく、R34は、水素原子、又はメチル基を表し、Xは、単結合、又は連結基を表す。
    The photosensitive transfer according to any one of claims 1 to 10, wherein the structural unit having a group in which the acid group is protected with an acid-decomposable group is a structural unit represented by the following formula (A1). material.
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002

    In formula (A1), R 31 and R 32 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group, and at least one of R 31 and R 32 is an alkyl group or an aryl group. , R 33 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, R 31 or R 32 and R 33 may be linked to form a cyclic ether, R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, X 0 represents a single bond or a linking group.
  12.  前記感光性樹脂層が、前記ベンゾトリアゾール化合物以外のアミン化合物をさらに含有する請求項1~請求項11のいずれか1項に記載の感光性転写材料。 The photosensitive transfer material according to any one of claims 1 to 11, wherein the photosensitive resin layer further contains an amine compound other than the benzotriazole compound.
  13.  前記重合体が、pKaHが3以上の基を有する構成単位をさらに含む請求項1~請求項12のいずれか1項に記載の感光性転写材料。 The photosensitive transfer material according to any one of claims 1 to 12, wherein the polymer further comprises a structural unit having a pKaH group of 3 or more.
  14.  前記仮支持体と前記感光性樹脂層との間に、中間層をさらに有する請求項1~請求項13のいずれか1項に記載の感光性転写材料。 The photosensitive transfer material according to any one of claims 1 to 13, further comprising an intermediate layer between the temporary support and the photosensitive resin layer.
  15.  基板に対し、請求項1~請求項14のいずれか1項に記載の感光性転写材料の、仮支持体の感光性樹脂層側の最外層を貼り合わせる工程と、
     前記貼り合わせる工程後の前記感光性転写材料の前記感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する工程と、
     前記パターン露光する工程後の感光性樹脂層を現像してパターンを形成する工程と、
     前記パターンが配置されていない領域における基板をエッチング処理する工程と、を含む、
     回路配線の製造方法。
    A step of bonding the outermost layer on the photosensitive resin layer side of the temporary support of the photosensitive transfer material according to any one of claims 1 to 14 to a substrate;
    Pattern exposure of the photosensitive resin layer of the photosensitive transfer material after the bonding step;
    Developing the photosensitive resin layer after the pattern exposing step to form a pattern; and
    Etching the substrate in a region where the pattern is not disposed,
    Circuit wiring manufacturing method.
  16.  前記基板が、銅を含む基板である請求項15に記載の回路配線の製造方法。 The circuit wiring manufacturing method according to claim 15, wherein the substrate is a substrate containing copper.
  17.  基板に対し、請求項1~請求項14のいずれか1項に記載の感光性転写材料の、仮支持体の感光性樹脂層側の最外層を貼り合わせる工程と、
     前記貼り合わせる工程後の前記感光性転写材料の前記感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する工程と、
     前記パターン露光する工程後の感光性樹脂層を現像してパターンを形成する工程と、
     前記パターンが配置されていない領域における基板をエッチング処理する工程と、を含む、
     タッチパネルの製造方法。
    A step of bonding the outermost layer on the photosensitive resin layer side of the temporary support of the photosensitive transfer material according to any one of claims 1 to 14 to a substrate;
    Pattern exposure of the photosensitive resin layer of the photosensitive transfer material after the bonding step;
    Developing the photosensitive resin layer after the pattern exposing step to form a pattern; and
    Etching the substrate in a region where the pattern is not disposed,
    A method for manufacturing a touch panel.
PCT/JP2019/019460 2018-05-22 2019-05-16 Photosensitive transfer material, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method WO2019225460A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2020521190A JPWO2019225460A1 (en) 2018-05-22 2019-05-16 Photosensitive transfer material, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method
CN201980033557.6A CN112136081A (en) 2018-05-22 2019-05-16 Photosensitive transfer material, method for manufacturing circuit wiring, and method for manufacturing touch panel

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2018098328 2018-05-22
JP2018-098328 2018-05-22

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2019225460A1 true WO2019225460A1 (en) 2019-11-28

Family

ID=68616740

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2019/019460 WO2019225460A1 (en) 2018-05-22 2019-05-16 Photosensitive transfer material, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method

Country Status (4)

Country Link
JP (1) JPWO2019225460A1 (en)
CN (1) CN112136081A (en)
TW (1) TW202003598A (en)
WO (1) WO2019225460A1 (en)

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2004347951A (en) * 2003-05-23 2004-12-09 Tokyo Ohka Kogyo Co Ltd Chemically amplifying photoresist composition, photoresist layered body, method for manufacturing photoresist composition, method for manufacturing photoresist pattern and method for manufacturing connecting terminal
JP2017032983A (en) * 2015-08-04 2017-02-09 信越化学工業株式会社 Chemically amplified positive resist composition and pattern forming method
JP2017156735A (en) * 2016-02-26 2017-09-07 富士フイルム株式会社 Photosensitive transfer material and method for producing circuit wiring
JP2018031847A (en) * 2016-08-23 2018-03-01 富士フイルム株式会社 Photosensitive transfer material and method for producing circuit wiring

Family Cites Families (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP6574846B2 (en) * 2015-09-30 2019-09-11 富士フイルム株式会社 Dry film resist, circuit wiring manufacturing method, circuit wiring, input device and display device
JP2017078852A (en) * 2015-10-21 2017-04-27 富士フイルム株式会社 Dry film resist, method for producing circuit wiring, circuit wiring, input device and display device
KR102517695B1 (en) * 2017-01-20 2023-04-03 제이에스알 가부시끼가이샤 Photosensitive composition, cured film and method for producing same, display device, light emitting element, and light receiving element

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2004347951A (en) * 2003-05-23 2004-12-09 Tokyo Ohka Kogyo Co Ltd Chemically amplifying photoresist composition, photoresist layered body, method for manufacturing photoresist composition, method for manufacturing photoresist pattern and method for manufacturing connecting terminal
JP2017032983A (en) * 2015-08-04 2017-02-09 信越化学工業株式会社 Chemically amplified positive resist composition and pattern forming method
JP2017156735A (en) * 2016-02-26 2017-09-07 富士フイルム株式会社 Photosensitive transfer material and method for producing circuit wiring
JP2018031847A (en) * 2016-08-23 2018-03-01 富士フイルム株式会社 Photosensitive transfer material and method for producing circuit wiring

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JPWO2019225460A1 (en) 2021-04-01
CN112136081A (en) 2020-12-25
TW202003598A (en) 2020-01-16

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP6999693B2 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, resin pattern manufacturing method, and wiring manufacturing method
WO2018179640A1 (en) Photosensitive transferring material and method for producing circuit wiring
JP6995865B2 (en) Manufacturing method of photosensitive transfer material and manufacturing method of circuit wiring
JP2018031847A (en) Photosensitive transfer material and method for producing circuit wiring
JP2022069472A (en) Photosensitive transfer material and its manufacturing method, manufacturing method of resin pattern, as well as, manufacturing method of circuit wiring
JP6893550B2 (en) Manufacturing method of photosensitive transfer material and circuit wiring
TW201922817A (en) Method for manufacturing circuit wiring and method for manufacturing touch panel
JP6992097B2 (en) Resist pattern manufacturing method, circuit board manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method
JP6685461B2 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, method for manufacturing circuit wiring, and method for manufacturing touch panel
JP6812556B2 (en) Photosensitive resin composition, photosensitive transfer material, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method
JP6968273B2 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, resin pattern manufacturing method, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method.
WO2019225460A1 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method
JP6832899B2 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method
WO2019151534A1 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, manufacturing method for circuit wiring, and manufacturing method for touch panel
WO2019225363A1 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, method for producing resin pattern, method for manufacturing circuit wiring, and method for manufacturing touch panel
JP7102517B2 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, resin pattern manufacturing method, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method
WO2023090253A1 (en) Laminate, method for producing same, and electronic device
JP6685460B2 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, method for manufacturing circuit wiring, and method for manufacturing touch panel
TW202112856A (en) Photosensitive transfer material, method for producing resin pattern, method for producing wiring line, and method for producing touch panel
JP2019128445A (en) Photosensitive transfer material and manufacturing method thereof, and resin pattern manufacturing method and circuit wiring manufacturing method
WO2019021622A1 (en) Photosensitive resin composition, photosensitive transfer material, circuit wiring production method, and touch panel production method

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 19808261

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2020521190

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 19808261

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1